WO2020118116A1 - Heterocyclyl polymethine ir chromophores - Google Patents

Heterocyclyl polymethine ir chromophores Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020118116A1
WO2020118116A1 PCT/US2019/064790 US2019064790W WO2020118116A1 WO 2020118116 A1 WO2020118116 A1 WO 2020118116A1 US 2019064790 W US2019064790 W US 2019064790W WO 2020118116 A1 WO2020118116 A1 WO 2020118116A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
compound
alkyl
aryl
mmol
heteroaryl
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2019/064790
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Anthony SPEARMAN
Monica PENGSHUNG
Ellen M. SLETTEN
Emily D. COSCO
Original Assignee
The Regents Of The University Of California
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by The Regents Of The University Of California filed Critical The Regents Of The University Of California
Priority to EP19892945.7A priority Critical patent/EP3891224A4/en
Priority to US17/311,180 priority patent/US20210363124A1/en
Publication of WO2020118116A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020118116A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D311/00Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only hetero atom, condensed with other rings
    • C07D311/02Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only hetero atom, condensed with other rings ortho- or peri-condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D311/04Benzo[b]pyrans, not hydrogenated in the carbocyclic ring
    • C07D311/58Benzo[b]pyrans, not hydrogenated in the carbocyclic ring other than with oxygen or sulphur atoms in position 2 or 4
    • C07D311/60Benzo[b]pyrans, not hydrogenated in the carbocyclic ring other than with oxygen or sulphur atoms in position 2 or 4 with aryl radicals attached in position 2
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D311/00Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only hetero atom, condensed with other rings
    • C07D311/02Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings having one oxygen atom as the only hetero atom, condensed with other rings ortho- or peri-condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D311/78Ring systems having three or more relevant rings
    • C07D311/92Naphthopyrans; Hydrogenated naphthopyrans
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/08Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing alicyclic rings
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D405/00Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D405/02Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D405/08Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing alicyclic rings
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D405/00Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D405/14Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing three or more hetero rings
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D409/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D409/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings
    • C07D409/08Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing alicyclic rings
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D491/00Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed ring system both one or more rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms and one or more rings having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D459/00, C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D489/00
    • C07D491/22Heterocyclic compounds containing in the condensed ring system both one or more rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms and one or more rings having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D459/00, C07D463/00, C07D477/00 or C07D489/00 in which the condensed system contains four or more hetero rings
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B23/00Methine or polymethine dyes, e.g. cyanine dyes
    • C09B23/0008Methine or polymethine dyes, e.g. cyanine dyes substituted on the polymethine chain
    • C09B23/0016Methine or polymethine dyes, e.g. cyanine dyes substituted on the polymethine chain the substituent being a halogen atom
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B23/00Methine or polymethine dyes, e.g. cyanine dyes
    • C09B23/0066Methine or polymethine dyes, e.g. cyanine dyes the polymethine chain being part of a carbocyclic ring,(e.g. benzene, naphtalene, cyclohexene, cyclobutenene-quadratic acid)
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B23/00Methine or polymethine dyes, e.g. cyanine dyes
    • C09B23/02Methine or polymethine dyes, e.g. cyanine dyes the polymethine chain containing an odd number of >CH- or >C[alkyl]- groups
    • C09B23/04Methine or polymethine dyes, e.g. cyanine dyes the polymethine chain containing an odd number of >CH- or >C[alkyl]- groups one >CH- group, e.g. cyanines, isocyanines, pseudocyanines
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B23/00Methine or polymethine dyes, e.g. cyanine dyes
    • C09B23/02Methine or polymethine dyes, e.g. cyanine dyes the polymethine chain containing an odd number of >CH- or >C[alkyl]- groups
    • C09B23/06Methine or polymethine dyes, e.g. cyanine dyes the polymethine chain containing an odd number of >CH- or >C[alkyl]- groups three >CH- groups, e.g. carbocyanines
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B23/00Methine or polymethine dyes, e.g. cyanine dyes
    • C09B23/02Methine or polymethine dyes, e.g. cyanine dyes the polymethine chain containing an odd number of >CH- or >C[alkyl]- groups
    • C09B23/08Methine or polymethine dyes, e.g. cyanine dyes the polymethine chain containing an odd number of >CH- or >C[alkyl]- groups more than three >CH- groups, e.g. polycarbocyanines
    • C09B23/086Methine or polymethine dyes, e.g. cyanine dyes the polymethine chain containing an odd number of >CH- or >C[alkyl]- groups more than three >CH- groups, e.g. polycarbocyanines more than five >CH- groups

Definitions

  • Photomedicine broadly refers to the use of light for diagnostic or therapeutic procedures, including optical imaging, photothermal therapy (thermal ablation of cells) and photodynamic therapy (reactive oxygen species induced apoptosis or necrosis).
  • photothermal therapy thermal ablation of cells
  • photodynamic therapy reactive oxygen species induced apoptosis or necrosis.
  • NIR near-infrared
  • SWIR short-wave infrared
  • SWIR-excitable fluorophores either have low or negligible quantum yields, or are too hydrophobic to be used directly for in vivo imaging.
  • the present disclosure provides NIR and SWIR-active small molecules with improved properties for use in optical imaging, photothermal therapy, and photodynamic therapy. Accordingly, the present disclosure provides compounds of formula I or formula II:
  • a and B are each independently selected from a bicyclic, tricyclic, or tetracyclic heteroaryl; wherein A and B are each independently substituted with one or more R 7a and/or R 7b ; each instance of p is independently 0, 1, or 2;
  • X is H, halo, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkynyl, N(R 3 )2, P(R 3 )2, PO(R 3 )2, SR 4 , S(0)R 4 , S(0)2R 4 , OR 4 , SeR 4 , Se(0)R 4 , Se(0)2R 4 , azido, cyano, haloalkyl (such as perfluoroalkyl), hydroxyl; R 1 and R 2 are each independently selected from F, D, or T; or R 1 and R 2 together complete a cycloalkenyl ring, a heterocyclyl ring, or a polycyclyl ring system;
  • R 3 is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl
  • R 4 is H, alkyl, or aryl
  • each R 7a and/or R 7b is independently selected from H, alkoxy, acyl, heteroaryl,
  • sulfonate carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, halo, aryl, amino, alkylamino, Ci-6 alkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, haloalkyl, aralkenyl (preferably arylethenyl), aralkynyl (preferably arylethynyl), hetaralkenyl (preferably heteroarylethenyl), hetaralkynyl (preferably heteroarylethynyl), and heterocyclyl;
  • R 7a and/or R 7b groups combine to form a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring
  • the present disclosure also provides methods of using these dyes for in vivo sensing or cargo delivery, and methods of preparing these dyes.
  • FIG. 1A shows a generalized polymethine dye scaffold.
  • FIG. IB shows the lpkic,opi for selected polymethine dyes.
  • FIG. 2 shows the normalized absorbance (solid) and photoluminescence (dotted) of 5, 7- 10 in dichloromethane.
  • FIGs. 3A shows images of vials of IR-26, IR-1061 and Flav7 with matched optical density at 808 nm in dichloromethane, excited at 808 nm, collected using an InGaAs camera (1000-1500 nm).
  • FIGs. 3B shows the average background subtracted camera intensity for ten frames normalized to exposure.
  • FIGs. 4A-4G show normalized absorption and emission spectra for exemplary compounds of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 5 shows normalized absorption and emission spectra for exemplary compounds of the present disclosure.
  • a and B are each independently selected from a bicyclic, tricyclic, or tetracyclic heteroaryl; wherein A and B are each independently substituted with one or more R 7a and/or R 7b ; each instance of p is independently 0, 1, or 2;
  • X is H, halo, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkynyl, N(R 3 )2, P(R 3 )2, PO(R 3 )2, SR 4 , S(0)R 4 , S(0)2R 4 , OR 4 , SeR 4 , Se(0)R 4 , Se(0)2R 4 , azido, cyano, haloalkyl (such as perfluoroalkyl), hydroxyl;
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently selected from F, D, or T; or R 1 and R 2 together complete a cycloalkenyl ring, a heterocyclyl ring, or a polycyclyl ring system;
  • R 3 is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl
  • R 4 is H, alkyl, or aryl
  • each R 7a and/or R 7b is independently selected from H, alkoxy, acyl, heteroaryl,
  • sulfonate carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, halo, aryl, amino, alkylamino, Ci-6 alkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, haloalkyl, aralkenyl (preferably arylethenyl), aralkynyl (preferably arylethynyl), hetaralkenyl (preferably heteroarylethenyl), hetaralkynyl (preferably heteroarylethynyl), and heterocyclyl;
  • R 7a and/or R 7b groups combine to form a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring
  • R 1 and R 2 are the same.
  • R 1 is F. In certain embodiments, R 1 is D. In certain embodiments, R 1 is T.
  • R 2 is F. In certain embodiments, R 2 is D. In certain embodiments, R 2 is T. In certain embodiments, the present disclosure provides compounds of formula I or formula
  • a and B are each independently selected from a bicyclic, tricyclic, or tetracyclic heteroaryl; wherein A and B are each independently substituted with one or more R 7a and/or R 7b ; each instance of p is independently 0, 1, or 2;
  • X is H, halo, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkynyl, N(R 3 )2, P(R 3 )2, PO(R 3 )2, SR 4 , OR 4 , SeR 4 , azido, cyano, haloalkyl (such as perfluoroalkyl), or hydroxyl;
  • R 1 and R 2 together complete a cycloalkenyl ring, a heterocyclyl ring, or a polycyclyl ring system;
  • R 3 is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl
  • R 4 is H, alkyl, or aryl
  • each R 7a and/or R 7b is independently selected from H, alkoxy, acyl, heteroaryl,
  • sulfonate carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, halo, aryl, amino, alkylamino, Ci-6 alkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, haloalkyl, aralkenyl (preferably arylethenyl), aralkynyl (preferably arylethynyl), hetaralkenyl (preferably heteroarylethenyl), hetaralkynyl (preferably heteroarylethynyl), and heterocyclyl;
  • R 7a and/or R 7b groups combine to form a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring
  • At least one of A and B is not:
  • the compounds of formulas I and II are not:
  • the compounds of formulas I and II are not:
  • the compounds of formulas I and II are none of the structural formulae depicted above.
  • R 1 and R 2 together complete a cycloalkenyl ring, such as a cyclohexenyl ring.
  • a and B are different.
  • A is substituted by one or more substituents independently selected from R 7a and R 7b ;
  • B is substituted by one or more substituents independently selected from R 7a and R 71 ’;
  • each instance of R 7a and R 71 ’ is independently selected from alkyl (such as haloalkyl, fluoroalkyl or sulfonatoalkyl), alkoxy (such as haloalkyloxy, fluoroalkyloxy or sulfonatoalkyloxy), acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, N(R 6 )R 6 , sulfonate, carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, or halo; and
  • each instance of R 6 is independently selected from H, alkyl, such as fluoroalkyl or
  • A is substituted by one or more substituents independently selected from R 7a and R 71 ’;
  • B is substituted by one or more substituents independently selected from R 7a and R 71 ’;
  • each instance of R 7a and R 71 ’ is independently selected from alkyl (such as haloalkyl, fluoroalkyl or sulfonatoalkyl), alkoxy (such as haloalkyloxy, fluoroalkyloxy or sulfonatoalkyloxy), acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, N(R 6 )R 6 , sulfonate, carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, or halo; and
  • each instance of R 6 is independently selected from H, alkyl, such as fluoroalkyl or
  • sulfonatoalkyl acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; or two instances of R 6 connected to the same N may complete a heterocyclyl.
  • A is substituted by one or more substituents independently selected from R 7a and R 7b ;
  • B is substituted by one or more substituents independently selected from R 7a and R 71 ’;
  • each instance of R 7a and R 71 ’ is independently selected from alkyl, such as fluoroalkyl or
  • sulfonatoalkyl acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, N(R 6 )R 6 , sulfonate, or carbonate;
  • each instance of R 6 is independently selected from H, alkyl, such as fluoroalkyl or
  • sulfonatoalkyl acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; or two instances of R 6 connected to the same N may complete a heterocyclyl.
  • At least one R 7a or R 71 ’ is a water-solubilizing group, for example one capable, either alone or in combination with other water-solubilizing groups, of rendering the compound soluble in an aqueous medium.
  • the water-solubilizing group is selected from a carboxylate group, a sulfonate, an anionic-substituted alkyl, or an anionic-substituted alkyl ether.
  • the water-solubilizing group is a poly(ethylene glycol), a poly(oxazoline), or a poly(zwitterion).
  • the water-solubilizing group is a poly(ethylene glycol), or a poly(oxazoline).
  • the molecular weight of the poly(ethylene glycol), a poly(oxazoline), or a poly(zwitterion) is about 100 daltons to about 5,000 daltons. In certain embodiments, the molecular weight of the poly(ethylene glycol) or a poly(oxazoline) is about 1,000 daltons to about 5,000 daltons.
  • At least one R 7a or R 7b is an electron-withdrawing group, for example to alter the electronic and/or optical properties of the compound.
  • the electron-withdrawing group is selected from haloalkyl, cyano, sulfonate, sulfonatoalkyl, sulfonatoalkyloxy, carboxyl, ester, amide, halo, nitro, alkylammonium, amine oxide, or haloalkyl, such as trifluoromethyl.
  • At least one R 7a or R 76 is selected from fluoroalkyl, for example one capable, either alone or in combination with other water-solubilizing groups, of rendering the compound soluble in a fluorous medium.
  • at least one R 7a or R 76 is N(R 6 )R 6 .
  • a and B are independently selected from
  • W is selected from O, SO, SO2, PR 6 , PO2H, POR 6 , SeO, Se0 2 , TeO, Te0 2 , SIR 6 2 , GeR 6 2 , BH, BOH, or BR 6 ;
  • Y is selected from 0 + , S + , Se + , Te + , SiR, GeR 6 , N, NR 6+ , or NO;
  • a and B are independently optionally substituted with one or more R 7a and/or R 76 , up to the limits of valence.
  • a and B are independently selected from
  • Q is N(R 6 )R 6 OR 6 , SR 6 , SO(R 6 ) 2 , SeR 6 , SeOR 6 , SeO(R 6 ) 2 , P(R 6 )R 6 , PO(R 6 )R 6 , B(R 6 ) 2 , or halo;
  • n 0, 1 , 2, 3, 4, or 5 subject to the limits of valence, preferably 0 or 1.
  • a and B are independently selected from:
  • n 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 subject to the limits of valence, preferably 0 or 1.
  • a and B are independently selected from
  • R7ib is C(R 31 )(R 32 ), arylene, heteroarylene, cycloalkylene, or heterocyclylene; R 31 and R 32 are each independently selected from H or alkyl (e.g., methyl); n is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 subject to the limits of valence, preferably 0 or 1; and o is 0, 1, 2, or 3.
  • R7ib is arylene, heteroarylene, cycloalkylene, or heterocyclylene
  • the recited ring(s) may be either fused to the ring in which R7ib appears, or may be in a spiro relationship to that ring.
  • R7ib is C(R 31 )(R 32 ); and R 31 and R 32 are each alkyl (e.g., methyl). In other embodiments, R7ib is arylene (e.g., phenylene).
  • a and B are independently selected from
  • o is 2.
  • the compound is or
  • At least one R 7a or R 7b is aryl, trifluoromethyl, tert-butyl, H, aralkenyl, aralkynyl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclyl.
  • at least one R 7a or R 7b is phenyl, heterocyclyl, polycylic aromatic, aralkenyl, or aralkynyl.
  • at least one R 7a or R 71 ’ is alkyloxy (e.g., methoxy), or cycloalkyl (e.g., adamantyl).
  • At least one R 7a or R 71 ’ is substituted with one or more R 7 , wherein R 7 is selected from alkyl (such as haloalkyl, fluoroalkyl or sulfonatoalkyl), alkoxy (such as haloalkyloxy, fluoroalkyloxy or sulfonatoalkyloxy), acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, N(R 6 )R 6 , sulfonate, carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, or halo.
  • the R 7 on the at least one R 7a or R 71 ’ is at the para position.
  • the compound is selected from:
  • Ar is aryl
  • n 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5, preferably 0 or 1.
  • the compound is N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-N-phenyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N-(2-aminoethyl)-2-aminoethyl-N
  • R 7a and R 7b are each aryl (e.g., phenyl).
  • at least one R 7a or R 7b is substituted with one or more R 7 , wherein R 7 is selected from alkyl (such as alkyl (e.g., methyl), haloalkyl, fluoroalkyl (e.g., trifluoromethyl) or sulfonatoalkyl), alkoxy (such as methoxy, haloalkyloxy, fluoroalkyloxy or sulfonatoalkyloxy), acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, sulfonate, carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, amino (e.g., dimethyl amino) or halo (e.g., fluoro, chloro, or bromo).
  • alkyl such as alkyl (e.g., methyl), haloalkyl, fluoroalky
  • a and B are
  • R 6 is alkyl (e.g., methyl or ethyl).
  • two instances of R 6 connected to the same N complete a heterocyclyl (e.g., azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, or piperidinyl).
  • two instances of R 6 connected to the same N complete a heteroaryl (e.g., carbazolyl).
  • X is Cl
  • At least one of A and B is a tricyclic moiety. In certain embodiments, at least one of A and B is carbazolyl. In certain embodiments, at least one of A and B is substituted with N(R n )R 12 , wherein R 11 is cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, and R 12 is selected from H, alkyl, acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; or wherein R 11 and R 12 together complete a heterocyclyl. In certain embodiments, at least one of A and B is substituted with a 4-8 member N-linked heterocyclyl. In certain embodiments, at least one of A and B is
  • a and B is substituted with a fluoroalkyl.
  • the compound is a compound of formula I. In other embodiments, the compound is a compound of formula II.
  • At least one of A and B is:
  • each instance of q is independently selected from 0, 1, 2, or 3.
  • X is H, halo, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkynyl, N(R 3 )2, P(R 3 )2, PO(R 3 )2, SR 4 , OR 4 , SeR 4 , azido, cyano, haloalkyl (such as perfluoroalkyl), or hydroxyl.
  • X is aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkynyl, N(R 3 )2, P(R 3 )2, PO(R 3 )2, SR 4 , OR 4 , SeR 4 , azido, cyano, haloalkyl (such as perfluoroalkyl), or hydroxyl.
  • A is optionally substituted by one or more substituents independently selected from R 7a and/or
  • B is optionally substituted by one or more substituents independently selected from R 7a and/or
  • each instance of R 6 is independently selected from H, alkyl, such as fluoroalkyl or
  • sulfonatoalkyl acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; or two instances of R 6 connected to the same N may complete a heterocyclyl; and
  • each instance of R 7a and/or R 7b is independently selected from alkyl, such as fluoroalkyl or
  • sulfonatoalkyl acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, N(R 6 )R 6 , sulfonate, or carbonate;
  • R 7a and/or R 7b groups combine to form a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring
  • At least one R 7a and/or R 71 ’ is a water-solubilizing group.
  • the water-solubilizing group is selected from carboxylate group, a sulfonate, an anionic-substituted alkyl, or an anionic-substituted alkyl ether
  • at least one R 7a and/or R 71 ’ is an electron-withdrawing group.
  • the electron-withdrawing group is selected from haloalkyl, cyano, sulfonate, sulfonatoalkyl, sulfonatoalkyloxy, carboxyl, ester, amide, halo, nitro, alkylammonium, amine oxide, or haloalkyl such as trifluoromethyl.
  • at least one R 7a and/or R 71 ’ is an electron- donating group.
  • At least one R 7a and/or R 71 ’ is selected from fluoroalkyl, for instance to render the compound soluble in afluorous medium.
  • at least one R 7a and/or R 71 ’ is (CH2)3C6Fi3.
  • a and B are independently selected from carbazolyl, phenanthrolinyl, dibenzofuranyl, acridinyl, phenanthridinyl, xanthenyl,
  • a and B are independently optionally substituted with one or more R 7a and/or R 76 , up to the limits of valence;
  • W is O, SO, SO2, PR 6 , PO2H, POR 6 , SeO, Se0 2 , TeO, Te0 2 , SIR 6 2 , GeR 6 2 , BH, BOH, or BR 6 ;
  • Y is 0 + , S + , Se + , Te + , SiR, GeR 6 , N, NR 6+ , or NO.
  • a and B are independently selected from
  • the at least one R 7a or R 76 is substituted with one or more R 7 , wherein R 7 is selected from alkyl (such as haloalkyl, fluoroalkyl or sulfonatoalkyl), alkoxy (such as haloalkyloxy, fluoroalkyloxy or sulfonatoalkyloxy), acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, N(R 6 )R 6 , sulfonate, carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, or halo.
  • the R 7 on the at least one R 7a or R 71 ’ is at the para position.
  • a and B are independently selected from
  • Y is 0 + .
  • W is O, SO, S0 2 , PR 6 , PO2H, POR 6 , SeO, Se0 2 , TeO, Te0 2 , SIR 6 2 , GeR 6 2 , BH, BOH, or BR 6 ; and Y is S + , Se + , Te + , SiR, GeR 6 , N, NR 6+ , or NO.
  • a and B are independently selected from carbazolyl, phenanthrolinyl, dibenzofuranyl, acridinyl, phenanthridinyl, xanthenyl,
  • At least one of A and B is a tricyclic or tetracyclic moiety.
  • At least one of A and B is a tricyclic moiety, e.g., at least one of A and B is carbazolyl, phenanthrolinyl, dibenzofuranyl, acridinyl, phenanthridinyl, xanthenyl,
  • At least one of A and B is a tetracyclic moiety, e.g., at least one of A and B is selected from
  • At least one of A and B comprises a heteroatom other than nitrogen or oxygen. In certain embodiments, at least one of A or B comprises a heteroatom selected from sulfur, silicon, or selenium. In certain embodiments of the compound of formula (I), at least one of A and B is selected from:
  • At least one of A and B is substituted with N(R n )R 12 , wherein R 11 is cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, and R 12 is selected from H, alkyl, acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; or wherein R 11 and R 12 together complete a heterocyclyl.
  • at least one of A and B is substituted with a 4-8 member N-linked heteroaryl or heterocyclyl.
  • one or both of A and B are selected from the bicyclic, tricyclic, and tetracyclic moieties disclosed in International Patent Application PCT/US 18/36099, filed June 5, 2018, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • one or both of A and B is ionic such that the compound of fomula (I) or formula (II) as a whole bears a charge.
  • Such compounds may be paired with any suitable counter ion of interest, for example BF4 , tetraarylborate, Cl , Br , G, CIO4 , OAc , trifluoroacetate, arylacetate, sulfonate, or phosphate.
  • compositions comprising a compound as described herein.
  • the present disclosure provides methods of delivering a compound or composition disclosed herein to a living animal, comprising administering the compound or composition to the living animal.
  • the present disclosure provides methods of obtaining an image comprising illuminating a compound disclosed herein with excitation light, thereby causing the compound to emit fluorescence; and detecting the fluorescence.
  • the image is obtained in vivo.
  • the methods further comprise administering the compound to a living animal.
  • the present disclosure provides methods of administering a therapy comprising administering a compound or composition disclosed herein, for example to an animal.
  • the methods further comprise illuminating the compound with excitation light.
  • the methods further comprise generating singlet oxygen by illuminating the compound with excitation light.
  • the present disclosure provides methods of preparing a compound as disclosed herein, comprising:
  • a and B are each independently selected from a bicyclic, tricyclic, or tetracyclic heteroaryl; wherein A and B are each independently substituted with one or more R 7a and/or R 7b ; each instance of p is independently 0, 1, or 2;
  • X is H, halo, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkynyl, N(R 3 )2, P(R 3 )2, PO(R 3 )2, SR 4 ,
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently selected from F, D, or T; or R 1 and R 2 together complete a cycloalkenyl ring, a heterocyclyl ring, or a polycyclyl ring system;
  • R 3 is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl
  • R 4 is H, alkyl, or aryl
  • each R 7a and/or R 7b is independently selected from H, alkoxy, acyl, heteroaryl,
  • sulfonate carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, halo, aryl, amino, alkylamino, Ci-6 alkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, haloalkyl, aralkenyl (preferably arylethenyl), aralkynyl (preferably arylethynyl), hetaralkenyl (preferably heteroarylethenyl), hetaralkynyl (preferably heteroarylethynyl), and heterocyclyl;
  • R 7a and/or R 7b groups combine to form a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring
  • the present disclosure provides methods of preparing a compound as disclosed herein, comprising:
  • a and B are each independently selected from a bicyclic, tricyclic, or tetracyclic heteroaryl; wherein A and B are each independently substituted with one or more R 7a and/or R 7b ;
  • each instance of p is independently 0, 1, or 2;
  • a and B are different;
  • X is H, halo, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkynyl, N(R 3 )2, P(R 3 )2, PO(R 3 )2, SR 4 , OR 4 , SeR 4 , azido, cyano, haloalkyl (such as perfluoroalkyl), hydroxyl;
  • R 1 and R 2 together complete a cycloalkenyl ring, a heterocyclyl ring, or a polycyclyl ring system;
  • R 3 is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl;
  • R 4 is H, alkyl, or aryl
  • each R 7a and/or R 7b is independently selected from H, alkoxy, acyl, heteroaryl,
  • sulfonate carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, halo, aryl, amino, alkylamino, Ci-6 alkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, haloalkyl, aralkenyl (preferably arylethenyl), aralkynyl (preferably
  • arylethynyl hetaralkenyl (preferably heteroarylethenyl), hetaralkynyl (preferably heteroarylethynyl), and heterocyclyl;
  • R 7a and/or R 7b groups combine to form a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring
  • R 8 is alkyl, such as methyl.
  • An isotopic variation of a compound of the invention is defined as one in which at least one atom is replaced by an atom having the same atomic number but an atomic mass different from the atomic mass usually or predominantly found in nature.
  • isotopes that can be incorporated into a compound of the invention include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorus, sulphur, fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine, such as 2 H (deuterium), 3 H (tritium), n C, 13 C, 14 C, 15 N, 17 0, 18 0, 32 P, 33 P, 33 S, 34 S, 35 S, 36 S, 18 F, 36 C1, 82 Br, 123 I, 124 I, 129 I and 133 I, respectively. Accordingly, recitation of “hydrogen” or “H” should be understood to encompass ' H (protium), 2 H (deuterium), and 3 H (tritium) unless otherwise specified.
  • isotopic variations of a compound of the invention are useful in drug and/or substrate tissue distribution studies.
  • Tritiated and carbon- 14, i.e., 14 C, isotopes are particularly preferred for their ease of preparation and detectability.
  • substitution with isotopes such as deuterium may afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example, increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements and hence may be preferred in some circumstances.
  • Such variants may also have advantageous optical properties arising, for example, from changes to vibrational modes due to the heavier isotope.
  • Isotopic variations of a compound of the invention can generally be prepared by conventional procedures known by a person skilled in the art such as by the illustrative methods or by the preparations described in the examples hereafter using appropriate isotopic variations of suitable reagents.
  • SWIR small molecule chromophore To obtain a SWIR small molecule chromophore, a narrow gap between the highest occupied molecular orbital (HOMO) and lowest unoccupied molecular orbital (LUMO) must be achieved. As the HOMO-LUMO gap of chromophores decreases, their reactivity increases. Thus, stability of SWIR chromophores is a more significant challenge than for NIR chromophores. Another consequence of the small energy difference between the ground state and excited state is that there are many non-emissive pathways which can facilitate relaxation back to the ground state, resulting in low quantum yields of fluorescence (OF). Finally, for SWIR photodynamic therapy applications, the triplet energies of the photosensitizer need to be high enough to sensitize oxygen (23 kcal/mol).
  • SWIR-excitable fluorophores either have low or negligible quantum yields, or are too hydrophobic to be used directly in in vivo imaging.
  • the present disclosure provides SWIR-active small molecules with improved properties for use in optical imaging, photothermal therapy, and photodynamic therapy.
  • cyanines While cyanines have been the premier polymethine dyes for applications in the visible and NIR, their extension into the SWIR has been limited. Lengthening the polymethine chain, which is known to impart a bathochromic shift to cyanine dyes, can compromise the fluorescence quantum yield (Fr), decrease fluorophore stability, and lead to loss of electron delocalization over the entire conjugated system. Heterocycle modification can create bright, stable polymethine dyes in the SWIR. However, the photophysical changes that result from heterocyclyl modification are not straightforward. Extending heterocycle conjugation or adding electron-donating groups have been shown to bathochromically-shift polymethine dyes.
  • Dimethylamino flavylium polymethine dyes have been prepared and analyzed. Scheme 1. Synthesis of dimethylamino flavylium polymethine dyes 3 - 6.
  • Polymethine dyes can be prepared through the introduction of an activated heterocycle to an aldehyde or bis-aldehyde equivalent.
  • the requisite 7-A' A'-dimethylamino-4-methyl-flavylium heterocycle (1) was prepared in three steps from dimethylaminophenol as previously reported (Chen, J.-R.; Wong, J.-B.; Kuo, P.-Y.; Yang, D.-Y. Org. Lett. 2008, 10, 4823-4826):
  • flavylium dyes 3-6 were measured. As seen in Figure 2 and Table 1, the flavylium dyes span the long wavelength end of the visible, the NIR and enter the SWIR.
  • PCM absorption
  • the dimethylamino flavylium dyes are significantly red-shifted from classic cyanine dyes by approximately 200 nm and Flav7 absorbs ⁇ 40 nm past IR-27. Photostabilities of the Flav series were measured under continuous-wave irradiation (532 nm, 0.53 fluence). Flavl, Flav3 and Flav5 all show excellent photostabilities in dichloromethane, with Flav7 displaying reasonable stability
  • the Flavl dye absorbs at 650 nm, similar to a 5-cyanine, but has a lower absorption coefficient (s) and Fr, resulting in a low quantum efficiency (QE, defined as eFr), consistent with the short polymethine chain.
  • the Flav3 dye has similar absorption properties to the standard heptamethine indocyanine dye l,r,3,3,3’,3’-hexamethylindotricarbocyanine iodide (FUTCI, Cy7) with max.abs ⁇ 745 nm and e ⁇ 220,000 IVT'cm 1 . While HITCI has ⁇ 10-fold higher Fr than Flav3 Flav3 is 4-fold more photostable.
  • the Flav5 and Flav7 dyes are more red-shifted than indoline- containing cyanine dyes, absorbing at 862 nm and 1026 nm, respectively.
  • the Flav5 emits at 908 nm, a relatively unique wavelength for polymethine dyes, with extremely high QE (10 3 IVT'cm 1 ), desirable photostability, and the largest Stoke’ s shift of the series at 46 nm.
  • the Flav7 is a true NIR-II/SWIR fluorophore with emission at 1061 nm, Fr of 0.53%, and an impressive SWIR QE of 1,200 M ⁇ cm 1 .
  • Flav7 This family of flavylium dyes has photophysical qualities that are complementary to commonly used cyanine dyes.
  • the premier dye in the series is the Flav7 (3) as few emissive polymethine dyes exist in this region.
  • the .max.abs in dichloromethane, dimethyl sulfoxide, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, acetone exhibited minimal variation.
  • spectral broadening and accentuation of a high-energy shoulder were observed. This behavior is consistent with SWIR polymethine dyes that experience ground state symmetry breaking due to stabilization of an asymmetric electronic structure.
  • methanol an immediate color change is observed, suggestive of covalent modification of the polymethine; however, a major decomposition product could not be identified.
  • each dye’s emission was directly compared using a SWIR camera.
  • the dimethylamino flavylium dyes are notably red-shifted compared to prevalent cyanine dyes, and expand the opportunities for imaging and detection in the NIR and SWIR.
  • Certain methods for fluorescence imaging of animals are described, for instance, in U.S. Patent No. 7,383,076.
  • the stability and emission of fluorophores decrease as their absorption moves to lower energies, highlighting the challenge of achieving stable, bright fluorophores, particularly in the SWIR.
  • the three NIR polymethine dyes reported display excellent photostabilities with varying quantum yields.
  • Heptamethine Flav7 is 13-times brighter than IR-26, the current SWIR benchmark.
  • Flav7 is the superior SWIR fluorophore using a comparative imaging experiment and absolute ®F.
  • Polymethine fluorophores have other distinctive properties including narrow absorption and emission bands and the ability to be chemically fine-tuned, which poise them to be a promising fluorophore scaffold for new technologies in these underdeveloped regions of the EM spectrum.
  • further improvements beyond these dimethylaminoflavylium dyes are still possible, and are described herein.
  • the heterocycle composition of polymethine dyes has a significant effect on the photophysical properties of these chromophores.
  • the present disclosure describes polymethine fluorophores that replace the flavylium heterocycle in the dyes described above with other heterocycles, including modified flavylium heterocycles.
  • the dimethylaminoflavylium group may be extended to include other moieties that impart different physicochemical properties, or the amino may be replaced entirely with a more hydrophilic group.
  • the modifications of the dimethylaminoflavylium group described herein are designed to enhance absorption coefficient (e), fluorescence quantum yield (Fr), the singlet oxygen quantum yield
  • R may represent alkyl, such as lower alkyl, cycloalkyl, such as lower cycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl. In certain embodiments, R may represent alkyl, such as lower alkyl. Analogous substitutions may be made on the other modified heterocycles disclosed herein.
  • heterocyclyl moieties when conjugated to a polymethine, such as a pentamethine or a heptamethine, may be drawn in one of two or more resonance structures, depending on the end of the polymethine to which the moiety is attached as well as the other atoms in the heterocyclyl moieties. This is illustrated for 7 below:
  • Extended aromatic systems may also be used to improve SWIR fluorophore properties, for instance, by resulting in a bathochromic shift.
  • exemplary heterocycles include carbazolyl, phenanthrolinyl, dibenzofuranyl, acridinyl, phenanthridinyl, xanthenyl, and the following:
  • R may represent alkyl, such as lower alkyl, cycloalkyl, such as lower cycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl. In certain embodiments, R may represent alkyl, such as lower alkyl. Analogous substitutions may be made on the other modified heterocycles disclosed herein.
  • the flavylium oxygen (or the oxygen in the other heterocycles disclosed herein) may be replaced with another heteroatom, which may also be substituted as valence permits:
  • W may represent SO, SO2, PR, PO2H, POR, SeO, Se02, TeO, Te02, SiR 6 2, GeR 6 2, BH, BOH, or BR;
  • Y may represent 0 + , S + , Se + , Te + , SiR, GeR, N, NR + , or NO;
  • R may represent alkyl, such as lower alkyl, cycloalkyl, such as lower cycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl. In certain embodiments, R may represent alkyl, such as lower alkyl. Analogous substitutions may be made on the other modified heterocycles disclosed herein.
  • heterocycles include:
  • R may represent alkyl, such as lower alkyl, cycloalkyl, such as lower cycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl. In certain embodiments, R may represent alkyl, such as lower alkyl.
  • cycloalkyl such as lower cycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl.
  • R may represent alkyl, such as lower alkyl.
  • W may represent O, SO, SO2, PR, PO2H, POR, SeO, Se02, TeO, Te02, SiR 6 2, GeR 6 2 , BH, BOH, or BR;
  • Y may represent 0 + , S + , Se + , Te + , SiR, GeR, N, NR + , or NO;
  • R may represent alkyl, such as lower alkyl, cycloalkyl, such as lower cycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; and R A may represent an electron-withdrawing group such as haloalkyl, cyano, sulfonate, sulfonatoalkyl, sulfonatoalkyloxy, carboxyl, ester, amide, halo, nitro, alkylammonium, amine oxide, or haloalkyl, such as trifluoromethyl.
  • R A may represent sulfonate, sulfonatoalkyl, or sulfonatoalkyloxy, preferably sulfonate or a sulfonatoalkyl such as sulfonatoethyl.
  • R A may represent an electron-donating group such as alkoxy, alkyl, or aryl.
  • R may represent alkyl or lower alkyl. Analogous substitutions may be made on the other modified heterocycles disclosed herein.
  • Dimethylamino flavylium cyanine 3 is hydrophobic, which hinders its ability to be employed for in vivo imaging.
  • the present disclosure provides variants that are hydrophilic and/or fluorophilic.
  • Hydrophilicity may be imparted to polymethine dyes by incorporating ionic groups such as sulfonates, as described above, or carboxylates.
  • Carboxylates can also facilitate conjugation of biomolecules.
  • Exemplary heterocycles include:
  • any R group may independently be anionic-substituted alkyl, such as sulfonatoethyl.
  • R may be a nonionic alkyl and R’ may be a carboxylate group, a sulfonate, an anionic-substituted alkyl, or an anionic substituted alkyl ether.
  • R’ may be located at any position on the aryl ring and one or more R’ substituents may be present. Analogous substitutions may be made on the other modified heterocycles disclosed herein.
  • a fluorinated alkyl chain such as (CH2)3C6Fi3.
  • fluorophibc dyes can be used to localize the dyes inside perfluorocarbon nanoemulsions.
  • the fluorous phase despite requiring a nanomaterial scaffold, has significant advantages for imaging in the SWIR, including the protection of cyanine dyes from biomolecules, increased quantum yields, and increased photostabilities.
  • Exemplary heterocycles include:
  • R may be a fluorinated alkyl, such as (CH2)3C6Fi3 .
  • R may be a fluorinated alkyl or fluorinated alkoxy, such as (CH2)3C6Fi3 or 0(CH2)3C6Fi3 .
  • R’ may be located at any position on the aryl ring and one or more R’ substituents may be present. Analogous substitutions may be made on the other modified heterocycles disclosed herein.
  • Heterocycles 1, 7, and 8 may be produced according to a thermally promoted condensation between a 3 -amino phenol derivative and ethyl benzoyl acetate, followed by Grignard addition of methyl magnesium bromide and treatment with HX to promote dehydration and install the counter ion (X) of interest. (Scheme 3 A, route 1). Any suitable counter ion of interest may be used, for example BFF, tetraarylborate, Cl , Br , G, CIOT, OAC , trifluoroacetate, arylacetate, sulfonate, or phosphate.
  • 7-amino flavylium heterocycle derivatives may be obtained from the commercial 7-hydroxyflavone which can undergo triflation with trifluoromethane sulfonic anhydride to produce a species reactive towards cross-coupling reactions.
  • the 7-triflate flavone can then undergo Buchwald-Hartwig cross-coupling reactions with a variety of primary and secondary amines and amides (Scheme 3 A, route 2) to produce the 7-amino functionalized flavone.
  • This flavone is similarly reactive towards Grignard conditions to yield the functionalized flavylium heterocycle.
  • 7-amino functionalized derivatives may be obtained beginning with the commercial 7-amino flavone which can undergo nucleophilic addition reactions or reductive amination reactions to yield the functionalized flavone (Scheme 3A, route 3).
  • Heterocycles 11B, l lC, and 11D may be obtained by Grignard addition of methyl magnesium bromide to the corresponding flavones (Scheme 3B), which are either commercially available or can be obtained from previously reported routes (see, e.g., Foroozesh, M. J. Med. Chem. 2015, 58, 6481-6493.).
  • Scheme 3B
  • Heterocycle 11 A may be produced by a 1,4-addition into butynophenone and subsequent internal nucleophilic attack by the phenol oxygen into the pendant carbonyl, followed by dehydration.
  • the route through a Michael reaction, exemplified in Scheme 3C may be achieved by lithiation of the ortho-bromophenol or brominated naphthalene precursors.
  • the dimethylamino thiaflavylium heterocycle 1013 can arise from minor adaptations of the syntheses of the related thiaflavylium, where several routes are available.
  • One option is condensation of the intermediate 1016 with phosphorous chloride and subsequent treatment with perchloric acid.
  • Intermediate 1016 can be achieved thorough 1,4-addition of the dimethylamino benzenethiol into styryl methyl ketone.
  • the sulfone 1014 will be accessed by oxidation of heterocycle 1013 (Scheme 3D).
  • Various pentamethine dyes can be accessed through the base catalyzed condensation of malonaldehyde bis(phenylimine) mono hydrochloride or similar, as was described for the synthesis of Flav5 (4).
  • Trimethine dyes can be accessed through the introduction of a one-carbon electrophile such as formaldehyde, paraformaldehyde, or triethyl orthoformate, as was described for the synthesis of Flav3 (5).
  • Asymmetric dyes i.e., dyes containing two different heterocycles
  • the half-dye can be prepared by treating the activated flavylium heterocycle with 1 equivalent of bis-imine or aldehyde equivalent (such as N-[(3-(anilinomethylene)-2-chloro-l-cyclohexen-l- yl)methylene] aniline hydrochloride) in basic conditions in an appropriate solvent (see Pisoni, D. S.; Ce, A.; Borges, A.; Petzhold, C. L.; Rodembusch, F. S.; Campo, L. F. J. Org. Chem. 2014,
  • bis-imine or aldehyde equivalent such as N-[(3-(anilinomethylene)-2-chloro-l-cyclohexen-l- yl)methylene] aniline hydrochloride
  • Asymmetric polymethine dye comprising the heterocycles disclosed herein, or other suitable heterocycles, may be prepared by these and other suitable methods.
  • the following exemplary asymmetric polymethine dyes may be prepared by the methods disclosed herein:
  • agent is used herein to denote a chemical compound (such as an organic or inorganic compound, a mixture of chemical compounds), a biological macromolecule (such as a nucleic acid, an antibody, including parts thereof as well as humanized, chimeric and human antibodies and monoclonal antibodies, a protein or portion thereof, e.g., a peptide, a lipid, a carbohydrate), or an extract made from biological materials such as bacteria, plants, fungi, or animal (particularly mammalian) cells or tissues.
  • Agents include, for example, agents whose structure is known, and those whose structure is not known. The ability of such agents to inhibit AR or promote AR degradation may render them suitable as“therapeutic agents” in the methods and compositions of this disclosure.
  • A“patient,”“subject,” or“individual” are used interchangeably and refer to either a human or a non-human animal. These terms include mammals, such as humans, primates, livestock animals (including bovines, porcines, etc.), companion animals (e.g., canines, felines, etc.) and rodents (e.g., mice and rats).
  • Treating” a condition or patient refers to taking steps to obtain beneficial or desired results, including clinical results.
  • treatment is an approach for obtaining beneficial or desired results, including clinical results.
  • Beneficial or desired clinical results can include, but are not limited to, alleviation or amelioration of one or more symptoms or conditions, diminishment of extent of disease, stabilized (i.e. not worsening) state of disease, preventing spread of disease, delay or slowing of disease progression, amelioration or palliation of the disease state, and remission (whether partial or total), whether detectable or undetectable.
  • Treatment can also mean prolonging survival as compared to expected survival if not receiving treatment.
  • preventing is art-recognized, and when used in relation to a condition, such as a local recurrence (e.g., pain), a disease such as cancer, a syndrome complex such as heart failure or any other medical condition, is well understood in the art, and includes administration of a composition which reduces the frequency of, or delays the onset of, symptoms of a medical condition in a subject relative to a subject which does not receive the composition.
  • a condition such as a local recurrence (e.g., pain)
  • a disease such as cancer
  • a syndrome complex such as heart failure or any other medical condition
  • prevention of cancer includes, for example, reducing the number of detectable cancerous growths in a population of patients receiving a prophylactic treatment relative to an untreated control population, and/or delaying the appearance of detectable cancerous growths in a treated population versus an untreated control population, e.g., by a statistically and/or clinically significant amount.
  • administering or“administration of’ a substance, a compound or an agent to a subject can be carried out using one of a variety of methods known to those skilled in the art.
  • a compound or an agent can be administered, intravenously, arterially, intradermally, intramuscularly, intraperitoneally, subcutaneously, ocularly, sublingually, orally (by ingestion), intranasally (by inhalation), intraspinally, intracerebrally, and transdermally (by absorption, e.g., through a skin duct).
  • a compound or agent can also appropriately be introduced by rechargeable or biodegradable polymeric devices or other devices, e.g., patches and pumps, or formulations, which provide for the extended, slow or controlled release of the compound or agent.
  • Administering can also be performed, for example, once, a plurality of times, and/or over one or more extended periods.
  • a compound or an agent is administered orally, e.g., to a subject by ingestion.
  • the orally administered compound or agent is in an extended release or slow release formulation, or administered using a device for such slow or extended release.
  • the phrase“conjoint administration” refers to any form of administration of two or more different therapeutic agents such that the second agent is administered while the previously administered therapeutic agent is still effective in the body (e.g., the two agents are simultaneously effective in the patient, which may include synergistic effects of the two agents).
  • the different therapeutic compounds can be administered either in the same formulation or in separate formulations, either concomitantly or sequentially.
  • an individual who receives such treatment can benefit from a combined effect of different therapeutic agents.
  • A“therapeutically effective amount” or a“therapeutically effective dose” of a drug or agent is an amount of a drug or an agent that, when administered to a subject will have the intended therapeutic effect.
  • the full therapeutic effect does not necessarily occur by administration of one dose, and may occur only after administration of a series of doses.
  • a therapeutically effective amount may be administered in one or more administrations.
  • the precise effective amount needed for a subject will depend upon, for example, the subject’s size, health and age, and the nature and extent of the condition being treated, such as cancer or MDS. The skilled worker can readily determine the effective amount for a given situation by routine experimentation.
  • acyl is art-recognized and refers to a group represented by the general formula hydrocarbylC(O)-, preferably alkylC(O)-.
  • acylamino is art-recognized and refers to an amino group substituted with an acyl group and may be represented, for example, by the formula hydroearbylC(0)NH-.
  • acyloxy is art-recognized and refers to a group represented by the general formula hydrocarbylC(0)0-, preferably alkylC(0)0-.
  • alkoxy refers to an alkyl group having an oxygen attached thereto.
  • Representative alkoxy groups include methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, tert-butoxy and the like.
  • alkoxyalkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with an alkoxy group and may be represented by the general formula alkyl-O-alkyl.
  • alkyl refers to saturated aliphatic groups, including straight- chain alkyl groups, branched-chain alkyl groups, cycloalkyl (alicyclic) groups, alkyl-substituted cycloalkyl groups, and cycloalkyl-substituted alkyl groups.
  • a straight chain or branched chain alkyl has 30 or fewer carbon atoms in its backbone (e.g., C i-30 for straight chains, C3-30 for branched chains), and more preferably 20 or fewer.
  • alkyl as used throughout the specification, examples, and claims is intended to include both unsubstituted and substituted alkyl groups, the latter of which refers to alkyl moieties having substituents replacing a hydrogen on one or more carbons of the hydrocarbon backbone, including haloalkyl groups such as trifluoromethyl and 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, etc.
  • Cx- y or“Cx-C y ”, when used in conjunction with a chemical moiety, such as, acyl, acyloxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, or alkoxy is meant to include groups that contain from x to y carbons in the chain.
  • Coalkyl indicates a hydrogen where the group is in a terminal position, a bond if internal.
  • a Ci-6alkyl group for example, contains from one to six carbon atoms in the chain.
  • alkylamino refers to an amino group substituted with at least one alkyl group.
  • alkylthio refers to a thiol group substituted with an alkyl group and may be represented by the general formula alkylS-.
  • amide refers to a group
  • R 9 and R 10 each independently represent a hydrogen or hydrocarbyl group, or R 9 and R 10 taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocycle having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure.
  • amine and“amino” are art-recognized and refer to both unsubstituted and substituted amines and salts thereof, e.g., a moiety that can be represented by
  • R 9 , R 10 , and R 10 ’ each independently represent a hydrogen or a hydrocarbyl group, or R 9 and R 10 taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocycle having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure.
  • aminoalkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with an amino group.
  • aralkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with an aryl group.
  • aryl as used herein include substituted or unsubstituted single-ring aromatic groups in which each atom of the ring is carbon.
  • the ring is a 5- to 7-member ed ring, more preferably a 6-membered ring.
  • aryl also includes polycyclic ring systems having two or more cyclic rings in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings wherein at least one of the rings is aromatic, e.g., the other cyclic rings can be cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls, heteroaryls, and/or heterocyclyls.
  • Aryl groups include benzene, naphthalene, phenanthrene, phenol, aniline, and the like.
  • R 9 and R 10 independently represent hydrogen or a hydrocarbyl group.
  • carbocyclylalkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with a carbocycle group.
  • carbocycle refers to a non aromatic saturated or unsaturated ring in which each atom of the ring is carbon.
  • a carbocycle ring contains from 3 to 10 atoms, more preferably from 5 to 7 atoms.
  • carbocyclylalkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with a carbocycle group.
  • carbonate is art-recognized and refers to a group -OCO2-.
  • ester refers to a group -C(0)0R 9 wherein R 9 represents a hydrocarbyl group.
  • ether refers to a hydrocarbyl group linked through an oxygen to another hydrocarbyl group. Accordingly, an ether substituent of a hydrocarbyl group may be hydrocarbyl-O-. Ethers may be either symmetrical or unsymmetrical. Examples of ethers include, but are not limited to, heterocycle-O-heterocycle and aryl-O-heterocycle. Ethers include “alkoxyalkyl” groups, which may be represented by the general formula alkyl-O-alkyl.
  • halo and“halogen” as used herein means halogen and includes chloro, fluoro, bromo, and iodo.
  • haloalkyl and“heteroaralkyl”, as used herein, refers to an alkyl group substituted with a hetaryl group.
  • heteroaryl and“hetaryl” include substituted or unsubstituted aromatic single ring structures, preferably 5- to 7-membered rings, more preferably 5- to 6-membered rings, whose ring structures include at least one heteroatom, preferably one to four heteroatoms, more preferably one or two heteroatoms.
  • heteroaryl and“hetaryl” also include polycyclic ring systems having two or more cyclic rings in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings wherein at least one of the rings is heteroaromatic, e.g., the other cyclic rings can be cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls, heteroaryls, and/or heterocyclyls.
  • Heteroaryl groups include, for example, pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, oxazole, thiazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine, and pyrimidine, and the like.
  • heteroatom as used herein means an atom of any element other than carbon or hydrogen. Preferred heteroatoms are nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • heterocyclylalkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with a heterocycle group.
  • heterocyclyl refers to substituted or unsubstituted non-aromatic ring structures, preferably 3- to 10-membered rings, more preferably 3- to 7-membered rings, whose ring structures include at least one heteroatom, preferably one to four heteroatoms, more preferably one or two heteroatoms.
  • heterocyclyl and “heterocyclic” also include polycyclic ring systems having two or more cyclic rings in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings wherein at least one of the rings is heterocyclic, e.g., the other cyclic rings can be cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls, heteroaryls, and/or heterocyclyls.
  • Heterocyclyl groups include, for example, piperidine, piperazine, pyrrolidine, morpholine, lactones, lactams, and the like.
  • Hydrocarbyl groups include, but are not limited to aryl, heteroaryl, carbocycle, heterocycle, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, and combinations thereof.
  • hydroxyalkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with a hydroxy group.
  • lower when used in conjunction with a chemical moiety, such as, acyl, acyloxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, or alkoxy is meant to include groups where there are ten or fewer atoms in the substituent, preferably six or fewer.
  • acyl, acyloxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, or alkoxy substituents defined herein are respectively lower acyl, lower acyloxy, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, lower alkynyl, or lower alkoxy, whether they appear alone or in combination with other substituents, such as in the recitations hydroxyalkyl and aralkyl (in which case, for example, the atoms within the aryl group are not counted when counting the carbon atoms in the alkyl substituent).
  • each ring of the polycycle contains from 3 to 10 atoms in the ring, preferably from 5 to 7.
  • sulfate is art-recognized and refers to the group -OSC H, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • R 9 and R 10 independently represents hydrogen or hydrocarbyl.
  • sulfoxide is art-recognized and refers to the group-S(O)-.
  • sulfonate is art-recognized and refers to the group SC H, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • substitution or“substituted with” includes the implicit proviso that such substitution is in accordance with permitted valence of the substituted atom and the substituent, and that the substitution results in a stable compound, e.g., which does not spontaneously undergo transformation such as by rearrangement, cyclization, elimination, etc.
  • substitution or“substituted with” includes the implicit proviso that such substitution is in accordance with permitted valence of the substituted atom and the substituent, and that the substitution results in a stable compound, e.g., which does not spontaneously undergo transformation such as by rearrangement, cyclization, elimination, etc.
  • substitution or“substituted with” includes the implicit proviso that such substitution is in accordance with permitted valence of the substituted atom and the substituent, and that the substitution results in a stable compound, e.g., which does not spontaneously undergo transformation such as by rearrangement, cyclization, elimination, etc.
  • substitution is contemplated to include all permissible substituents
  • the permissible substituents include acyclic and cyclic, branched and unbranched, carbocyclic and heterocyclic, aromatic and non-aromatic substituents of organic compounds.
  • the permissible substituents can be one or more and the same or different for appropriate organic compounds.
  • the heteroatoms such as nitrogen may have hydrogen substituents and/or any permissible substituents of organic compounds described herein which satisfy the valences of the heteroatoms.
  • Substituents can include any substituents described herein, for example, a halogen, a hydroxyl, a carbonyl (such as a carboxyl, an alkoxycarbonyl, a formyl, or an acyl), a thiocarbonyl (such as a thioester, a thioacetate, or a thioformate), an alkoxyl, a phosphoryl, a phosphate, a phosphonate, a phosphinate, an amino, an amido, an amidine, an imine, a cyano, a nitro, an azido, a sulfhydryl, an alkylthio, a sulfate, a sulfonate, a sulfamoyl, a sulfonamido, a sulfonyl, a heterocyclyl, an aralkyl, or an aromatic or heteroaromatic mo
  • thioalkyl refers to an alkyl group substituted with a thiol group.
  • thioester refers to a group -C(0)SR 9 or -SC(0)R 9
  • R 9 represents a hydrocarbyl
  • thioether is equivalent to an ether, wherein the oxygen is replaced with a sulfur.
  • R 9 and R 10 independently represent hydrogen or a hydrocarbyl.
  • module includes the inhibition or suppression of a function or activity (such as cell proliferation) as well as the enhancement of a function or activity.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable is art-recognized.
  • the term includes compositions, excipients, adjuvants, polymers and other materials and/or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings and animals without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable salt” or“salt” is used herein to refer to an acid addition salt or a basic addition salt which is suitable for or compatible with the treatment of patients.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt means any non toxic organic or inorganic salt of any base compounds represented by Formula I or Formula II.
  • Illustrative inorganic acids which form suitable salts include hydrochloric, hydrobromic, sulfuric and phosphoric acids, as well as metal salts such as sodium monohydrogen orthophosphate and potassium hydrogen sulfate.
  • Illustrative organic acids that form suitable salts include mono-, di-, and tricarboxylic acids such as glycolic, lactic, pyruvic, malonic, succinic, glutaric, fumaric, malic, tartaric, citric, ascorbic, maleic, benzoic, phenylacetic, cinnamic and salicylic acids, as well as sulfonic acids such as p-toluene sulfonic and methanesulfonic acids. Either the mono or di-acid salts can be formed, and such salts may exist in either a hydrated, solvated or substantially anhydrous form.
  • mono-, di-, and tricarboxylic acids such as glycolic, lactic, pyruvic, malonic, succinic, glutaric, fumaric, malic, tartaric, citric, ascorbic, maleic, benzoic, phenylacetic, cinnamic and salicylic acids, as well as sul
  • the acid addition salts of compounds of Formula I or Formula II are more soluble in water and various hydrophilic organic solvents, and generally demonstrate higher melting points in comparison to their free base forms.
  • the selection of the appropriate salt will be known to one skilled in the art.
  • Other non-pharmaceutically acceptable salts e.g., oxalates, may be used, for example, in the isolation of compounds of Formula I or Formula II for laboratory use, or for subsequent conversion to a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable basic addition salt means any non toxic organic or inorganic base addition salt of any acid compounds represented by Formula I or Formula II or any of their intermediates.
  • Illustrative inorganic bases which form suitable salts include lithium, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, or barium hydroxide.
  • Illustrative organic bases which form suitable salts include aliphatic, alicyclic, or aromatic organic amines such as methylamine, trimethylamine and picoline or ammonia. The selection of the appropriate salt will be known to a person skilled in the art.
  • stereogenic center in their structure.
  • This stereogenic center may be present in a R or a S configuration, said R and S notation is used in correspondence with the rules described in Pure Appl. Chem. (1976), 45, 11-30.
  • the disclosure contemplates all stereoisomeric forms such as enantiomeric and diastereoisomeric forms of the compounds, salts, prodrugs or mixtures thereof (including all possible mixtures of stereoisomers). See, e.g., WO 01/062726.
  • Prodrug or “pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug” refers to a compound that is metabolized, for example hydrolyzed or oxidized, in the host after administration to form the compound of the present disclosure (e.g., compounds of Formula I or Formula II).
  • Typical examples of prodrugs include compounds that have biologically labile or cleavable (protecting) groups on a functional moiety of the active compound.
  • Prodrugs include compounds that can be oxidized, reduced, aminated, deaminated, hydroxylated, dehydroxylated, hydrolyzed, dehydrolyzed, alkylated, dealkylated, acylated, deacylated, phosphorylated, or dephosphorylated to produce the active compound.
  • prodrugs using ester or phosphoramidate as biologically labile or cleavable (protecting) groups are disclosed in U.S. Patents 6,875,751, 7,585,851, and 7,964,580, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the prodrugs of this disclosure are metabolized to produce a compound of Formula I or Formula II.
  • the present disclosure includes within its scope, prodrugs of the compounds described herein. Conventional procedures for the selection and preparation of suitable prodrugs are described, for example, in“Design of Prodrugs” Ed. H. Bundgaard, Elsevier, 1985.
  • phrases“pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” as used herein means a pharmaceutically acceptable material, composition or vehicle, such as a liquid or solid filter, diluent, excipient, solvent or encapsulating material useful for formulating a drug for medicinal or therapeutic use.
  • log of solubility is used in the art to quantify the aqueous solubility of a compound.
  • the aqueous solubility of a compound significantly affects its absorption and distribution characteristics. A low solubility often goes along with a poor absorption.
  • LogS value is a unit stripped logarithm (base 10) of the solubility measured in mol/liter.
  • deuterium-containing compound of general formula (I) or (II)” and“tritium- containing compound of general formula (I) or (II)” are defined as a compound of general formula (I) or (II), in which one or more hydrogen atom(s) is/are replaced by one or more deuterium and/or tritium atom(s) and in which the abundance of deuterium or tritium at each deuterated or triterated position of the compound of general formula (I) or (II) is higher than the natural abundance of deuterium, which is about 0.015%, or tritium, which is about 1 x 10 18 %.
  • the abundance of deuterium or tritium at each deuterated or triterated position of the compound of general formula (I) or (II) is higher than 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70% or 80%, preferably higher than 90%, 95%, 96% or 97%, even more preferably higher than 98% or 99% at said position(s). It is understood that the abundance of deuterium or tritium at each deuterated or triterated position is independent of the abundance of deuterium or tritium at other deuterated or triterated position(s).
  • the selective incorporation of one or more deuterium atom(s) into a compound of general formula (I) or (II) may alter the physicochemical properties (such as for example acidity [C. L. Perrin, et al, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 2007, 129, 4490; A. Streitwieser et al, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1963, 85, 2759;], basicity [C. L. Perrin et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., 2005, 127, 9641; C. L. Perrin, et al, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 2003, 125, 15008; C. L.
  • deuterium- containing compound of general formula (I) or (II) can have important consequences with respect to the pharmacodynamics, tolerability and efficacy of a deuterium- containing compound of general formula (I) or (II).
  • deuterium substitution reduces or eliminates the formation of an undesired or toxic metabolite and enhances the formation of a desired metabolite (e.g., Nevirapine: A. M. Sharma et al., Chem. Res. Toxicol., 2013, 26, 410; Efavirenz: A. E. Mutlib et al., Toxicol. Appl. Pharmacol., 2000, 169, 102).
  • the major effect of deuteration is to reduce the rate of systemic clearance.
  • Deuterated drugs showing this effect may have reduced dosing requirements (e.g., lower number of doses or lower dosage to achieve the desired effect) and/or may produce lower metabolite loads.
  • deuterated or triturated compounds of the disclosure may have other advantageous features, such as an increased quantum yield. This may result from alterations to the available molecular vibrational modes that can reduced coupling between optical and vibrational transitions, thus reducing the rate of intersystem conversion.
  • deuterated reagents and synthetic building blocks are commercially available from companies such as for example C/D/N Isotopes, Quebec, Canada; Cambridge Isotope Laboratories Inc., Andover, MA, USA; and CombiPhos Catalysts, Inc., Princeton, NJ, USA. Laboratories Inc., Andover, MA, USA; and CombiPhos Catalysts, Inc., Princeton, NJ, USA. Further information on the state of the art with respect to deuterium-hydrogen exchange is given for example in Hanzlik et al., J. Org. Chem. 55, 3992-3997, 1990; R. P. Hanzlik et al., Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun.
  • compositions and methods of the present invention may be utilized to treat an individual in need thereof.
  • the individual is a mammal such as a human, or a non-human mammal.
  • the composition or the compound is preferably administered as a pharmaceutical composition comprising, for example, a compound of the invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers are well known in the art and include, for example, aqueous solutions such as water or physiologically buffered saline or other solvents or vehicles such as glycols, glycerol, oils such as olive oil, or injectable organic esters.
  • the aqueous solution is pyrogen-free, or substantially pyrogen-free.
  • the excipients can be chosen, for example, to effect delayed release of an agent or to selectively target one or more cells, tissues or organs.
  • the pharmaceutical composition can be in dosage unit form such as tablet, capsule (including sprinkle capsule and gelatin capsule), granule, lyophile for reconstitution, powder, solution, syrup, suppository, injection or the like.
  • the composition can also be present in a transdermal delivery system, e.g., a skin patch.
  • the composition can also be present in a solution suitable for topical administration, such as an eye drop.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier can contain physiologically acceptable agents that act, for example, to stabilize, increase solubility or to increase the absorption of a compound such as a compound of the invention.
  • physiologically acceptable agents include, for example, carbohydrates, such as glucose, sucrose or dextrans, antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid or glutathione, chelating agents, low molecular weight proteins or other stabilizers or excipients.
  • the choice of a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, including a physiologically acceptable agent depends, for example, on the route of administration of the composition.
  • the preparation or pharmaceutical composition can be a self-emulsifying drug delivery system or a self- microemulsifying drug delivery system.
  • the pharmaceutical composition also can be a liposome or other polymer matrix, which can have incorporated therein, for example, a compound of the invention.
  • Liposomes for example, which comprise phospholipids or other lipids, are nontoxic, physiologically acceptable and metabolizable carriers that are relatively simple to make and administer.
  • phrases "pharmaceutically acceptable” is employed herein to refer to those compounds, materials, compositions, and/or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings and animals without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable carrier means a pharmaceutically acceptable material, composition or vehicle, such as a liquid or solid filler, diluent, excipient, solvent or encapsulating material. Each carrier must be “acceptable” in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and not injurious to the patient.
  • materials which can serve as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include: (1) sugars, such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; (2) starches, such as corn starch and potato starch; (3) cellulose, and its derivatives, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; (4) powdered tragacanth; (5) malt; (6) gelatin; (7) talc; (8) excipients, such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; (9) oils, such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil, safflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil and soybean oil; (10) glycols, such as propylene glycol; (11) polyols, such as glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol and polyethylene glycol; (12) esters, such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; (13) agar; (14) buffering agents, such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum hydroxide;
  • a pharmaceutical composition can be administered to a subject by any of a number of routes of administration including, for example, orally (for example, drenches as in aqueous or non-aqueous solutions or suspensions, tablets, capsules (including sprinkle capsules and gelatin capsules), boluses, powders, granules, pastes for application to the tongue); absorption through the oral mucosa (e.g., sublingually); anally, rectally or vaginally (for example, as a pessary, cream or foam); parenterally (including intramuscularly, intravenously, subcutaneously or intrathecally as, for example, a sterile solution or suspension); nasally; intraperitoneally; subcutaneously; transdermally (for example as a patch applied to the skin); and topically (for example, as a cream, ointment or spray applied to the skin, or as an eye drop).
  • routes of administration including, for example, orally (for example, drenches as in aqueous or
  • the compound may also be formulated for inhalation.
  • a compound may be simply dissolved or suspended in sterile water. Details of appropriate routes of administration and compositions suitable for same can be found in, for example, U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,110,973, 5,763,493, 5,731,000, 5,541,231, 5,427,798, 5,358,970 and 4,172,896, as well as in patents cited therein.
  • the formulations may conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and may be prepared by any methods well known in the art of pharmacy.
  • the amount of active ingredient (e.g., dye) which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the host being treated, the particular mode of administration.
  • the amount of active ingredient that can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will generally be that amount of the compound which produces a therapeutic effect. Generally, out of one hundred percent, this amount will range from about 1 percent to about ninety-nine percent of active ingredient, preferably from about 5 percent to about 70 percent, most preferably from about 10 percent to about 30 percent.
  • Methods of preparing these formulations or compositions include the step of bringing into association an active compound, such as a compound of the invention, with the carrier and, optionally, one or more accessory ingredients.
  • an active compound such as a compound of the invention
  • the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association a compound of the present invention with liquid carriers, or finely divided solid carriers, or both, and then, if necessary, shaping the product.
  • Formulations of the invention suitable for oral administration may be in the form of capsules (including sprinkle capsules and gelatin capsules), cachets, pills, tablets, lozenges (using a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth), lyophile, powders, granules, or as a solution or a suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid, or as an oil-in-water or water-in-oil liquid emulsion, or as an elixir or syrup, or as pastilles (using an inert base, such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia) and/or as mouth washes and the like, each containing a predetermined amount of a compound of the present invention as an active ingredient.
  • Compositions or compounds may also be administered as a bolus, electuary or paste.
  • the active ingredient is mixed with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate, and/or any of the following: (1) fillers or extenders, such as starches, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, and/or silicic acid; (2) binders, such as, for example, carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, sucrose and/or acacia; (3) humectants, such as glycerol; (4) disintegrating agents, such as agar-agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate; (5) solution retarding agents, such as paraffin; (6) absorption accelerators, such as quaternary ammonium compounds; (7) wetting agents,
  • pharmaceutically acceptable carriers such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate, and/or any of the following: (1) fillers or extenders, such as starches, lactose
  • compositions may also comprise buffering agents.
  • Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugars, as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like.
  • a tablet may be made by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients.
  • Compressed tablets may be prepared using binder (for example, gelatin or hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose), lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, disintegrant (for example, sodium starch glycolate or cross-linked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), surface-active or dispersing agent.
  • Molded tablets may be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent.
  • the tablets, and other solid dosage forms of the pharmaceutical compositions may optionally be scored or prepared with coatings and shells, such as enteric coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical-formulating art. They may also be formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient therein using, for example, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose in varying proportions to provide the desired release profile, other polymer matrices, liposomes and/or microspheres.
  • compositions may be sterilized by, for example, filtration through a bacteria-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions that can be dissolved in sterile water, or some other sterile injectable medium immediately before use.
  • These compositions may also optionally contain opacifying agents and may be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain portion of the gastrointestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner.
  • embedding compositions that can be used include polymeric substances and waxes.
  • the active ingredient can also be in micro-encapsulated form, if appropriate, with one or more of the above- described excipients.
  • Liquid dosage forms useful for oral administration include pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, lyophiles for reconstitution, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs.
  • the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art, such as, for example, water or other solvents, cyclodextrins and derivatives thereof, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers, such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3 -butylene glycol, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof.
  • inert diluents commonly used in the art,
  • the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, coloring, perfuming and preservative agents.
  • adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, coloring, perfuming and preservative agents.
  • Suspensions in addition to the active compounds, may contain suspending agents as, for example, ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols, polyoxyethylene sorbitol and sorbitan esters, microcrystalline cellulose, aluminum metahydroxide, bentonite, agar-agar and tragacanth, and mixtures thereof.
  • suspending agents as, for example, ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols, polyoxyethylene sorbitol and sorbitan esters, microcrystalline cellulose, aluminum metahydroxide, bentonite, agar-agar and tragacanth, and mixtures thereof.
  • Formulations of the pharmaceutical compositions for rectal, vaginal, or urethral administration may be presented as a suppository, which may be prepared by mixing one or more active compounds (e.g., dyes) with one or more suitable nonirritating excipients or carriers comprising, for example, cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol, a suppository wax or a salicylate, and which is solid at room temperature, but liquid at body temperature and, therefore, will melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.
  • active compounds e.g., dyes
  • suitable nonirritating excipients or carriers comprising, for example, cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol, a suppository wax or a salicylate, and which is solid at room temperature, but liquid at body temperature and, therefore, will melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.
  • Formulations of the pharmaceutical compositions for administration to the mouth may be presented as a mouthwash, or an oral spray, or an oral ointment.
  • compositions can be formulated for delivery via a catheter, stent, wire, or other intraluminal device. Delivery via such devices may be especially useful for delivery to the bladder, urethra, ureter, rectum, or intestine.
  • Formulations which are suitable for vaginal administration also include pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.
  • Dosage forms for the topical or transdermal administration include powders, sprays, ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, solutions, patches and inhalants.
  • the active compound may be mixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, and with any preservatives, buffers, or propellants that may be required.
  • the ointments, pastes, creams and gels may contain, in addition to an active compound, excipients, such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof.
  • excipients such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof.
  • Powders and sprays can contain, in addition to an active compound, excipients such as lactose, talc, silicic acid, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicates and polyamide powder, or mixtures of these substances.
  • Sprays can additionally contain customary propellants, such as chlorofluorohydrocarbons and volatile unsubstituted hydrocarbons, such as butane and propane.
  • Transdermal patches have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of a compound of the present invention to the body.
  • dosage forms can be made by dissolving or dispersing the active compound in the proper medium.
  • Absorption enhancers can also be used to increase the flux of the compound across the skin. The rate of such flux can be controlled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or dispersing the compound in a polymer matrix or gel.
  • Ophthalmic formulations eye ointments, powders, solutions and the like, are also contemplated as being within the scope of this invention.
  • Exemplary ophthalmic formulations are described in U.S. Publication Nos. 2005/0080056, 2005/0059744, 2005/0031697 and 2005/004074 and U.S. Patent No. 6,583,124, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • liquid ophthalmic formulations have properties similar to that of lacrimal fluids, aqueous humor or vitreous humor or are compatible with such fluids.
  • a preferred route of administration is local administration (e.g ., topical administration, such as eye drops, or administration via an implant).
  • parenteral administration and “administered parenterally” as used herein means modes of administration other than enteral and topical administration, usually by injection, and includes, without limitation, intravenous, intramuscular, intraarterial, intrathecal, intracapsular, intraorbital, intracardiac, intradermal, intraperitoneal, transtracheal, subcutaneous, subcuticular, intraarticular, subcapsular, subarachnoid, intraspinal and intrasternal injection and infusion.
  • compositions suitable for parenteral administration comprise one or more active compounds in combination with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable sterile isotonic aqueous or nonaqueous solutions, dispersions, suspensions or emulsions, or sterile powders which may be reconstituted into sterile injectable solutions or dispersions just prior to use, which may contain antioxidants, buffers, bacteriostats, solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient or suspending or thickening agents.
  • aqueous and nonaqueous carriers examples include water, ethanol, polyols (such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof, vegetable oils, such as olive oil, and injectable organic esters, such as ethyl oleate.
  • polyols such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and the like
  • vegetable oils such as olive oil
  • injectable organic esters such as ethyl oleate.
  • Proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of coating materials, such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersions, and by the use of surfactants.
  • compositions may also contain adjuvants such as preservatives, wetting agents, emulsifying agents and dispersing agents. Prevention of the action of microorganisms may be ensured by the inclusion of various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, paraben, chlorobutanol, phenol sorbic acid, and the like. It may also be desirable to include isotonic agents, such as sugars, sodium chloride, and the like into the compositions. In addition, prolonged absorption of the injectable pharmaceutical form may be brought about by the inclusion of agents that delay absorption such as aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
  • the absorption of the drug in order to prolong the effect of a drug, it is desirable to slow the absorption of the drug from subcutaneous or intramuscular injection. This may be accomplished by the use of a liquid suspension of crystalline or amorphous material having poor water solubility. The rate of absorption of the drug then depends upon its rate of dissolution, which, in turn, may depend upon crystal size and crystalline form. Alternatively, delayed absorption of a parenterally administered drug form is accomplished by dissolving or suspending the drug in an oil vehicle.
  • Injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsulated matrices of the subject compounds in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide. Depending on the ratio of drug to polymer, and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of drug release can be controlled. Examples of other biodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides). Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the drug in liposomes or microemulsions that are compatible with body tissue.
  • active compounds can be given per se or as a pharmaceutical composition containing, for example, 0.1 to 99.5% (more preferably, 0.5 to 90%) of active ingredient in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • Methods of introduction may also be provided by rechargeable or biodegradable devices.
  • Various slow release polymeric devices have been developed and tested in vivo in recent years for the controlled delivery of drugs, including proteinaceous biopharmaceuticals.
  • a variety of biocompatible polymers including hydrogels, including both biodegradable and non-degradable polymers, can be used to form an implant for the sustained release of a compound at a particular target site.
  • Actual dosage levels of the active ingredients in the pharmaceutical compositions may be varied so as to obtain an amount of the active ingredient that is effective to achieve the desired therapeutic response for a particular patient, composition, and mode of administration, without being toxic to the patient.
  • the selected dosage level will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity of the particular compound or combination of compounds employed, or the ester, salt or amide thereof, the route of administration, the time of administration, the rate of excretion of the particular compound(s) being employed, the duration of the treatment, other drugs, compounds and/or materials used in combination with the particular compound(s) employed, the age, sex, weight, condition, general health and prior medical history of the patient being treated, and like factors well known in the medical arts.
  • a physician or veterinarian having ordinary skill in the art can readily determine and prescribe the therapeutically effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition required.
  • the physician or veterinarian could start doses of the pharmaceutical composition or compound at levels lower than that required in order to achieve the desired therapeutic effect and gradually increase the dosage until the desired effect is achieved.
  • therapeutically effective amount is meant the concentration of a compound that is sufficient to elicit the desired therapeutic effect. It is generally understood that the effective amount of the compound will vary according to the weight, sex, age, and medical history of the subject. Other factors which influence the effective amount may include, but are not limited to, the severity of the patient's condition, the disorder being treated, the stability of the compound, and, if desired, another type of therapeutic agent being administered with the compound of the invention.
  • a larger total dose can be delivered by multiple administrations of the agent.
  • Methods to determine efficacy and dosage are known to those skilled in the art (Isselbacher et al. (1996) Harrison’s Principles of Internal Medicine 13 ed., 1814-1882, herein incorporated by reference).
  • a suitable daily dose of an active compound used in the compositions and methods of the invention will be that amount of the compound that is the lowest dose effective to produce a therapeutic effect. Such an effective dose will generally depend upon the factors described above.
  • the effective daily dose of the active compound may be administered as one, two, three, four, five, six or more sub-doses administered separately at appropriate intervals throughout the day, optionally, in unit dosage forms.
  • the active compound may be administered two or three times daily. In preferred embodiments, the active compound will be administered once daily.
  • the patient receiving this treatment is any animal in need, including primates, in particular humans; and other mammals such as equines, cattle, swine, sheep, cats, and dogs; poultry; and pets in general.
  • compounds of the invention may be used alone or conjointly administered with another type of therapeutic agent.
  • contemplated salts of the invention include, but are not limited to, alkyl, dialkyl, trialkyl or tetra- alkyl ammonium salts.
  • contemplated salts of the invention include, but are not limited to, L-arginine, benenthamine, benzathine, betaine, calcium hydroxide, choline, deanol, diethanolamine, diethylamine, 2-(diethylamino)ethanol, ethanolamine, ethylenediamine, N-methylglucamine, hydrabamine, lH-imidazole, lithium, L-lysine, magnesium, 4-(2- hydroxyethyljmorpholine, piperazine, potassium, 1 -(2-hydroxy ethyljpyrrolidine, sodium, triethanolamine, tromethamine, and zinc salts.
  • contemplated salts of the invention include, but are not limited to, Na, Ca, K, Mg, Zn or other metal salts. In certain embodiments, contemplated salts of the invention include, but are not limited to, 1 -hydroxyl- naphthoic acid, 2,2-dichloroacetic acid, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic acid, 2-oxoglutaric acid, 4- acetamidobenzoic acid, 4-aminosalicylic acid, acetic acid, adipic acid, 1-ascorbic acid, 1-aspartic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, benzoic acid, (+)-camphoric acid, (+)-camphor-10-sulfonic acid, capric acid (decanoic acid), caproic acid (hexanoic acid), caprylic acid (octanoic acid), carbonic acid, cinnamic acid, citric acid, cyclamic acid, dodecylsulfuric acid, ethane
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable acid-addition salts can also exist as various solvates, such as with water, methanol, ethanol, dimethylformamide, and the like. Mixtures of such solvates can also be prepared.
  • the source of such solvate can be from the solvent of crystallization, inherent in the solvent of preparation or crystallization, or adventitious to such solvent.
  • wetting agents such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate, as well as coloring agents, release agents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring and perfuming agents, preservatives and antioxidants can also be present in the compositions.
  • antioxidants examples include: (1) water-soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like; (2) oil-soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), lecithin, propyl gallate, alpha- tocopherol, and the like; and (3) metal-chelating agents, such as citric acid, ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA), sorbitol, tartaric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like.
  • water-soluble antioxidants such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like
  • oil-soluble antioxidants such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), le
  • Dye 6 was purified via silica gel chromatography and reverse-phase HPLC. Via silica gel chromatography, dye 6 was eluted with a DCM/MeOH solvent gradient of 400: 1, 200: 1, 167: 1, 143: 1, 125: 1, 111 : 1, 67: 1, and 33: 1. The most pure fractions were further purified in aliquots by HPLC in a water/MeCN with 0.1% TFA solvent mixture. The method used is as follows: 70:30 for 2 m, gradient to 30:70 over 60 m, gradient to 5:90 over 20 m, followed by a hold for 5 m and subsequent re-equilibration to 70:30 for 10 m.
  • the absorbance spectra in Figure 2 and Figures 4A-4G were obtained in DCM on a JASCO V-770 UV-Visible/NIR spectrophotometer with a 2000 nm/min or 4000 nm/mm scan rate. Plotted are the baseline corrected and normalized data.
  • the emission spectra in Figure 2 were taken in DCM on either a Horiba Instruments PIT QuantaMaster Series fluorometer (6), a Fluoromax-3 spectrofluorometer (1, 3 - 5), or home-built InGaAs array detector (Princeton Instruments). For 6 the following parameters were used: ex.
  • Flav 7 3, IR-26, and IR-1061 were diluted in DCM until matching absorbance was achieved at 808 nm.
  • Spatially dispersed 808nm illumination was used to image lml samples in 2.5 mL cuvettes of the SWIR dyes alongside a DCM blank. Each dye was compared at the same position to ensure consistent camera illumination.
  • SWIR images were collected on an InGaAs camera (Princeton Instruments, NIRvana 640) with a lOOOnm long-pass filter. The camera was cooled to -80 °C, the analog to digital (AD) conversion rate set to 2 MHz, the gain set to high, and different exposure times used to achieve sufficient signal and/or frame rates.
  • AD analog to digital
  • Symmetric polymethine dyes may be prepared from their respective heterocycles, for example, by the procedure of Schemes 4-5 (Angew. Chemie Int. Ed. 2017, 56, 13126-13129; Chem. Eur. J. 2017, 23, 9306-9312; ChemPhysChem. 2010, 11, 130-138).
  • Azetidine (0.034 mL, 0.50 mmol, 2.8 equiv.) was added by two 0.017 mL portions, initially and after 2.5 h.
  • the reaction mixture was extracted with dichloromethane/water, dried with MgSCL, filtered, and evaporated.
  • the crude product was purified with a 10: 1 to 2: 1 hexanes/EtOAc solvent gradient to yield a yellow solid (26.7 mg, 0.100 mmol, 63%).
  • Rf 0.5 in 1 : 1 hexanes/EtOAc.
  • the reaction mixture was freeze-pump-thawed x3, and heated to 100 °C for 10 min.
  • the crude mixture was evaporated onto silica gel and purified via column chromatography with a gradient of dicholoromethane plus 0.5-6% ethanol, followed by chromatography with dichloromethane plus 1-2% ethanol.
  • the procedure yielded an iridescent maroon solid (4.6 mg, 0.0059 mmol, 37%).
  • Rf 0.5 in 9: 1 DCM/EtOH.
  • reaction mixture was quenched with several drops of fluoroboric acid (5%, aqueous), extracted with dichloromethane after adding more 5% HBF 4 , quickly washed with brine, dried with NaiSCh, filtered, and evaporated.
  • fluoroboric acid 5%, aqueous
  • dichloromethane 5%, aqueous
  • the crude product was purified by trituration and filtration from cold EtOAc, yielding a dark purple solid (140 mg, 0.347 mmol, 74%).
  • Acetic anhydride (4.0 mL) was added and the solution was freeze-pump-thawed x3 before heating to 100 °C for 60 min. The reaction was cooled, ⁇ 10 mL of toluene was added, and the product was collected by vacuum filtration. The product was rinsed with toluene until filtrate runs clear, followed by a water rinse. The product was further purified by column chromatography, after dry-loading onto silica, in a three-way gradient of 1 : 1 toluene/dichloromethane plus 1% ethanol to 0: 1 toluene/dichloromethane plus 20% ethanol.
  • reaction mixture was quenched with fluoroboric acid (5%, aqueous, -1.5 mL), extracted with dichloromethane/water, dried with Na2S04, filtered, and evaporated.
  • fluoroboric acid 5%, aqueous, -1.5 mL
  • dichloromethane/water extracted with dichloromethane/water
  • Na2S04 filtered
  • evaporated The crude product was purified by trituration in EtOAc to yield a dark red solid (104 mg, 0.275 mmol, 81%).
  • a-naptho-4-methyl flavylium tetrafluoroborate (4-methyl-2-phenylbenzo[/?]chromen- 1 -ium tetrafluoroborate): a-napthoflavone (2-phenyl-4//-benzo[/?]chromen-4-one) (201.4 mg, 0.740 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was added to a flame-dried 50 mL 2 neck flask and dissolved in THF (7 mL) under a N2 atmosphere and cooled to 0 °C.
  • Methylmagesium bromide (1.15 M, 1.6 mL, 2.5 equiv.) was added dropwise, the solution was warmed to room temperature and it was stirred overnight. The reaction was quenched with 4 mL of 5% HBF4 and the resulting filtrate was filtered and rinsed with ethyl acetate to yield a lime green solid (242.9 mg, 0.678 mmol, 92%).
  • tetrafluoroborate a-naptho-4-methyl flavylium tetrafluoroborate (40.1 mg, 0.112 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), A'-[(3-(anilinomethylene)-2-chloro- l - cyclohexen-l-yl)methylene]aniline hydrochloride (19.6 mg, 0.055 mmol, 0.49 equiv.), and 2,6-di-/er/-butyl-4-methylpyridine (60.9 mg, 0.297 mg, 2.7 equiv.) were added to a flame-dried 25 mL Schlenk flask under N2 atmosphere.
  • Polymethine dyes disclosed herein are characterized with respect to their photophysics including absorption, emission, extinction coefficient, quantum yields, and fluorescence lifetime. All quantum yields values obtained are absolute quantum yields values measured using an integrating sphere. Photostabilities are evaluated by sample irradiation with high powered LEDs. Additionally, solvatochromism, solvent compatibility, and stability are assessed.
  • Example 5 Further Exemplary Preparation of Dimethylaminoflavylium Dyes
  • Triflic anhydride (0.14 mL, 0.8 mmol, 4 eq) was added slowly dropwise to a solution of 5- hydroxyflavone (50 mg, 0.2 mmol, 1 eq) in anhydrous pyridine (1.0 mL, 12 mmol, 60 eq) at 0 °C.
  • the reaction was warmed to room temperature and left to stir for 1 hr.
  • the solution was quenched with saturated NaHCC (5 mL), extracted with ethyl acetate (3 x 10 mL), dried over NaSCL, filtered and evaporated to give a yellow crystalline solid.
  • the crude filtrate was purified via silica gel chromatography with dichloromethane: ethanol (99.5: 0.5 -> 99.25: 0.75 -> 99: 1 ->99.75: 1.25) to afford pure 5-Flav7 as a dark green-brown soild.
  • Triflic anhydride (0.25 mL, 4.4 mmol, 4 eq) was added slowly dropwise to a solution of 6- hydroxyflavone (150 mg, 1.0 mmol, 1 eq) in anhydrous pyridine (3.0 mL, 36 mmol, 60 eq) at 0 °C.
  • the reaction was warmed to room temperature and left to stir for 1 hr.
  • the solution was quenched with saturated NaHCC (5 mL), extracted with ethyl acetate (3 x 10 mL), dried over NaSCL, filtered and evaporated to give an orange solid.
  • 6-(dimethylamino)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one 2a 50 mg, 0.35 mmol, 1 eq was dissolved in anhydrous THF (4.1 mL)and cooled to 0 °C.
  • MeMgBr 1.0 M in THF, 0.7 mL, 0.7 mmol, 2 eq was added dropwise over 30 min turning the solution from yellow to orange brown. Reaction was warmed to room temperature and left to stir overnight.
  • the crude product was purified via silica gel chromatography with dichloromethane: ethanol (99.25: 0.75 -> 99: 1 -> 98.75: 1.25 ->98.5: 1.5) to afford pure 6-Flav7 as a dark purple- black solid.
  • Ethyl 3-oxo-3-(4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)propanoate la 160 mg, 0.63 mmol, 1.8 equiv.
  • 3-(dimethylamino)phenol 49 mg, 0.36 mmol, 1.0 equiv.
  • the solution was cooled to rt and evaporated onto silica gel.
  • the crude product was purified via column chromatography, eluting with a 20: 1 hexanes/EtOAc gradient to yield a yellow solid (55 mg, 0.17 mmol, 46 %).
  • Flavone 2a (203 mg, 0.61 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was dissolved in THF (5.9 mL) in a 25 mL double-neck round bottom flask and cooled to 0 °C. Methylmagnesium bromide was added dropwise (1.5 mL, 1.0 M in THF, 2.5 equiv.) and the solution was warmed to rt and stirred for 24 h.
  • Flavone 2b (117 mg, 0.340 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was dissolved in THF (3.3 mL) in a 15 mL double-neck round bottom flask and cooled to 0 °C. Methylmagnesium bromide was added dropwise (0.85 mL, 1.0 M in THF, 2.5 equiv.) and the solution was warmed to rt and stirred for 24 h. The reaction was quenched by dropwise addition of 5% HBF4 on ice, extracted with dichloromethane, dried with Na2SC>4, filtered, and evaporated.
  • Flavone 2c (95 mg, 0.32 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was dissolved in THF (3.1 mL) in a 15 mL double-neck round bottom flask and cooled to 0 °C. Methylmagnesium bromide was added dropwise (0.79 mL, 1.0 M in THF, 2.5 equiv.) and the solution was warmed to rt and stirred for 24 h. The reaction was quenched by dropwise addition of 5% HBF4 on ice, extracted with dichloromethane, dried with Na2SC>4, filtered, and evaporated.
  • Flavone 2d (80 mg, 0.28 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was dissolved in THF (2.8 mL) in a 15 mL double-neck round bottom flask and cooled to 0 °C. Methylmagnesium bromide was added dropwise (0.71 mL, 1.0 M in THF, 2.5 equiv.) and the solution was warmed to rt and stirred for 24 h. The reaction was quenched by dropwise addition of 5% HBF4 on ice, extracted with dichloromethane, dried with Na2SC>4, filtered, and evaporated.
  • Flavone 2e (87 mg, 0.33 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was dissolved in THF (3.1 mL) in a 15 mL double-neck round bottom flask and cooled to 0 °C. Methylmagnesium bromide was added dropwise (0.78 mL, 1.0 M in THF, 2.5 equiv.) and the solution was warmed to rt and stirred for 24 h. The reaction was quenched by dropwise addition of 5% HBF4 on ice, extracted with dichloromethane, dried with Na2SC>4, filtered, and evaporated. The crude product was triturated with ice cold ethyl acetate and vacuum filtered to produce a purple solid (77 mg, 0.21 mmol, 67 %). Absorbance (CH2CI2): 513 nm.
  • Flavone 2f (25 mg, 0.084 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was dissolved in THF (0.82 mL) in a 15 mL double-neck round bottom flask and cooled to 0 °C. Methylmagnesium bromide was added dropwise (0.21 mL, 1.0 M in THF, 2.5 equiv.) and the solution was warmed to rt and stirred for 24 h. The reaction was quenched by dropwise addition of 5% HBF4 on ice, extracted with dichloromethane, dried with Na2SC>4, filtered, and evaporated.
  • Flavone 2g (21 mg, 0.068 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was dissolved in THF (0.63 mL) in a 15 mL double-neck round bottom flask and cooled to 0 °C. Methylmagnesium bromide was added dropwise (0.17 mL, 1.0 M in THF, 2.5 equiv.) and the solution was warmed to rt and stirred for 24 h.
  • Flavylium 3a 31 mg, 0.074 mmol, 1.0 equiv.
  • A'-[(3-(anilinomethylene)-2-chloro- l - cyclohexen-l-yl)methylene]aniline hydrochloride (12.7 mg, 0.035 mmol, 0.48 equiv.)
  • sodium acetate (18 mg, 0.22 mmol, 3 equiv.) were dissolved in a mixture of «-butanol (0.47 mL) and toluene (0.2 mL) in a 25 mL Schlenk flask and heated to 105 °C for 30 minutes. The solution was cooled to rt and evaporated onto silica gel.
  • Flavylium 3f (18 mg, 0.047 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), /V-[(3-(anilinomethylene)-2-chloro-l- cyclohexen-l-yl)methylene]aniline hydrochloride (8 mg, 0.002 mmol, 0.48 equiv.), and sodium acetate (12 mg, 0.14 mmol, 3.0 equiv.) were dissolved in a mixture of «-butanol (0.3 mL) and toluene (0.1 mL) in a 25 mL Schlenk flask and heated to 105 °C for 20 minutes. The solution was cooled to rt and evaporated onto silica gel.
  • Flavylium 3g (10 mg, 0.03 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), /V-[(3-(anilinomethylene)-2-chloro-l- cyclohexen-l-yl)methylene]aniline hydrochloride (4 mg, 0.01 mmol, 0.48 equiv.), and sodium acetate (6 mg, 0.08 mmol, 3 equiv.) were dissolved in a mixture of «-butanol (205 pL) and toluene (86 pL) in a 25 mL Schlenk flask and heated to 100 °C for 35 minutes. The solution was cooled to rt and evaporated onto silica gel.
  • 3-(dimethylamino)phenol (299 mg, 2.18 mmol, 1.00 equiv.) and ethyl pivaloylacetate (700 pL, 3.93 mmol, 1.00 equiv.) were combined in an oven-dried 1 dram vial and heated at 180 °C for 40 h. The solution was cooled to room temperature, evaporated onto silica, and purified via column chromatography with a 10: 1 to 4: 1 hexanes/EtOAc gradient.
  • the product was extracted into dicholormethane with the addition of 5% fluoroboric acid, dried with Na2S04, filtered, and evaporated.
  • the product was purified by precipitation upon addition of cold EtOAc, filtration and rinsing with cold EtOAc to obtain a magenta solid (268 mg, 0.669 mmol, 81%).
  • DMSO-d6 d 156.1, 155.3, 154.1, 148.9, 145.5, 131.5, 131.1, 129.1, 126.0, 125.8, 115.3, 113.1,
  • Acetic anhydride (3.5 mL) was added and the solution was freeze-pump-thawed x3 before heating to 120 °C for 60 min. The reaction was cooled, ⁇ 14 mL of toluene was added, and the product was collected by vacuum filtration. The product was rinsed with toluene until filtrate runs clear, followed by a water rinse. The product was further purified by column chromatography, after dry-loading onto silica, in a three-way gradient of 1 : 1 toluene/dichloromethane plus 1% ethanol to 0: 1 toluene/dichloromethane plus 12% ethanol.
  • Acetic anhydride (3.5 mL) was added and the solution was freeze-pump-thawed x3 before heating to 100 °C for 60 min. The reaction was cooled, ⁇ 10 mL of toluene was added, and the product was collected by vacuum filtration. A bronze solid resulted (111 mg, 0.155 mmol, 81%).
  • Toluene (2.1 mL) and n-butanol (4.8 mL) were added and the solution was freeze-pump-thawed x3 before heating to 100 °C for 3 h. The reaction was cooled and evaporated. The product was precipitated in toluene and collected by vacuum filtration, washing with -200 mL toluene, -50 mL trifluorotoluene, -50 mL cold THF. The product was further purified by column chromatography after dry-loading onto silica in dichloromethane plus a gradient of 0.5-5% ethanol.

Abstract

The present disclosure provides NIR- and SWIR-active small molecule polymethine dyes with improved properties for use in optical imaging, photothermal therapy, and photodynamic therapy.

Description

HETEROCY CLYL POLYMETHINE IR CHROMOPHORES
RELATED APPLICATIONS
This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/775,788 filed December 5, 2018, the contents of which are fully incorporated by reference herein.
BACKGROUND
Photomedicine broadly refers to the use of light for diagnostic or therapeutic procedures, including optical imaging, photothermal therapy (thermal ablation of cells) and photodynamic therapy (reactive oxygen species induced apoptosis or necrosis). (See Hamblin, M.R.; Huang, Y.Y. Handbook of Photomedicine; CRC Press: Boca Raton, 2014.) The low toxicity of light coupled with the direct control of localization and dosage make phototherapy a promising avenue for increasing the therapeutic index of disease treatment. (See Yuan, A.; Wu, I; Tang, X.; Zhao, L.; Xu, F.; Hu, Y. J. Pharm. Sci. 2013, 102, 6-28.) Additionally, the inexpensive nature of lasers and detectors poise photoimaging platforms as cost-effective preventative healthcare screening procedures. (See Massoud, T.F.; Gambhir, S.S. Genes Dev. 2003, 17, 545-580.) Despite its potential, photomedicine has encountered a key limitation: the penetration of light into tissue, defined as the point in which 2/3 of the light has been scattered or absorbed by endogenous biomolecules. (Tong, R; Kohane, D.S. WIREs Nanomed. Nanobiotechnol. 2012, 4, 638-662.) As one moves toward lower energy light, the distance light can traverse through tissue increases. (See Weissleder, R. Nat. Biotechnol. 2001, 19, 316.) This is a well-known phenomenon that has resulted in a large push toward near-infrared (NIR, 700-1000 nm, Figure 1) chromophores, fluorophores, and activatable probes. (Yuan, A.; Wu, J.; Tang, X.; Zhao, L.; Xu, F.; Hu, Y. J. Pharm. Sci. 2013, 102, 6.) However, short-wave infrared (SWIR, 1000-2000 nm, also referred to as the NIR-II region) probes have not received as much attention, despite the fact that tissue penetration is superior in this region, especially when there is high blood content (Figure 1). (Lim, Y. T.; Kim, S.; Nakayama, A.; Stott, N. E.; Bawendi, M. G.; Frangioni, J. V. Mol. Imaging 2003, 2, 50.)
Recently, Hongjie Dai and coworkers demonstrated using a carbon nanotube (CNT)-NIR- cyanine dye conjugate that the depth and resolution of in vivo imaging is superior above 1000 nm. (Hong, G.; Lee, J.C.; Robinson, J.T.; Raaz, U.; Xie, L.; Huang, N.F.; Cooke, J.P.; Dai, H. Nat. Med. 2012, 18, 1841.) The main limitation was the need for CNTs as a SWIR contrast agent, as there are concerns regarding the biocompatibility of CNTs. (Foldvari, M.; Bagonluri, M. Nanomedicine: Nanotechnol. Biol. Med.2008, 4, 183.) While the potential of the SWIR has been demonstrated, materials that emit in this region are limited. Most reports of imaging in the SWIR have employed carbon nanotubes or quantum dots. Rare earth nanomaterials, as well as layer-by- layer assembled nanoparticles containing an organic dye have also been employed. However, all these materials are sizeable and do not represent a direct comparison to the fluorophores that have been enormously successful in vitro. What is necessary is the development of bright, stable, non toxic small-molecule fluorophores that span the SWIR region and will allow for multiplexed imaging experiments. (See Antaris, A. L.; Chen, H.; Cheng, K.; Sun, Y.; Hong, G.; Qu, C.; Diao, S.; Deng, Z.; Hu, X.; Zhang, B.; Zhang, X.; Yaghi, O. K.; Alamparambil, Z. R; Hong, X.; Cheng, Z.; Dai, H. Nat. Mater. 2015, 15, 235.)
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
Currently, there are only a handful of organic fluorophores that absorb and emit above 1000 nm, allowing excitation in the SWIR. Known SWIR-excitable fluorophores either have low or negligible quantum yields, or are too hydrophobic to be used directly for in vivo imaging.
The present disclosure provides NIR and SWIR-active small molecules with improved properties for use in optical imaging, photothermal therapy, and photodynamic therapy. Accordingly, the present disclosure provides compounds of formula I or formula II:
Figure imgf000003_0001
wherein:
A and B are each independently selected from a bicyclic, tricyclic, or tetracyclic heteroaryl; wherein A and B are each independently substituted with one or more R7a and/or R7b; each instance of p is independently 0, 1, or 2;
X is H, halo, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkynyl, N(R3)2, P(R3)2, PO(R3)2, SR4, S(0)R4, S(0)2R4, OR4, SeR4, Se(0)R4, Se(0)2R4, azido, cyano, haloalkyl (such as perfluoroalkyl), hydroxyl; R1 and R2 are each independently selected from F, D, or T; or R1 and R2 together complete a cycloalkenyl ring, a heterocyclyl ring, or a polycyclyl ring system;
R3 is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; and
R4 is H, alkyl, or aryl;
wherein each R7a and/or R7b is independently selected from H, alkoxy, acyl, heteroaryl,
sulfonate, carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, halo, aryl, amino, alkylamino, Ci-6 alkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, haloalkyl, aralkenyl (preferably arylethenyl), aralkynyl (preferably arylethynyl), hetaralkenyl (preferably heteroarylethenyl), hetaralkynyl (preferably heteroarylethynyl), and heterocyclyl;
or two adjacent R7a and/or R7b groups combine to form a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring
including the atoms to which they are attached.
The present disclosure also provides methods of using these dyes for in vivo sensing or cargo delivery, and methods of preparing these dyes.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS FIG. 1A shows a generalized polymethine dye scaffold.
FIG. IB shows the lpkic,opi for selected polymethine dyes.
FIG. 2 shows the normalized absorbance (solid) and photoluminescence (dotted) of 5, 7- 10 in dichloromethane.
FIGs. 3A shows images of vials of IR-26, IR-1061 and Flav7 with matched optical density at 808 nm in dichloromethane, excited at 808 nm, collected using an InGaAs camera (1000-1500 nm).
FIGs. 3B shows the average background subtracted camera intensity for ten frames normalized to exposure.
FIGs. 4A-4G show normalized absorption and emission spectra for exemplary compounds of the present disclosure.
FIG. 5 shows normalized absorption and emission spectra for exemplary compounds of the present disclosure. OFT ATT /FT) DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
In certain aspects, the present disclosure provides compounds of formula I or formula II:
Figure imgf000005_0001
wherein:
A and B are each independently selected from a bicyclic, tricyclic, or tetracyclic heteroaryl; wherein A and B are each independently substituted with one or more R7a and/or R7b; each instance of p is independently 0, 1, or 2;
X is H, halo, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkynyl, N(R3)2, P(R3)2, PO(R3)2, SR4, S(0)R4, S(0)2R4, OR4, SeR4, Se(0)R4, Se(0)2R4, azido, cyano, haloalkyl (such as perfluoroalkyl), hydroxyl;
R1 and R2 are each independently selected from F, D, or T; or R1 and R2 together complete a cycloalkenyl ring, a heterocyclyl ring, or a polycyclyl ring system;
R3 is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; and
R4 is H, alkyl, or aryl;
wherein each R7a and/or R7b is independently selected from H, alkoxy, acyl, heteroaryl,
sulfonate, carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, halo, aryl, amino, alkylamino, Ci-6 alkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, haloalkyl, aralkenyl (preferably arylethenyl), aralkynyl (preferably arylethynyl), hetaralkenyl (preferably heteroarylethenyl), hetaralkynyl (preferably heteroarylethynyl), and heterocyclyl;
or two adjacent R7a and/or R7b groups combine to form a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring
including the atoms to which they are attached.
In certain embodiments of formula I or II, R1 and R2 are the same.
In certain embodiments of formula I or II, R1 is F. In certain embodiments, R1 is D. In certain embodiments, R1 is T.
In certain embodiments of formula I or II, R2 is F. In certain embodiments, R2 is D. In certain embodiments, R2 is T. In certain embodiments, the present disclosure provides compounds of formula I or formula
II:
Figure imgf000006_0001
wherein:
A and B are each independently selected from a bicyclic, tricyclic, or tetracyclic heteroaryl; wherein A and B are each independently substituted with one or more R7a and/or R7b; each instance of p is independently 0, 1, or 2;
X is H, halo, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkynyl, N(R3)2, P(R3)2, PO(R3)2, SR4, OR4, SeR4, azido, cyano, haloalkyl (such as perfluoroalkyl), or hydroxyl;
R1 and R2 together complete a cycloalkenyl ring, a heterocyclyl ring, or a polycyclyl ring system;
R3 is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; and
R4 is H, alkyl, or aryl;
wherein each R7a and/or R7b is independently selected from H, alkoxy, acyl, heteroaryl,
sulfonate, carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, halo, aryl, amino, alkylamino, Ci-6 alkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, haloalkyl, aralkenyl (preferably arylethenyl), aralkynyl (preferably arylethynyl), hetaralkenyl (preferably heteroarylethenyl), hetaralkynyl (preferably heteroarylethynyl), and heterocyclyl;
or two adjacent R7a and/or R7b groups combine to form a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring
including the atoms to which they are attached.
In certain embodiments, at least one of A and B is not:
Figure imgf000006_0002
In certain embodiments, the compounds of formulas I and II are not:
Figure imgf000007_0001
Figure imgf000008_0001
Figure imgf000008_0002
. In some embodiments, the compounds of formulas I and II are not:
Figure imgf000009_0001
In further embodiments, the compounds of formulas I and II are none of the structural formulae depicted above.
In certain embodiments of the compounds of formulas I and II, R1 and R2 together complete a cycloalkenyl ring, such as a cyclohexenyl ring.
In certain embodiments of the compounds of formulas I and II, A and B are different.
In certain embodiments of the compounds of formulas I and II:
A is substituted by one or more substituents independently selected from R7a and R7b;
B is substituted by one or more substituents independently selected from R7a and R71’;
each instance of R7a and R71’ is independently selected from alkyl (such as haloalkyl, fluoroalkyl or sulfonatoalkyl), alkoxy (such as haloalkyloxy, fluoroalkyloxy or sulfonatoalkyloxy), acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, N(R6)R6, sulfonate, carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, or halo; and
each instance of R6 is independently selected from H, alkyl, such as fluoroalkyl or
sulfonatoalkyl, hydroxyl, alkyloxy, aryloxy, acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; or two instances of R6 connected to the same N may complete a heterocyclyl. In certain embodiments of the compounds of formulas I and II:
A is substituted by one or more substituents independently selected from R7a and R71’;
B is substituted by one or more substituents independently selected from R7a and R71’;
each instance of R7a and R71’ is independently selected from alkyl (such as haloalkyl, fluoroalkyl or sulfonatoalkyl), alkoxy (such as haloalkyloxy, fluoroalkyloxy or sulfonatoalkyloxy), acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, N(R6)R6, sulfonate, carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, or halo; and
each instance of R6 is independently selected from H, alkyl, such as fluoroalkyl or
sulfonatoalkyl, acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; or two instances of R6 connected to the same N may complete a heterocyclyl.
In certain embodiments of the compounds of formulas I and II:
A is substituted by one or more substituents independently selected from R7a and R7b;
B is substituted by one or more substituents independently selected from R7a and R71’;
each instance of R7a and R71’ is independently selected from alkyl, such as fluoroalkyl or
sulfonatoalkyl, acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, N(R6)R6, sulfonate, or carbonate; and
each instance of R6 is independently selected from H, alkyl, such as fluoroalkyl or
sulfonatoalkyl, acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; or two instances of R6 connected to the same N may complete a heterocyclyl.
In certain embodiments of the compounds of formulas I and II, at least one R7a or R71’ is a water-solubilizing group, for example one capable, either alone or in combination with other water-solubilizing groups, of rendering the compound soluble in an aqueous medium. In certain preferred embodiments, the water-solubilizing group is selected from a carboxylate group, a sulfonate, an anionic-substituted alkyl, or an anionic-substituted alkyl ether. In certain embodiments, the water-solubilizing group is a poly(ethylene glycol), a poly(oxazoline), or a poly(zwitterion). In certain embodiments, the water-solubilizing group is a poly(ethylene glycol), or a poly(oxazoline). In certain embodiments, the molecular weight of the poly(ethylene glycol), a poly(oxazoline), or a poly(zwitterion) is about 100 daltons to about 5,000 daltons. In certain embodiments, the molecular weight of the poly(ethylene glycol) or a poly(oxazoline) is about 1,000 daltons to about 5,000 daltons.
In certain embodiments of the compounds of formulas I and II, at least one R7a or R7b is an electron-withdrawing group, for example to alter the electronic and/or optical properties of the compound. In certain preferred embodiments, the electron-withdrawing group is selected from haloalkyl, cyano, sulfonate, sulfonatoalkyl, sulfonatoalkyloxy, carboxyl, ester, amide, halo, nitro, alkylammonium, amine oxide, or haloalkyl, such as trifluoromethyl. In certain preferred embodiments of the compounds of formulas I and II, at least one R7a or R76 is selected from fluoroalkyl, for example one capable, either alone or in combination with other water-solubilizing groups, of rendering the compound soluble in a fluorous medium. In certain preferred embodiments, at least one R7a or R76 is N(R6)R6.
In certain embodiments of the compounds of formula I and II:
A and B are independently selected from
Figure imgf000011_0001
W is selected from O, SO, SO2, PR6, PO2H, POR6, SeO, Se02, TeO, Te02, SIR6 2, GeR6 2, BH, BOH, or BR6;
Y is selected from 0+, S+, Se+, Te+, SiR, GeR6, N, NR6+, or NO; and
A and B are independently optionally substituted with one or more R7a and/or R76, up to the limits of valence.
In certain embodiments of the compounds of formulas I and II:
A and B are independently selected from
Figure imgf000011_0002
wherein Q is N(R6)R6 OR6, SR6, SO(R6)2, SeR6, SeOR6, SeO(R6)2, P(R6)R6, PO(R6)R6, B(R6)2, or halo; and
n is 0, 1 , 2, 3, 4, or 5 subject to the limits of valence, preferably 0 or 1.
In certain embodiments of the compounds of formulas I and II:
A and B are independently selected from:
Figure imgf000012_0001
wherein Q is N(R6)R6 or OR6; and
n is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 subject to the limits of valence, preferably 0 or 1.
In certain embodiments of the compounds of formulas I and II:
A and B are independently selected from
Figure imgf000012_0002
wherein Q is N(R6)R6 or OR6;
R7ib is C(R31)(R32), arylene, heteroarylene, cycloalkylene, or heterocyclylene; R31 and R32 are each independently selected from H or alkyl (e.g., methyl); n is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 subject to the limits of valence, preferably 0 or 1; and o is 0, 1, 2, or 3. According to these embodiments, when R7ib is arylene, heteroarylene, cycloalkylene, or heterocyclylene, the recited ring(s) may be either fused to the ring in which R7ib appears, or may be in a spiro relationship to that ring.
In certain embodiments of the compounds of formulas I and II, R7ib is C(R31)(R32); and R31 and R32 are each alkyl (e.g., methyl). In other embodiments, R7ib is arylene (e.g., phenylene).
In certain embodiments of the compounds of formulas I and II, A and B are independently selected from
Figure imgf000013_0001
In certain embodiments, o is 2.
Figure imgf000013_0002
In certain embodiments, the compound is or
Figure imgf000013_0003
In certain embodiments of the compounds of formulas I and II, at least one R7a or R7b is aryl, trifluoromethyl, tert-butyl, H, aralkenyl, aralkynyl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclyl. In certain embodiments, at least one R7a or R7b is phenyl, heterocyclyl, polycylic aromatic, aralkenyl, or aralkynyl. In certain embodiments, at least one R7a or R71’ is alkyloxy (e.g., methoxy), or cycloalkyl (e.g., adamantyl).
In certain embodiments of the compounds of formulas I and II, at least one R7a or R71’ is substituted with one or more R7 , wherein R7 is selected from alkyl (such as haloalkyl, fluoroalkyl or sulfonatoalkyl), alkoxy (such as haloalkyloxy, fluoroalkyloxy or sulfonatoalkyloxy), acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, N(R6)R6, sulfonate, carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, or halo. In certain preferred embodiments, the R7 on the at least one R7a or R71’ is at the para position.
In certain embodiments of the compounds of formula I , the compound is selected from:
Figure imgf000014_0001
Figure imgf000015_0001
wherein Ar is aryl; and
m is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5, preferably 0 or 1.
In certain embodiments, the compound is
Figure imgf000015_0002
In certain preferred embodiments of the compounds of formulas I and II, R7a and R7b are each aryl (e.g., phenyl). In certain embodiments, at least one R7a or R7b is substituted with one or more R7 , wherein R7 is selected from alkyl (such as alkyl (e.g., methyl), haloalkyl, fluoroalkyl (e.g., trifluoromethyl) or sulfonatoalkyl), alkoxy (such as methoxy, haloalkyloxy, fluoroalkyloxy or sulfonatoalkyloxy), acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, sulfonate, carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, amino (e.g., dimethyl amino) or halo (e.g., fluoro, chloro, or bromo).
In certain embodiments of the compounds of formulas I and II, A and B are
independently selected from
Figure imgf000015_0003
In certain preferred embodiments of the compounds of formulas I and II, R6 is alkyl (e.g., methyl or ethyl). In certain preferred embodiments, two instances of R6 connected to the same N complete a heterocyclyl (e.g., azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, or piperidinyl). In certain preferred embodiments, two instances of R6 connected to the same N complete a heteroaryl (e.g., carbazolyl).
In certain preferred embodiments of the compounds of formulas I and II, X is Cl.
In certain embodiments of the compounds of formulas I and II, at least one of A and B is a tricyclic moiety. In certain embodiments, at least one of A and B is carbazolyl. In certain embodiments, at least one of A and B is substituted with N(Rn)R12, wherein R11 is cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, and R12 is selected from H, alkyl, acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; or wherein R11 and R12 together complete a heterocyclyl. In certain embodiments, at least one of A and B is substituted with a 4-8 member N-linked heterocyclyl. In certain embodiments, at least one of A and B is
Figure imgf000016_0001
substituted with sulfate, sulfonate, such as sulfonatoalkyl, or carboxylate. In other preferred embodiments, at least one of A and B is substituted with a fluoroalkyl.
In certain embodiments of the compounds of formulas I and II, the compound is a compound of formula I. In other embodiments, the compound is a compound of formula II.
In certain embodiments of the compounds of formulas I and II, at least one of A and B is:
Figure imgf000016_0002
wherein each instance of q is independently selected from 0, 1, 2, or 3.
In certain embodiments of the compounds of formulas I and II, X is H, halo, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkynyl, N(R3)2, P(R3)2, PO(R3)2, SR4, OR4, SeR4, azido, cyano, haloalkyl (such as perfluoroalkyl), or hydroxyl. In certain embodiments, X is aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkynyl, N(R3)2, P(R3)2, PO(R3)2, SR4, OR4, SeR4, azido, cyano, haloalkyl (such as perfluoroalkyl), or hydroxyl.
In certain embodiments of the compounds of formulas I and II:
A is optionally substituted by one or more substituents independently selected from R7a and/or
R71’;
B is optionally substituted by one or more substituents independently selected from R7a and/or
R71’;
each instance of R6 is independently selected from H, alkyl, such as fluoroalkyl or
sulfonatoalkyl, acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; or two instances of R6 connected to the same N may complete a heterocyclyl; and
each instance of R7a and/or R7b is independently selected from alkyl, such as fluoroalkyl or
sulfonatoalkyl, acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, N(R6)R6, sulfonate, or carbonate;
or two adjacent R7a and/or R7b groups combine to form a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring
including the atoms to which they are attached.
In certain embodiments of the compound of formula (I), at least one R7a and/or R71’ is a water-solubilizing group. In further embodiments, the water-solubilizing group is selected from carboxylate group, a sulfonate, an anionic-substituted alkyl, or an anionic-substituted alkyl ether In certain embodiments of the compound of formula (I), at least one R7a and/or R71’ is an electron-withdrawing group. In further embodiments, wherein the electron-withdrawing group is selected from haloalkyl, cyano, sulfonate, sulfonatoalkyl, sulfonatoalkyloxy, carboxyl, ester, amide, halo, nitro, alkylammonium, amine oxide, or haloalkyl such as trifluoromethyl. In certain embodiments of the compound of formula (I), at least one R7a and/or R71’ is an electron- donating group.
In certain embodiments of the compound of formula (I), at least one R7a and/or R71’ is selected from fluoroalkyl, for instance to render the compound soluble in afluorous medium. In further embodiments, at least one R7a and/or R71’ is (CH2)3C6Fi3.
In certain embodiments of the compound of formula (I), A and B are independently selected from carbazolyl, phenanthrolinyl, dibenzofuranyl, acridinyl, phenanthridinyl, xanthenyl,
Figure imgf000018_0001
A and B are independently optionally substituted with one or more R7a and/or R76, up to the limits of valence; and
W is O, SO, SO2, PR6, PO2H, POR6, SeO, Se02, TeO, Te02, SIR6 2, GeR6 2, BH, BOH, or BR6; and
Y is 0+, S+, Se+, Te+, SiR, GeR6, N, NR6+, or NO.
In certain embodiments of the compound of formula (I), A and B are independently selected from
Figure imgf000018_0002
Figure imgf000019_0001
preferably 0 or 1. In certain such embodiments, m is 0. In certain embodiments, n is 0, while in other embodiments, n is 1. In certain embodiments, the at least one R7a or R76 is substituted with one or more R7 , wherein R7 is selected from alkyl (such as haloalkyl, fluoroalkyl or sulfonatoalkyl), alkoxy (such as haloalkyloxy, fluoroalkyloxy or sulfonatoalkyloxy), acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, N(R6)R6, sulfonate, carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, or halo. In certain embodiments, the R7 on the at least one R7a or R71’ is at the para position.
In certain embodiments of the compound of formula (I), A and B are independently selected from
Figure imgf000019_0002
In certain embodiments of the compound of formula (I), Y is 0+. In other embodiments, W is O, SO, S02, PR6, PO2H, POR6, SeO, Se02, TeO, Te02, SIR6 2, GeR6 2, BH, BOH, or BR6; and Y is S+, Se+, Te+, SiR, GeR6, N, NR6+, or NO.
In certain embodiments of the compound of formula (I), A and B are independently selected from carbazolyl, phenanthrolinyl, dibenzofuranyl, acridinyl, phenanthridinyl, xanthenyl,
Figure imgf000020_0001
In certain embodiments of the compound of formula (I), at least one of A and B is a tricyclic or tetracyclic moiety.
In certain embodiments of the compound of formula (I), at least one of A and B is a tricyclic moiety, e.g., at least one of A and B is carbazolyl, phenanthrolinyl, dibenzofuranyl, acridinyl, phenanthridinyl, xanthenyl,
Figure imgf000020_0002
In certain embodiments of the compound of formula (I), at least one of A and B is a tetracyclic moiety, e.g., at least one of A and B is selected from
Figure imgf000020_0003
In certain embodiments of the compound of formula (I), at least one of A and B comprises a heteroatom other than nitrogen or oxygen. In certain embodiments, at least one of A or B comprises a heteroatom selected from sulfur, silicon, or selenium. In certain embodiments of the compound of formula (I), at least one of A and B is selected from:
Figure imgf000021_0002
In certain embodiments of the compound of formula (I), at least one of A and B is substituted with N(Rn)R12, wherein R11 is cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, and R12 is selected from H, alkyl, acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; or wherein R11 and R12 together complete a heterocyclyl. In certain embodiments, at least one of A and B is substituted with a 4-8 member N-linked heteroaryl or heterocyclyl. In certain embodiments, at least one of A
Figure imgf000021_0001
In some embodiments, one or both of A and B are selected from the bicyclic, tricyclic, and tetracyclic moieties disclosed in International Patent Application PCT/US 18/36099, filed June 5, 2018, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
In certain embodiments of the compound of formula (I) or formula (II), one or both of A and B is ionic such that the compound of fomula (I) or formula (II) as a whole bears a charge. Such compounds may be paired with any suitable counter ion of interest, for example BF4 , tetraarylborate, Cl , Br , G, CIO4 , OAc , trifluoroacetate, arylacetate, sulfonate, or phosphate.
In certain aspects, the present disclosure provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising a compound as described herein.
In certain aspects, the present disclosure provides methods of delivering a compound or composition disclosed herein to a living animal, comprising administering the compound or composition to the living animal. In certain aspects, the present disclosure provides methods of obtaining an image comprising illuminating a compound disclosed herein with excitation light, thereby causing the compound to emit fluorescence; and detecting the fluorescence. In certain embodiments, the image is obtained in vivo. In certain embodiments, the methods further comprise administering the compound to a living animal.
In certain aspects, the present disclosure provides methods of administering a therapy comprising administering a compound or composition disclosed herein, for example to an animal. In certain embodiments the methods further comprise illuminating the compound with excitation light. In certain embodiments, the methods further comprise generating singlet oxygen by illuminating the compound with excitation light.
In certain aspects, the present disclosure provides methods of preparing a compound as disclosed herein, comprising:
providing a starting material compound of formula I or formula II wherein A and B are different:
Figure imgf000022_0001
contacting the starting material compound with a basic amine, thereby producing a half-dye
intermediate;
providing a compound of formula (IV):
R8-D (IV); and
contacting the half-dye intermediate with the compound of formula (IV), thereby producing the compound;
wherein:
A and B are each independently selected from a bicyclic, tricyclic, or tetracyclic heteroaryl; wherein A and B are each independently substituted with one or more R7a and/or R7b; each instance of p is independently 0, 1, or 2;
X is H, halo, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkynyl, N(R3)2, P(R3)2, PO(R3)2, SR4,
S(0)R4, S(0)2R4, OR4, SeR4, Se(0)R4, Se(0)2R4, azido, cyano, haloalkyl (such as perfluoroalkyl), hydroxyl; R1 and R2 are each independently selected from F, D, or T; or R1 and R2 together complete a cycloalkenyl ring, a heterocyclyl ring, or a polycyclyl ring system;
R3 is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; and
R4 is H, alkyl, or aryl;
wherein each R7a and/or R7b is independently selected from H, alkoxy, acyl, heteroaryl,
sulfonate, carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, halo, aryl, amino, alkylamino, Ci-6 alkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, haloalkyl, aralkenyl (preferably arylethenyl), aralkynyl (preferably arylethynyl), hetaralkenyl (preferably heteroarylethenyl), hetaralkynyl (preferably heteroarylethynyl), and heterocyclyl;
or two adjacent R7a and/or R7b groups combine to form a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring
including the atoms to which they are attached.
In certain embodiments, the present disclosure provides methods of preparing a compound as disclosed herein, comprising:
providing a starting material compound of formula I or formula II wherein A and B are different:
Figure imgf000023_0001
contacting the starting material compound with a basic amine, thereby producing a half-dye intermediate;
providing a compound of formula (IV):
R8-D (IV); and
contacting the half-dye intermediate with the compound of formula (IV), thereby producing the compound;
wherein:
A and B are each independently selected from a bicyclic, tricyclic, or tetracyclic heteroaryl; wherein A and B are each independently substituted with one or more R7a and/or R7b;
each instance of p is independently 0, 1, or 2;
A and B are different; X is H, halo, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkynyl, N(R3)2, P(R3)2, PO(R3)2, SR4, OR4, SeR4, azido, cyano, haloalkyl (such as perfluoroalkyl), hydroxyl;
R1 and R2 together complete a cycloalkenyl ring, a heterocyclyl ring, or a polycyclyl ring system; R3 is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; and
R4 is H, alkyl, or aryl;
wherein each R7a and/or R7b is independently selected from H, alkoxy, acyl, heteroaryl,
sulfonate, carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, halo, aryl, amino, alkylamino, Ci-6 alkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, haloalkyl, aralkenyl (preferably arylethenyl), aralkynyl (preferably
arylethynyl), hetaralkenyl (preferably heteroarylethenyl), hetaralkynyl (preferably heteroarylethynyl), and heterocyclyl;
or two adjacent R7a and/or R7b groups combine to form a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring
including the atoms to which they are attached
and
R8 is alkyl, such as methyl.
This disclosure also includes all suitable isotopic variations of a compound of the disclosure. An isotopic variation of a compound of the invention is defined as one in which at least one atom is replaced by an atom having the same atomic number but an atomic mass different from the atomic mass usually or predominantly found in nature. Examples of isotopes that can be incorporated into a compound of the invention include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorus, sulphur, fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine, such as 2H (deuterium), 3H (tritium), nC, 13C, 14C, 15N, 170, 180, 32P, 33P, 33S, 34S, 35S, 36S, 18F, 36C1, 82Br, 123I, 124I, 129I and 133I, respectively. Accordingly, recitation of “hydrogen” or “H” should be understood to encompass ' H (protium), 2H (deuterium), and 3H (tritium) unless otherwise specified. Certain isotopic variations of a compound of the invention, for example, those in which one or more radioactive isotopes such as 3H or 14C are incorporated, are useful in drug and/or substrate tissue distribution studies. Tritiated and carbon- 14, i.e., 14C, isotopes are particularly preferred for their ease of preparation and detectability. Further, substitution with isotopes such as deuterium may afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example, increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements and hence may be preferred in some circumstances. Such variants may also have advantageous optical properties arising, for example, from changes to vibrational modes due to the heavier isotope. Isotopic variations of a compound of the invention can generally be prepared by conventional procedures known by a person skilled in the art such as by the illustrative methods or by the preparations described in the examples hereafter using appropriate isotopic variations of suitable reagents.
Small Molecule SWIR Chromophores
To obtain a SWIR small molecule chromophore, a narrow gap between the highest occupied molecular orbital (HOMO) and lowest unoccupied molecular orbital (LUMO) must be achieved. As the HOMO-LUMO gap of chromophores decreases, their reactivity increases. Thus, stability of SWIR chromophores is a more significant challenge than for NIR chromophores. Another consequence of the small energy difference between the ground state and excited state is that there are many non-emissive pathways which can facilitate relaxation back to the ground state, resulting in low quantum yields of fluorescence (OF). Finally, for SWIR photodynamic therapy applications, the triplet energies of the photosensitizer need to be high enough to sensitize oxygen (23 kcal/mol).
Currently, there are only a handful of organic fluorophores that absorb and emit above 1000 nm, allowing excitation in the SWIR. Known SWIR-excitable fluorophores either have low or negligible quantum yields, or are too hydrophobic to be used directly in in vivo imaging.
The present disclosure provides SWIR-active small molecules with improved properties for use in optical imaging, photothermal therapy, and photodynamic therapy.
Dimethylamino Flawlium Dyes
While cyanines have been the premier polymethine dyes for applications in the visible and NIR, their extension into the SWIR has been limited. Lengthening the polymethine chain, which is known to impart a bathochromic shift to cyanine dyes, can compromise the fluorescence quantum yield (Fr), decrease fluorophore stability, and lead to loss of electron delocalization over the entire conjugated system. Heterocycle modification can create bright, stable polymethine dyes in the SWIR. However, the photophysical changes that result from heterocyclyl modification are not straightforward. Extending heterocycle conjugation or adding electron-donating groups have been shown to bathochromically-shift polymethine dyes. Alternately, varying the heteroatom from oxygen down the chalcogens results in red-shifted absorption of -30-100 nm for each step, although the emission is compromised by increased intersystem crossing due to spin-orbit coupling. Dimethylamino flavylium polymethine dyes have been prepared and analyzed. Scheme 1. Synthesis of dimethylamino flavylium polymethine dyes 3 - 6.
Figure imgf000026_0001
Polymethine dyes can be prepared through the introduction of an activated heterocycle to an aldehyde or bis-aldehyde equivalent. The requisite 7-A' A'-dimethylamino-4-methyl-flavylium heterocycle (1) was prepared in three steps from dimethylaminophenol as previously reported (Chen, J.-R.; Wong, J.-B.; Kuo, P.-Y.; Yang, D.-Y. Org. Lett. 2008, 10, 4823-4826):
Scheme 2: Preparation of 7 - A' A'-di meth ylam ino-4-meth yl -flavyl i um heterocvcle (11
Figure imgf000026_0002
Combining 1 with N-[(3-(anilinomethylene)-2-chloro-l-cyclohexen-l-yl)methylene] aniline 2, malonaldehyde bis(phenylimine), and paraformaldehyde under basic conditions yielded dimethylamino flavylium dyes 3, (Flav7), 4 (Flav5), and 5 (Flav3), respectively. The formation of 3 proceeded in anhydrous ethanol with sodium acetate and 2. Under these conditions, a mixture of highly colored products was obtained which included Flav7 and surprisingly 5 (Flav3) and 6 (Flavl). Treatment of 1 with base in ethanol, without an electrophile, allowed access to a mixture of 6 and 5. This was determined to be an oxygen dependent transformation. It is hypothesized that the oxygen undergoes radical addition to the flavylium to generate a peroxyflavylium which combines with deprotonated 1 to yield Flavl and an equivalent of formaldehyde. The Flav3 can then be formed via the combination of formaldehyde and 1. The syntheses of 4-5 were optimized to proceed in deoxygenated acetic anhydride. The perchlorate counterions in 3-5 were confirmed by X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy.
The absorption, emission, and photostability properties of flavylium dyes 3-6 were measured. As seen in Figure 2 and Table 1, the flavylium dyes span the long wavelength end of the visible, the NIR and enter the SWIR.
Table 1. Photophysical characterization of E 3-6 emission
absorption (PCM) (PCM) QE, eFr
A,max 8 (M 'em A,max . a (M 'em ')
(nm) ')a (nm) Fr
1 510 17 000 587
6 650 16 000 684 0.7% 100
5 746 220 000 766 2.9% 6 600
4 862 240 000 908 5% 10 000
3 1026 236 000 1045 0.53% 1 200
The dimethylamino flavylium dyes are significantly red-shifted from classic cyanine dyes by approximately 200 nm and Flav7 absorbs ~40 nm past IR-27. Photostabilities of the Flav series were measured under continuous-wave irradiation (532 nm, 0.53 fluence). Flavl, Flav3 and Flav5 all show excellent photostabilities in dichloromethane, with Flav7 displaying reasonable stability
(Table 2).
Table 2 Photobleaching rates of 3-6 raw rate, k e at 532 nm relative rate, fcei
(s^ x lO 3) (IVT'cm 1 x 104) (s 1 x 10 3)
6 0.43 ± 0.01 0.23 ± 0.08 4 ± 1
5 1.00 ± 0.06 2.0 ± 0.1 1.00 ± .06
4 2.6 ± 0.2 1.29 ± 0.08 4.0 ± 0.2
3 28. ± 3. 1.4 ± 0.2 40. ± 6.
The Flavl dye absorbs at 650 nm, similar to a 5-cyanine, but has a lower absorption coefficient (s) and Fr, resulting in a low quantum efficiency (QE, defined as eFr), consistent with the short polymethine chain. The Flav3 dye has similar absorption properties to the standard heptamethine indocyanine dye l,r,3,3,3’,3’-hexamethylindotricarbocyanine iodide (FUTCI, Cy7) with max.abs ~745 nm and e ~ 220,000 IVT'cm 1. While HITCI has ~10-fold higher Fr than Flav3 Flav3 is 4-fold more photostable. The Flav5 and Flav7 dyes are more red-shifted than indoline- containing cyanine dyes, absorbing at 862 nm and 1026 nm, respectively. The Flav5 emits at 908 nm, a relatively unique wavelength for polymethine dyes, with extremely high QE (103 IVT'cm 1 ), desirable photostability, and the largest Stoke’ s shift of the series at 46 nm. Finally, the Flav7 is a true NIR-II/SWIR fluorophore with emission at 1061 nm, Fr of 0.53%, and an impressive SWIR QE of 1,200 M^cm 1.
This family of flavylium dyes has photophysical qualities that are complementary to commonly used cyanine dyes. However, the premier dye in the series is the Flav7 (3) as few emissive polymethine dyes exist in this region. Thus, we thoroughly investigated its stability. First, we explored the solvatochromism of Flav7. The .max.abs in dichloromethane, dimethyl sulfoxide, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, acetone exhibited minimal variation. However, in polar solvents, spectral broadening and accentuation of a high-energy shoulder were observed. This behavior is consistent with SWIR polymethine dyes that experience ground state symmetry breaking due to stabilization of an asymmetric electronic structure. In methanol, an immediate color change is observed, suggestive of covalent modification of the polymethine; however, a major decomposition product could not be identified.
Concerned about the structure’s susceptibility to nucleophilic attack, the stability of Flav7 in the presence of methanol, ethanol, and water was investigated. 3 was dissolved in acetonitrile, and 1-50% water, ethanol, or methanol was introduced. Changes in absorption spectra over time were monitored. Consistent with the solvatochromism study, even 1% methanol resulted in the rapid loss of 7max.abs at 1013 nm. In contrast, adding 10% ethanol or water resulted in slight loss and no significant change, respectively, over 4 hours, indicating that Flav7’s reactivity with methanol is unique. Further evidence that 3 is stable to water include UV/Vis monitoring of the dose-dependent addition of water to 3 in acetonitrile followed by water removal. Upon water addition, a loss of max,abs at 1013 nm with concomitant appearance of a peak from 750-850 nm is observed (Figure S9), but absorbance at 1013 nm is restored upon water removal (Figure S10).
Monitoring a solution of 0.1 mg/mL 3 in acetonitrile with 10% water over time by LCMS showed no appreciable degradation. Collectively, these data suggest that Flav7 undergoes aggregation, not covalent modification, in water. Finally, the photo luminescence of Flav7 was compared to the prominent SWIR polymethine dyes, IR-26 and IR-1061. IR-26 has been widely- employed as a standard for this region, while IR-1061 has recently been the active component of nanomaterials for NIR-II in vivo imaging. Despite numerous studies which rely on these dyes, the reported Fr for IR-26 have been inconsistent, and the FG of IR-1061 has yet to be thoroughly characterized. Consequently, to establish that Flav7 is more emissive than existing SWIR polymethine dyes, each dye’s emission was directly compared using a SWIR camera. We prepared solutions of 3, IR-26, and IR-1061 in dichloromethane with identical absorbance at 808 nm, excited with a diffuse 808 nm laser, and imaged their emission over 1000-1500 nm. The average intensity was quantified for each cuvette in the same position within the field of view and clearly indicates that Flav7 is the brightest of the three dyes. These data correlate well with absolute Fr determined using an integrating sphere.
These measurements of IR-26 are consistent with recent reports and contrast the prior accepted value. We conclude that the
Figure imgf000029_0001
of IR-26, IR-1061, and Flav7 are 0.046 ± 0.03% (lpkic = 1129 nm), 0.32 ± 0.04% (Tunax = 1081 nm), and 0.53 ± 0.3% (Tunax = 1045 nm), respectively. These data suggest that Flav7 or commercially available IR-1061 are better comparative sources for SWIR measurements. Furthermore, we deem direct comparative imaging experiments as the most reliable method to evaluate the brightness of fluorophores in the SWIR.
The dimethylamino flavylium dyes are notably red-shifted compared to prevalent cyanine dyes, and expand the opportunities for imaging and detection in the NIR and SWIR. Certain methods for fluorescence imaging of animals are described, for instance, in U.S. Patent No. 7,383,076. Typically, the stability and emission of fluorophores decrease as their absorption moves to lower energies, highlighting the challenge of achieving stable, bright fluorophores, particularly in the SWIR. However, the three NIR polymethine dyes reported display excellent photostabilities with varying quantum yields. Heptamethine Flav7 is 13-times brighter than IR-26, the current SWIR benchmark. We determined that Flav7 is the superior SWIR fluorophore using a comparative imaging experiment and absolute ®F. Polymethine fluorophores have other distinctive properties including narrow absorption and emission bands and the ability to be chemically fine-tuned, which poise them to be a promising fluorophore scaffold for new technologies in these underdeveloped regions of the EM spectrum. However, further improvements beyond these dimethylaminoflavylium dyes are still possible, and are described herein. Modified Heterocyclic SWIR Dyes
The heterocycle composition of polymethine dyes has a significant effect on the photophysical properties of these chromophores. The present disclosure describes polymethine fluorophores that replace the flavylium heterocycle in the dyes described above with other heterocycles, including modified flavylium heterocycles. Alternatively, the dimethylaminoflavylium group may be extended to include other moieties that impart different physicochemical properties, or the amino may be replaced entirely with a more hydrophilic group. The modifications of the dimethylaminoflavylium group described herein are designed to enhance absorption coefficient (e), fluorescence quantum yield (Fr), the singlet oxygen quantum yield
(FD), and/or the absorption and emission wavelengths.
Minimizing degrees of freedom on fluorophores by extending the flavylium heterocycle reduces opportunities for internal conversion, in turn resulting in higher ®F. Strategies to increase the include rigidifying the dimethylamino flavylium, for instance as in the following heterocycles:
Figure imgf000030_0001
In these structures, R may represent alkyl, such as lower alkyl, cycloalkyl, such as lower cycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl. In certain embodiments, R may represent alkyl, such as lower alkyl. Analogous substitutions may be made on the other modified heterocycles disclosed herein.
Those of skill in the art will appreciate that these heterocyclyl moieties, when conjugated to a polymethine, such as a pentamethine or a heptamethine, may be drawn in one of two or more resonance structures, depending on the end of the polymethine to which the moiety is attached as well as the other atoms in the heterocyclyl moieties. This is illustrated for 7 below:
Figure imgf000031_0001
Throughout the present disclosure, when heterocyclyl moieties for conjugation to polymethines are drawn, all resonance structures are contemplated.
Extended aromatic systems may also be used to improve SWIR fluorophore properties, for instance, by resulting in a bathochromic shift. Exemplary heterocycles include carbazolyl, phenanthrolinyl, dibenzofuranyl, acridinyl, phenanthridinyl, xanthenyl, and the following:
Figure imgf000031_0002
Figure imgf000032_0001
In these structures, R may represent alkyl, such as lower alkyl, cycloalkyl, such as lower cycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl. In certain embodiments, R may represent alkyl, such as lower alkyl. Analogous substitutions may be made on the other modified heterocycles disclosed herein.
Alternatively, or in addition, the flavylium oxygen (or the oxygen in the other heterocycles disclosed herein) may be replaced with another heteroatom, which may also be substituted as valence permits:
Figure imgf000032_0002
Figure imgf000033_0001
In these structures, W may represent SO, SO2, PR, PO2H, POR, SeO, Se02, TeO, Te02, SiR62, GeR62, BH, BOH, or BR; Y may represent 0+, S+, Se+, Te+, SiR, GeR, N, NR+, or NO; and R may represent alkyl, such as lower alkyl, cycloalkyl, such as lower cycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl. In certain embodiments, R may represent alkyl, such as lower alkyl. Analogous substitutions may be made on the other modified heterocycles disclosed herein.
For applications in photodynamic therapy the addition of heavy atoms, such as sulfur, promotes intersystem crossing through spin-orbit coupling. Exemplary heterocycles include:
Figure imgf000033_0002
13 14
In these structures, R may represent alkyl, such as lower alkyl, cycloalkyl, such as lower cycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl. In certain embodiments, R may represent alkyl, such as lower alkyl. Both tri-, penta- and heptamethine dyes containing these sulfur-containing heterocycles, as depending on the heterocycle used and on other properties of the dye, the addition of the sulfur can produce a red-shift such that the excited state of the heptamethine has an energy lower than that required for sensitization of oxygen. Polymethine dyes that readily cross to the triplet state, such as these may also be employed in oxygen sensitization.
Alongside achieving bright fluorophores in the SWIR, addressing photostability is a parallel goal. Again, photostability decreases with elongation of the methine chain such that even heptamethine dyes are often significantly less stable than their pentamethine counterparts. Adding electron withdrawing groups, such as sulfate, effectively deactivates the polymethine for reaction with electron poor species. Many electron withdrawing groups, including sulfate, also impart aqueous solubility. In the structures below, the electron-withdrawing group is indicated by RA.
Figure imgf000034_0001
In these structures, W may represent O, SO, SO2, PR, PO2H, POR, SeO, Se02, TeO, Te02, SiR62, GeR6 2, BH, BOH, or BR; Y may represent 0+, S+, Se+, Te+, SiR, GeR, N, NR+, or NO; R may represent alkyl, such as lower alkyl, cycloalkyl, such as lower cycloalkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; and RA may represent an electron-withdrawing group such as haloalkyl, cyano, sulfonate, sulfonatoalkyl, sulfonatoalkyloxy, carboxyl, ester, amide, halo, nitro, alkylammonium, amine oxide, or haloalkyl, such as trifluoromethyl. In certain embodiments, RA may represent sulfonate, sulfonatoalkyl, or sulfonatoalkyloxy, preferably sulfonate or a sulfonatoalkyl such as sulfonatoethyl. In certain embodiments, RA may represent an electron-donating group such as alkoxy, alkyl, or aryl. In certain embodiments, R may represent alkyl or lower alkyl. Analogous substitutions may be made on the other modified heterocycles disclosed herein.
Dimethylamino flavylium cyanine 3 is hydrophobic, which hinders its ability to be employed for in vivo imaging. Thus, the present disclosure provides variants that are hydrophilic and/or fluorophilic.
Hydrophilicity may be imparted to polymethine dyes by incorporating ionic groups such as sulfonates, as described above, or carboxylates. Carboxylates can also facilitate conjugation of biomolecules. Exemplary heterocycles include:
Figure imgf000034_0002
21A 21B
In the above structure, in addition to the values for R described above, any R group may independently be anionic-substituted alkyl, such as sulfonatoethyl. In some embodiments, R may be a nonionic alkyl and R’ may be a carboxylate group, a sulfonate, an anionic-substituted alkyl, or an anionic substituted alkyl ether. R’ may be located at any position on the aryl ring and one or more R’ substituents may be present. Analogous substitutions may be made on the other modified heterocycles disclosed herein.
Fluorophibcity— i.e., the ability to enter the fluorous phase— may be imparted by incorporating a fluorinated alkyl chain into the dye, such as (CH2)3C6Fi3. Such fluorophibc dyes can be used to localize the dyes inside perfluorocarbon nanoemulsions. The fluorous phase, despite requiring a nanomaterial scaffold, has significant advantages for imaging in the SWIR, including the protection of cyanine dyes from biomolecules, increased quantum yields, and increased photostabilities. Exemplary heterocycles include:
Figure imgf000035_0001
22A 22B
In the above structures, in addition to the values for R and R’ described above, R may be a fluorinated alkyl, such as (CH2)3C6Fi3 . In certain embodiments, R may be a fluorinated alkyl or fluorinated alkoxy, such as (CH2)3C6Fi3 or 0(CH2)3C6Fi3 . R’ may be located at any position on the aryl ring and one or more R’ substituents may be present. Analogous substitutions may be made on the other modified heterocycles disclosed herein.
It will be understood from the present disclosure that by appropriate selection or combination of substitutions on and within the heterocycles described herein, one or all of the properties described above may be achieved.
Exemplary Preparation of Modified Heterocyclic SWIR Fluorophores
Synthetic strategies for the heterocycles of the present disclosure are described below, and the performance of exemplary syntheses is described in the Examples section. Heterocycles 1, 7, and 8 may be produced according to a thermally promoted condensation between a 3 -amino phenol derivative and ethyl benzoyl acetate, followed by Grignard addition of methyl magnesium bromide and treatment with HX to promote dehydration and install the counter ion (X) of interest. (Scheme 3 A, route 1). Any suitable counter ion of interest may be used, for example BFF, tetraarylborate, Cl , Br , G, CIOT, OAC , trifluoroacetate, arylacetate, sulfonate, or phosphate. Other 7-amino flavylium heterocycle derivatives may be obtained from the commercial 7-hydroxyflavone which can undergo triflation with trifluoromethane sulfonic anhydride to produce a species reactive towards cross-coupling reactions. The 7-triflate flavone can then undergo Buchwald-Hartwig cross-coupling reactions with a variety of primary and secondary amines and amides (Scheme 3 A, route 2) to produce the 7-amino functionalized flavone. This flavone is similarly reactive towards Grignard conditions to yield the functionalized flavylium heterocycle. Finally, 7-amino functionalized derivatives may be obtained beginning with the commercial 7-amino flavone which can undergo nucleophilic addition reactions or reductive amination reactions to yield the functionalized flavone (Scheme 3A, route 3).
Scheme 3A
Figure imgf000036_0001
Heterocycles 11B, l lC, and 11D may be obtained by Grignard addition of methyl magnesium bromide to the corresponding flavones (Scheme 3B), which are either commercially available or can be obtained from previously reported routes (see, e.g., Foroozesh, M. J. Med. Chem. 2015, 58, 6481-6493.). Scheme 3B
Figure imgf000037_0001
Y = C, N
Heterocycle 11 A may be produced by a 1,4-addition into butynophenone and subsequent internal nucleophilic attack by the phenol oxygen into the pendant carbonyl, followed by dehydration. The route through a Michael reaction, exemplified in Scheme 3C may be achieved by lithiation of the ortho-bromophenol or brominated naphthalene precursors.
Scheme 3C
Figure imgf000037_0002
The dimethylamino thiaflavylium heterocycle 1013 can arise from minor adaptations of the syntheses of the related thiaflavylium, where several routes are available. One option is condensation of the intermediate 1016 with phosphorous chloride and subsequent treatment with perchloric acid. Intermediate 1016 can be achieved thorough 1,4-addition of the dimethylamino benzenethiol into styryl methyl ketone. The sulfone 1014 will be accessed by oxidation of heterocycle 1013 (Scheme 3D).
Scheme 3D
Figure imgf000037_0003
From these heterocycles, all heptamethine dyes will be achieved through the base catalyzed condensation of N[(3 -(anilinomethylene)-2-chloro- 1 -cyclohexen- 1 -yl)methylene] aniline hydrochloride (2) or with A'-[5-(phenylamino)-2,4-pentadien- l -ylidene]- hydrochloride or similar bis-imine or bis-aldehyde equivalents onto the activated methyl group of the heterocycle, as was described above for the synthesis of Flav7 (3). Various pentamethine dyes can be accessed through the base catalyzed condensation of malonaldehyde bis(phenylimine) mono hydrochloride or similar, as was described for the synthesis of Flav5 (4). Trimethine dyes can be accessed through the introduction of a one-carbon electrophile such as formaldehyde, paraformaldehyde, or triethyl orthoformate, as was described for the synthesis of Flav3 (5).
Asymmetric dyes (i.e., dyes containing two different heterocycles) may be prepared from a“half-dye” such as 23, the cyanine half-dye:
Figure imgf000038_0001
23
The half-dye can be prepared by treating the activated flavylium heterocycle with 1 equivalent of bis-imine or aldehyde equivalent (such as N-[(3-(anilinomethylene)-2-chloro-l-cyclohexen-l- yl)methylene] aniline hydrochloride) in basic conditions in an appropriate solvent (see Pisoni, D. S.; Ce, A.; Borges, A.; Petzhold, C. L.; Rodembusch, F. S.; Campo, L. F. J. Org. Chem. 2014,
79, 5511-5520.; Shi, Q. Q.; Sun, R; Ge, J. F.; Xu, Q. F.; Li, N. I; Lu, J. M. Dye. Pigment. 2012, 93, 1506-1511.; Miltsov, S.; Karavan, V.; Goikhman, M.; Podeshvo, L; Gomez-De Pedro, S.; Puyol, M.; Alonso-Chamarro, J. Dye. Pigment. 2014, 109, 34-41.; Rivera, L.; Puyol, M.;
Miltsov, S.; Alonso, J. Anal. Bioanal. Chem. 2007, 387, 2111-2119.) or by treatment of a polymethine dye with bases such as imidazole, dimethylamino pyridine, aniline, carbazole, or l,8-diazabicyclo[5.4.0]undec-7-ene. The“half-dye” can be converted to various asymmetric dyes by treatment with the activated heterocycle of interest in basic conditions (see
W02008015415 A2). Asymmetric polymethine dye comprising the heterocycles disclosed herein, or other suitable heterocycles, may be prepared by these and other suitable methods. For example, the following exemplary asymmetric polymethine dyes may be prepared by the methods disclosed herein:
Figure imgf000039_0001
Other heterocycles of the present disclosure may be prepared by the general synthetic methods shown in Schemes 3E-I:
Scheme 3E
1. Tf20, pyridine
2. Buchwald-hartwig coupling
Pd(0), ligand, base,
Figure imgf000039_0003
Figure imgf000039_0002
Figure imgf000039_0004
4. Aqueous acid
Scheme 3F 1. Tf20, pyridine
2. Buchwald-hartwig coupling
Pd(0), ligand, base,
Figure imgf000039_0005
H
Figure imgf000039_0006
N 'R6
3. MeMgBr, THF
4. Acqueous acid Scheme 3G
1. Tf20, pyridine
2. Buchwald-hartwig coupling
Figure imgf000040_0002
Pd(0), ligand, base,
H
Figure imgf000040_0001
N 'R6
3. MeMgBr, THF
4. Aqueous acid
Scheme 3H
Figure imgf000040_0003
3. Aqueous acid
Scheme 3I
Figure imgf000040_0004
1. Reductive amination
3. PhMgBr, THF
Figure imgf000040_0005
4. Aqueous acid
Figure imgf000040_0006
Definitions
Unless otherwise defined herein, scientific and technical terms used in this application shall have the meanings that are commonly understood by those of ordinary skill in the art. Generally, nomenclature used in connection with, and techniques of, chemistry, cell and tissue culture, molecular biology, cell and cancer biology, neurobiology, neurochemistry, virology, immunology, microbiology, pharmacology, genetics and protein and nucleic acid chemistry, described herein, are those well known and commonly used in the art. The methods and techniques of the present disclosure are generally performed, unless otherwise indicated, according to conventional methods well known in the art and as described in various general and more specific references that are cited and discussed throughout this specification. See, e.g.“Principles of Neural Science”, McGraw-Hill Medical, New York, N.Y. (2000); Motulsky,“Intuitive Biostatistics”, Oxford University Press, Inc. (1995); Lodish et al, “Molecular Cell Biology, 4th ed.”, W. H. Freeman & Co., New York (2000); Griffiths et al., “Introduction to Genetic Analysis, 7th ed.”, W. H. Freeman & Co., N.Y. (1999); and Gilbert et al, “Developmental Biology, 6th ed.”, Sinauer Associates, Inc., Sunderland, MA (2000).
Chemistry terms used herein, unless otherwise defined herein, are used according to conventional usage in the art, as exemplified by“The McGraw-Hill Dictionary of Chemical Terms”, Parker S., Ed., McGraw-Hill, San Francisco, C.A. (1985).
All of the above, and any other publications, patents and published patent applications referred to in this application are specifically incorporated by reference herein. In case of conflict, the present specification, including its specific definitions, will control.
The term“agent” is used herein to denote a chemical compound (such as an organic or inorganic compound, a mixture of chemical compounds), a biological macromolecule (such as a nucleic acid, an antibody, including parts thereof as well as humanized, chimeric and human antibodies and monoclonal antibodies, a protein or portion thereof, e.g., a peptide, a lipid, a carbohydrate), or an extract made from biological materials such as bacteria, plants, fungi, or animal (particularly mammalian) cells or tissues. Agents include, for example, agents whose structure is known, and those whose structure is not known. The ability of such agents to inhibit AR or promote AR degradation may render them suitable as“therapeutic agents” in the methods and compositions of this disclosure.
A“patient,”“subject,” or“individual” are used interchangeably and refer to either a human or a non-human animal. These terms include mammals, such as humans, primates, livestock animals (including bovines, porcines, etc.), companion animals (e.g., canines, felines, etc.) and rodents (e.g., mice and rats).
“Treating” a condition or patient refers to taking steps to obtain beneficial or desired results, including clinical results. As used herein, and as well understood in the art,“treatment” is an approach for obtaining beneficial or desired results, including clinical results. Beneficial or desired clinical results can include, but are not limited to, alleviation or amelioration of one or more symptoms or conditions, diminishment of extent of disease, stabilized (i.e. not worsening) state of disease, preventing spread of disease, delay or slowing of disease progression, amelioration or palliation of the disease state, and remission (whether partial or total), whether detectable or undetectable. “Treatment” can also mean prolonging survival as compared to expected survival if not receiving treatment.
The term“preventing” is art-recognized, and when used in relation to a condition, such as a local recurrence (e.g., pain), a disease such as cancer, a syndrome complex such as heart failure or any other medical condition, is well understood in the art, and includes administration of a composition which reduces the frequency of, or delays the onset of, symptoms of a medical condition in a subject relative to a subject which does not receive the composition. Thus, prevention of cancer includes, for example, reducing the number of detectable cancerous growths in a population of patients receiving a prophylactic treatment relative to an untreated control population, and/or delaying the appearance of detectable cancerous growths in a treated population versus an untreated control population, e.g., by a statistically and/or clinically significant amount.
“Administering” or“administration of’ a substance, a compound or an agent to a subject can be carried out using one of a variety of methods known to those skilled in the art. For example, a compound or an agent can be administered, intravenously, arterially, intradermally, intramuscularly, intraperitoneally, subcutaneously, ocularly, sublingually, orally (by ingestion), intranasally (by inhalation), intraspinally, intracerebrally, and transdermally (by absorption, e.g., through a skin duct). A compound or agent can also appropriately be introduced by rechargeable or biodegradable polymeric devices or other devices, e.g., patches and pumps, or formulations, which provide for the extended, slow or controlled release of the compound or agent. Administering can also be performed, for example, once, a plurality of times, and/or over one or more extended periods.
Appropriate methods of administering a substance, a compound or an agent to a subject will also depend, for example, on the age and/or the physical condition of the subject and the chemical and biological properties of the compound or agent (e.g., solubility, digestibility, bioavailability, stability and toxicity). In some embodiments, a compound or an agent is administered orally, e.g., to a subject by ingestion. In some embodiments, the orally administered compound or agent is in an extended release or slow release formulation, or administered using a device for such slow or extended release. As used herein, the phrase“conjoint administration” refers to any form of administration of two or more different therapeutic agents such that the second agent is administered while the previously administered therapeutic agent is still effective in the body (e.g., the two agents are simultaneously effective in the patient, which may include synergistic effects of the two agents). For example, the different therapeutic compounds can be administered either in the same formulation or in separate formulations, either concomitantly or sequentially. Thus, an individual who receives such treatment can benefit from a combined effect of different therapeutic agents.
A“therapeutically effective amount” or a“therapeutically effective dose” of a drug or agent is an amount of a drug or an agent that, when administered to a subject will have the intended therapeutic effect. The full therapeutic effect does not necessarily occur by administration of one dose, and may occur only after administration of a series of doses. Thus, a therapeutically effective amount may be administered in one or more administrations. The precise effective amount needed for a subject will depend upon, for example, the subject’s size, health and age, and the nature and extent of the condition being treated, such as cancer or MDS. The skilled worker can readily determine the effective amount for a given situation by routine experimentation.
The term“acyl” is art-recognized and refers to a group represented by the general formula hydrocarbylC(O)-, preferably alkylC(O)-.
The term“acylamino” is art-recognized and refers to an amino group substituted with an acyl group and may be represented, for example, by the formula hydroearbylC(0)NH-.
The term“acyloxy” is art-recognized and refers to a group represented by the general formula hydrocarbylC(0)0-, preferably alkylC(0)0-.
The term “alkoxy” refers to an alkyl group having an oxygen attached thereto. Representative alkoxy groups include methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, tert-butoxy and the like.
The term“alkoxyalkyl” refers to an alkyl group substituted with an alkoxy group and may be represented by the general formula alkyl-O-alkyl.
The term“alkyl” refers to saturated aliphatic groups, including straight- chain alkyl groups, branched-chain alkyl groups, cycloalkyl (alicyclic) groups, alkyl-substituted cycloalkyl groups, and cycloalkyl-substituted alkyl groups. In preferred embodiments, a straight chain or branched chain alkyl has 30 or fewer carbon atoms in its backbone (e.g., C i-30 for straight chains, C3-30 for branched chains), and more preferably 20 or fewer. Moreover, the term“alkyl” as used throughout the specification, examples, and claims is intended to include both unsubstituted and substituted alkyl groups, the latter of which refers to alkyl moieties having substituents replacing a hydrogen on one or more carbons of the hydrocarbon backbone, including haloalkyl groups such as trifluoromethyl and 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, etc.
The term“Cx-y” or“Cx-Cy”, when used in conjunction with a chemical moiety, such as, acyl, acyloxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, or alkoxy is meant to include groups that contain from x to y carbons in the chain. Coalkyl indicates a hydrogen where the group is in a terminal position, a bond if internal. A Ci-6alkyl group, for example, contains from one to six carbon atoms in the chain.
The term“alkylamino”, as used herein, refers to an amino group substituted with at least one alkyl group.
The term“alkylthio”, as used herein, refers to a thiol group substituted with an alkyl group and may be represented by the general formula alkylS-.
The term“amide”, as used herein, refers to a group
Figure imgf000044_0001
wherein R9 and R10 each independently represent a hydrogen or hydrocarbyl group, or R9 and R10 taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocycle having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure.
The terms“amine” and“amino” are art-recognized and refer to both unsubstituted and substituted amines and salts thereof, e.g., a moiety that can be represented by
Figure imgf000044_0002
wherein R9, R10, and R10’ each independently represent a hydrogen or a hydrocarbyl group, or R9 and R10 taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocycle having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure.
The term“aminoalkyl”, as used herein, refers to an alkyl group substituted with an amino group.
The term“aralkyl”, as used herein, refers to an alkyl group substituted with an aryl group. The term“aryl” as used herein include substituted or unsubstituted single-ring aromatic groups in which each atom of the ring is carbon. Preferably the ring is a 5- to 7-member ed ring, more preferably a 6-membered ring. The term“aryl” also includes polycyclic ring systems having two or more cyclic rings in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings wherein at least one of the rings is aromatic, e.g., the other cyclic rings can be cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls, heteroaryls, and/or heterocyclyls. Aryl groups include benzene, naphthalene, phenanthrene, phenol, aniline, and the like.
The term“carbamate” is art-recognized and refers to a group
Figure imgf000045_0001
wherein R9 and R10 independently represent hydrogen or a hydrocarbyl group.
The term“carbocyclylalkyl”, as used herein, refers to an alkyl group substituted with a carbocycle group.
The terms“carbocycle”,“carbocyclyl”, and“carbocyclic”, as used herein, refers to a non aromatic saturated or unsaturated ring in which each atom of the ring is carbon. Preferably a carbocycle ring contains from 3 to 10 atoms, more preferably from 5 to 7 atoms.
The term“carbocyclylalkyl”, as used herein, refers to an alkyl group substituted with a carbocycle group.
The term“carbonate” is art-recognized and refers to a group -OCO2-.
The term“carboxy”, as used herein, refers to a group represented by the formula -CO2H.
The term“ester”, as used herein, refers to a group -C(0)0R9 wherein R9 represents a hydrocarbyl group.
The term“ether”, as used herein, refers to a hydrocarbyl group linked through an oxygen to another hydrocarbyl group. Accordingly, an ether substituent of a hydrocarbyl group may be hydrocarbyl-O-. Ethers may be either symmetrical or unsymmetrical. Examples of ethers include, but are not limited to, heterocycle-O-heterocycle and aryl-O-heterocycle. Ethers include “alkoxyalkyl” groups, which may be represented by the general formula alkyl-O-alkyl.
The terms“halo” and“halogen” as used herein means halogen and includes chloro, fluoro, bromo, and iodo. The terms“hetaralkyl” and“heteroaralkyl”, as used herein, refers to an alkyl group substituted with a hetaryl group.
The terms“heteroaryl” and“hetaryl” include substituted or unsubstituted aromatic single ring structures, preferably 5- to 7-membered rings, more preferably 5- to 6-membered rings, whose ring structures include at least one heteroatom, preferably one to four heteroatoms, more preferably one or two heteroatoms. The terms“heteroaryl” and“hetaryl” also include polycyclic ring systems having two or more cyclic rings in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings wherein at least one of the rings is heteroaromatic, e.g., the other cyclic rings can be cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls, heteroaryls, and/or heterocyclyls. Heteroaryl groups include, for example, pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, oxazole, thiazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine, and pyrimidine, and the like.
The term“heteroatom” as used herein means an atom of any element other than carbon or hydrogen. Preferred heteroatoms are nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
The term“heterocyclylalkyl”, as used herein, refers to an alkyl group substituted with a heterocycle group.
The terms “heterocyclyl”, “heterocycle”, and “heterocyclic” refer to substituted or unsubstituted non-aromatic ring structures, preferably 3- to 10-membered rings, more preferably 3- to 7-membered rings, whose ring structures include at least one heteroatom, preferably one to four heteroatoms, more preferably one or two heteroatoms. The terms“heterocyclyl” and “heterocyclic” also include polycyclic ring systems having two or more cyclic rings in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings wherein at least one of the rings is heterocyclic, e.g., the other cyclic rings can be cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls, heteroaryls, and/or heterocyclyls. Heterocyclyl groups include, for example, piperidine, piperazine, pyrrolidine, morpholine, lactones, lactams, and the like.
The term“hydrocarbyl”, as used herein, refers to a group that is bonded through a carbon atom that does not have a =0 or =S substituent, and typically has at least one carbon-hydrogen bond and a primarily carbon backbone, but may optionally include heteroatoms. Thus, groups like methyl, ethoxy ethyl, 2-pyridyl, and even trifluoromethyl are considered to be hydrocarbyl for the purposes of this application, but substituents such as acetyl (which has a =0 substituent on the linking carbon) and ethoxy (which is linked through oxygen, not carbon) are not. Hydrocarbyl groups include, but are not limited to aryl, heteroaryl, carbocycle, heterocycle, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, and combinations thereof.
The term“hydroxyalkyl”, as used herein, refers to an alkyl group substituted with a hydroxy group.
The term“lower” when used in conjunction with a chemical moiety, such as, acyl, acyloxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, or alkoxy is meant to include groups where there are ten or fewer atoms in the substituent, preferably six or fewer. A“lower alkyl”, for example, refers to an alkyl group that contains ten or fewer carbon atoms, preferably six or fewer. In certain embodiments, acyl, acyloxy, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, or alkoxy substituents defined herein are respectively lower acyl, lower acyloxy, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, lower alkynyl, or lower alkoxy, whether they appear alone or in combination with other substituents, such as in the recitations hydroxyalkyl and aralkyl (in which case, for example, the atoms within the aryl group are not counted when counting the carbon atoms in the alkyl substituent).
The terms“polycyclyl”,“polycycle”, and“polycyclic” refer to two or more rings (e.g., cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls, heteroaryls, and/or heterocyclyls) in which two or more atoms are common to two adjoining rings, e.g., the rings are“fused rings”. Each of the rings of the polycycle can be substituted or unsubstituted. In certain embodiments, each ring of the poly cycle contains from 3 to 10 atoms in the ring, preferably from 5 to 7.
The term“sulfate” is art-recognized and refers to the group -OSC H, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
The term“sulfonamide” is art-recognized and refers to the group represented by the general formulae
Figure imgf000047_0001
wherein R9 and R10 independently represents hydrogen or hydrocarbyl.
The term“sulfoxide” is art-recognized and refers to the group-S(O)-.
The term“sulfonate” is art-recognized and refers to the group SC H, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
The term“sulfone” is art-recognized and refers to the group -S(0)2-. The term“substituted” refers to moieties having substituents replacing a hydrogen on one or more carbons of the backbone. It will be understood that“substitution” or“substituted with” includes the implicit proviso that such substitution is in accordance with permitted valence of the substituted atom and the substituent, and that the substitution results in a stable compound, e.g., which does not spontaneously undergo transformation such as by rearrangement, cyclization, elimination, etc. As used herein, the term“substituted” is contemplated to include all permissible substituents of organic compounds. In a broad aspect, the permissible substituents include acyclic and cyclic, branched and unbranched, carbocyclic and heterocyclic, aromatic and non-aromatic substituents of organic compounds. The permissible substituents can be one or more and the same or different for appropriate organic compounds. For purposes of this invention, the heteroatoms such as nitrogen may have hydrogen substituents and/or any permissible substituents of organic compounds described herein which satisfy the valences of the heteroatoms. Substituents can include any substituents described herein, for example, a halogen, a hydroxyl, a carbonyl (such as a carboxyl, an alkoxycarbonyl, a formyl, or an acyl), a thiocarbonyl (such as a thioester, a thioacetate, or a thioformate), an alkoxyl, a phosphoryl, a phosphate, a phosphonate, a phosphinate, an amino, an amido, an amidine, an imine, a cyano, a nitro, an azido, a sulfhydryl, an alkylthio, a sulfate, a sulfonate, a sulfamoyl, a sulfonamido, a sulfonyl, a heterocyclyl, an aralkyl, or an aromatic or heteroaromatic moiety. It will be understood by those skilled in the art that the moieties substituted on the hydrocarbon chain can themselves be substituted, if appropriate.
The term“thioalkyl”, as used herein, refers to an alkyl group substituted with a thiol group.
The term“thioester”, as used herein, refers to a group -C(0)SR9 or -SC(0)R9
wherein R9 represents a hydrocarbyl.
The term“thioether”, as used herein, is equivalent to an ether, wherein the oxygen is replaced with a sulfur.
The term“urea” is art-recognized and may be represented by the general formula
Figure imgf000048_0001
wherein R9 and R10 independently represent hydrogen or a hydrocarbyl.
The term“modulate” as used herein includes the inhibition or suppression of a function or activity (such as cell proliferation) as well as the enhancement of a function or activity. The phrase“pharmaceutically acceptable” is art-recognized. In certain embodiments, the term includes compositions, excipients, adjuvants, polymers and other materials and/or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings and animals without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.
“Pharmaceutically acceptable salt” or“salt” is used herein to refer to an acid addition salt or a basic addition salt which is suitable for or compatible with the treatment of patients.
The term“pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt” as used herein means any non toxic organic or inorganic salt of any base compounds represented by Formula I or Formula II. Illustrative inorganic acids which form suitable salts include hydrochloric, hydrobromic, sulfuric and phosphoric acids, as well as metal salts such as sodium monohydrogen orthophosphate and potassium hydrogen sulfate. Illustrative organic acids that form suitable salts include mono-, di-, and tricarboxylic acids such as glycolic, lactic, pyruvic, malonic, succinic, glutaric, fumaric, malic, tartaric, citric, ascorbic, maleic, benzoic, phenylacetic, cinnamic and salicylic acids, as well as sulfonic acids such as p-toluene sulfonic and methanesulfonic acids. Either the mono or di-acid salts can be formed, and such salts may exist in either a hydrated, solvated or substantially anhydrous form. In general, the acid addition salts of compounds of Formula I or Formula II are more soluble in water and various hydrophilic organic solvents, and generally demonstrate higher melting points in comparison to their free base forms. The selection of the appropriate salt will be known to one skilled in the art. Other non-pharmaceutically acceptable salts, e.g., oxalates, may be used, for example, in the isolation of compounds of Formula I or Formula II for laboratory use, or for subsequent conversion to a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt.
The term“pharmaceutically acceptable basic addition salt” as used herein means any non toxic organic or inorganic base addition salt of any acid compounds represented by Formula I or Formula II or any of their intermediates. Illustrative inorganic bases which form suitable salts include lithium, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, or barium hydroxide. Illustrative organic bases which form suitable salts include aliphatic, alicyclic, or aromatic organic amines such as methylamine, trimethylamine and picoline or ammonia. The selection of the appropriate salt will be known to a person skilled in the art.
Many of the compounds useful in the methods and compositions of this disclosure have at least one stereogenic center in their structure. This stereogenic center may be present in a R or a S configuration, said R and S notation is used in correspondence with the rules described in Pure Appl. Chem. (1976), 45, 11-30. The disclosure contemplates all stereoisomeric forms such as enantiomeric and diastereoisomeric forms of the compounds, salts, prodrugs or mixtures thereof (including all possible mixtures of stereoisomers). See, e.g., WO 01/062726.
Furthermore, certain compounds which contain alkenyl groups may exist as Z (zusammen) or E (entgegen) isomers. In each instance, the disclosure includes both mixture and separate individual isomers.
Some of the compounds may also exist in tautomeric forms. Such forms, although not explicitly indicated in the formulae described herein, are intended to be included within the scope of the present disclosure.
“Prodrug” or “pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug” refers to a compound that is metabolized, for example hydrolyzed or oxidized, in the host after administration to form the compound of the present disclosure (e.g., compounds of Formula I or Formula II). Typical examples of prodrugs include compounds that have biologically labile or cleavable (protecting) groups on a functional moiety of the active compound. Prodrugs include compounds that can be oxidized, reduced, aminated, deaminated, hydroxylated, dehydroxylated, hydrolyzed, dehydrolyzed, alkylated, dealkylated, acylated, deacylated, phosphorylated, or dephosphorylated to produce the active compound. Examples of prodrugs using ester or phosphoramidate as biologically labile or cleavable (protecting) groups are disclosed in U.S. Patents 6,875,751, 7,585,851, and 7,964,580, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference. The prodrugs of this disclosure are metabolized to produce a compound of Formula I or Formula II. The present disclosure includes within its scope, prodrugs of the compounds described herein. Conventional procedures for the selection and preparation of suitable prodrugs are described, for example, in“Design of Prodrugs” Ed. H. Bundgaard, Elsevier, 1985.
The phrase“pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” as used herein means a pharmaceutically acceptable material, composition or vehicle, such as a liquid or solid filter, diluent, excipient, solvent or encapsulating material useful for formulating a drug for medicinal or therapeutic use.
The term“Log of solubility”,“LogS” or“logS” as used herein is used in the art to quantify the aqueous solubility of a compound. The aqueous solubility of a compound significantly affects its absorption and distribution characteristics. A low solubility often goes along with a poor absorption. LogS value is a unit stripped logarithm (base 10) of the solubility measured in mol/liter.
The term“deuterium-containing compound of general formula (I) or (II)” and“tritium- containing compound of general formula (I) or (II)” are defined as a compound of general formula (I) or (II), in which one or more hydrogen atom(s) is/are replaced by one or more deuterium and/or tritium atom(s) and in which the abundance of deuterium or tritium at each deuterated or triterated position of the compound of general formula (I) or (II) is higher than the natural abundance of deuterium, which is about 0.015%, or tritium, which is about 1 x 10 18%. Particularly, in a deuterium-containing or tritium-containing compound of general formula (I) or (II), the abundance of deuterium or tritium at each deuterated or triterated position of the compound of general formula (I) or (II) is higher than 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70% or 80%, preferably higher than 90%, 95%, 96% or 97%, even more preferably higher than 98% or 99% at said position(s). It is understood that the abundance of deuterium or tritium at each deuterated or triterated position is independent of the abundance of deuterium or tritium at other deuterated or triterated position(s).
The selective incorporation of one or more deuterium atom(s) into a compound of general formula (I) or (II) may alter the physicochemical properties (such as for example acidity [C. L. Perrin, et al, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 2007, 129, 4490; A. Streitwieser et al, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1963, 85, 2759;], basicity [C. L. Perrin et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., 2005, 127, 9641; C. L. Perrin, et al, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 2003, 125, 15008; C. L. Perrin in Advances in Physical Organic Chemistry, 44, 144], lipophilicity [B. Testa et al, Int. J. Pharm., 1984, 19(3), 271]), and/or the metabolic profile of the molecule and may result in changes in the ratio of parent compound to metabolites or in the amounts of metabolites formed. Such changes may result in certain therapeutic advantages and hence may be preferred in some circumstances. Reduced rates of metabolism and metabolic switching, where the ratio of metabolites is changed, have been reported (A. E. Mutlib et al, Toxicol. Appl. Pharmacol., 2000, 169, 102; D. J. Kushner et al, Can. J. Physiol. Pharmacol., 1999, 77, 79). These changes in the exposure to parent drug and metabolites can have important consequences with respect to the pharmacodynamics, tolerability and efficacy of a deuterium- containing compound of general formula (I) or (II). In some cases deuterium substitution reduces or eliminates the formation of an undesired or toxic metabolite and enhances the formation of a desired metabolite (e.g., Nevirapine: A. M. Sharma et al., Chem. Res. Toxicol., 2013, 26, 410; Efavirenz: A. E. Mutlib et al., Toxicol. Appl. Pharmacol., 2000, 169, 102). In other cases the major effect of deuteration is to reduce the rate of systemic clearance. As a result, the biological half-life of the compound is increased. The potential clinical benefits would include the ability to maintain similar systemic exposure with decreased peak levels and increased trough levels. This could result in lower side effects and enhanced efficacy, depending on the particular compound’s pharmacokinetic/ pharmacodynamic relationship. ML-337 (C. J. Wenthur et al., J. Med. Chem., 2013, 56, 5208) and Odanacatib (K. Kassahun et al, WO2012/112363) are examples for this deuterium effect. Still other cases have been reported in which reduced rates of metabolism result in an increase in exposure of the drug without changing the rate of systemic clearance (e.g., Rofecoxib: F. Schneider et al., Arzneim. Forsch. / Drug. Res., 2006, 56, 295; Telaprevir: F. Maltais et al, J. Med. Chem., 2009, 52, 7993). Deuterated drugs showing this effect may have reduced dosing requirements (e.g., lower number of doses or lower dosage to achieve the desired effect) and/or may produce lower metabolite loads.
In some embodiments, deuterated or triturated compounds of the disclosure may have other advantageous features, such as an increased quantum yield. This may result from alterations to the available molecular vibrational modes that can reduced coupling between optical and vibrational transitions, thus reducing the rate of intersystem conversion.
A variety of deuterated reagents and synthetic building blocks are commercially available from companies such as for example C/D/N Isotopes, Quebec, Canada; Cambridge Isotope Laboratories Inc., Andover, MA, USA; and CombiPhos Catalysts, Inc., Princeton, NJ, USA. Laboratories Inc., Andover, MA, USA; and CombiPhos Catalysts, Inc., Princeton, NJ, USA. Further information on the state of the art with respect to deuterium-hydrogen exchange is given for example in Hanzlik et al., J. Org. Chem. 55, 3992-3997, 1990; R. P. Hanzlik et al., Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 160, 844, 1989; P. J. Reider et al., J. Org. Chem. 52, 3326-3334, 1987; M. Jarman et al, Carcinogenesis 16(4), 683-688, 1995; J. Atzrodt et al., Angew. Chem., Int. Ed. 2007, 46, 7744; K. Matoishi et al., Chem. Commun. 2000, 1519-1520; K. Kassahun et al., WO2012/112363.
Pharmaceutical Compositions
The compositions and methods of the present invention may be utilized to treat an individual in need thereof. In certain embodiments, the individual is a mammal such as a human, or a non-human mammal. When administered to an animal, such as a human, the composition or the compound is preferably administered as a pharmaceutical composition comprising, for example, a compound of the invention and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers are well known in the art and include, for example, aqueous solutions such as water or physiologically buffered saline or other solvents or vehicles such as glycols, glycerol, oils such as olive oil, or injectable organic esters. In preferred embodiments, when such pharmaceutical compositions are for human administration, particularly for invasive routes of administration (i.e., routes, such as injection or implantation, that circumvent transport or diffusion through an epithelial barrier), the aqueous solution is pyrogen-free, or substantially pyrogen-free. The excipients can be chosen, for example, to effect delayed release of an agent or to selectively target one or more cells, tissues or organs. The pharmaceutical composition can be in dosage unit form such as tablet, capsule (including sprinkle capsule and gelatin capsule), granule, lyophile for reconstitution, powder, solution, syrup, suppository, injection or the like. The composition can also be present in a transdermal delivery system, e.g., a skin patch. The composition can also be present in a solution suitable for topical administration, such as an eye drop.
A pharmaceutically acceptable carrier can contain physiologically acceptable agents that act, for example, to stabilize, increase solubility or to increase the absorption of a compound such as a compound of the invention. Such physiologically acceptable agents include, for example, carbohydrates, such as glucose, sucrose or dextrans, antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid or glutathione, chelating agents, low molecular weight proteins or other stabilizers or excipients. The choice of a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, including a physiologically acceptable agent, depends, for example, on the route of administration of the composition. The preparation or pharmaceutical composition can be a self-emulsifying drug delivery system or a self- microemulsifying drug delivery system. The pharmaceutical composition (preparation) also can be a liposome or other polymer matrix, which can have incorporated therein, for example, a compound of the invention. Liposomes, for example, which comprise phospholipids or other lipids, are nontoxic, physiologically acceptable and metabolizable carriers that are relatively simple to make and administer.
The phrase "pharmaceutically acceptable" is employed herein to refer to those compounds, materials, compositions, and/or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings and animals without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio. The phrase "pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" as used herein means a pharmaceutically acceptable material, composition or vehicle, such as a liquid or solid filler, diluent, excipient, solvent or encapsulating material. Each carrier must be "acceptable" in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and not injurious to the patient. Some examples of materials which can serve as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers include: (1) sugars, such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; (2) starches, such as corn starch and potato starch; (3) cellulose, and its derivatives, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; (4) powdered tragacanth; (5) malt; (6) gelatin; (7) talc; (8) excipients, such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; (9) oils, such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil, safflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil and soybean oil; (10) glycols, such as propylene glycol; (11) polyols, such as glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol and polyethylene glycol; (12) esters, such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; (13) agar; (14) buffering agents, such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum hydroxide; (15) alginic acid; (16) pyrogen- free water; (17) isotonic saline; (18) Ringer's solution; (19) ethyl alcohol; (20) phosphate buffer solutions; and (21) other non-toxic compatible substances employed in pharmaceutical formulations.
A pharmaceutical composition (preparation) can be administered to a subject by any of a number of routes of administration including, for example, orally (for example, drenches as in aqueous or non-aqueous solutions or suspensions, tablets, capsules (including sprinkle capsules and gelatin capsules), boluses, powders, granules, pastes for application to the tongue); absorption through the oral mucosa (e.g., sublingually); anally, rectally or vaginally (for example, as a pessary, cream or foam); parenterally (including intramuscularly, intravenously, subcutaneously or intrathecally as, for example, a sterile solution or suspension); nasally; intraperitoneally; subcutaneously; transdermally (for example as a patch applied to the skin); and topically (for example, as a cream, ointment or spray applied to the skin, or as an eye drop). The compound may also be formulated for inhalation. In certain embodiments, a compound may be simply dissolved or suspended in sterile water. Details of appropriate routes of administration and compositions suitable for same can be found in, for example, U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,110,973, 5,763,493, 5,731,000, 5,541,231, 5,427,798, 5,358,970 and 4,172,896, as well as in patents cited therein.
The formulations may conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and may be prepared by any methods well known in the art of pharmacy. The amount of active ingredient (e.g., dye) which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the host being treated, the particular mode of administration. The amount of active ingredient that can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will generally be that amount of the compound which produces a therapeutic effect. Generally, out of one hundred percent, this amount will range from about 1 percent to about ninety-nine percent of active ingredient, preferably from about 5 percent to about 70 percent, most preferably from about 10 percent to about 30 percent.
Methods of preparing these formulations or compositions include the step of bringing into association an active compound, such as a compound of the invention, with the carrier and, optionally, one or more accessory ingredients. In general, the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association a compound of the present invention with liquid carriers, or finely divided solid carriers, or both, and then, if necessary, shaping the product.
Formulations of the invention suitable for oral administration may be in the form of capsules (including sprinkle capsules and gelatin capsules), cachets, pills, tablets, lozenges (using a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth), lyophile, powders, granules, or as a solution or a suspension in an aqueous or non-aqueous liquid, or as an oil-in-water or water-in-oil liquid emulsion, or as an elixir or syrup, or as pastilles (using an inert base, such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia) and/or as mouth washes and the like, each containing a predetermined amount of a compound of the present invention as an active ingredient. Compositions or compounds may also be administered as a bolus, electuary or paste.
To prepare solid dosage forms for oral administration (capsules (including sprinkle capsules and gelatin capsules), tablets, pills, dragees, powders, granules and the like), the active ingredient is mixed with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate, and/or any of the following: (1) fillers or extenders, such as starches, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, and/or silicic acid; (2) binders, such as, for example, carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, sucrose and/or acacia; (3) humectants, such as glycerol; (4) disintegrating agents, such as agar-agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate; (5) solution retarding agents, such as paraffin; (6) absorption accelerators, such as quaternary ammonium compounds; (7) wetting agents, such as, for example, cetyl alcohol and glycerol monostearate; (8) absorbents, such as kaolin and bentonite clay; (9) lubricants, such a talc, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, solid polyethylene glycols, sodium lauryl sulfate, and mixtures thereof; (10) complexing agents, such as, modified and unmodified cyclodextrins; and (11) coloring agents. In the case of capsules (including sprinkle capsules and gelatin capsules), tablets and pills, the pharmaceutical compositions may also comprise buffering agents. Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-filled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugars, as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like.
A tablet may be made by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients. Compressed tablets may be prepared using binder (for example, gelatin or hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose), lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, disintegrant (for example, sodium starch glycolate or cross-linked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), surface-active or dispersing agent. Molded tablets may be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent.
The tablets, and other solid dosage forms of the pharmaceutical compositions, such as dragees, capsules (including sprinkle capsules and gelatin capsules), pills and granules, may optionally be scored or prepared with coatings and shells, such as enteric coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical-formulating art. They may also be formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient therein using, for example, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose in varying proportions to provide the desired release profile, other polymer matrices, liposomes and/or microspheres. They may be sterilized by, for example, filtration through a bacteria-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions that can be dissolved in sterile water, or some other sterile injectable medium immediately before use. These compositions may also optionally contain opacifying agents and may be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain portion of the gastrointestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions that can be used include polymeric substances and waxes. The active ingredient can also be in micro-encapsulated form, if appropriate, with one or more of the above- described excipients.
Liquid dosage forms useful for oral administration include pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, lyophiles for reconstitution, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs. In addition to the active ingredient, the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art, such as, for example, water or other solvents, cyclodextrins and derivatives thereof, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers, such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3 -butylene glycol, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof.
Besides inert diluents, the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, coloring, perfuming and preservative agents.
Suspensions, in addition to the active compounds, may contain suspending agents as, for example, ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols, polyoxyethylene sorbitol and sorbitan esters, microcrystalline cellulose, aluminum metahydroxide, bentonite, agar-agar and tragacanth, and mixtures thereof.
Formulations of the pharmaceutical compositions for rectal, vaginal, or urethral administration may be presented as a suppository, which may be prepared by mixing one or more active compounds (e.g., dyes) with one or more suitable nonirritating excipients or carriers comprising, for example, cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol, a suppository wax or a salicylate, and which is solid at room temperature, but liquid at body temperature and, therefore, will melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.
Formulations of the pharmaceutical compositions for administration to the mouth may be presented as a mouthwash, or an oral spray, or an oral ointment.
Alternatively or additionally, compositions can be formulated for delivery via a catheter, stent, wire, or other intraluminal device. Delivery via such devices may be especially useful for delivery to the bladder, urethra, ureter, rectum, or intestine.
Formulations which are suitable for vaginal administration also include pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.
Dosage forms for the topical or transdermal administration include powders, sprays, ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, solutions, patches and inhalants. The active compound may be mixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, and with any preservatives, buffers, or propellants that may be required.
The ointments, pastes, creams and gels may contain, in addition to an active compound, excipients, such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof.
Powders and sprays can contain, in addition to an active compound, excipients such as lactose, talc, silicic acid, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicates and polyamide powder, or mixtures of these substances. Sprays can additionally contain customary propellants, such as chlorofluorohydrocarbons and volatile unsubstituted hydrocarbons, such as butane and propane.
Transdermal patches have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of a compound of the present invention to the body. Such dosage forms can be made by dissolving or dispersing the active compound in the proper medium. Absorption enhancers can also be used to increase the flux of the compound across the skin. The rate of such flux can be controlled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or dispersing the compound in a polymer matrix or gel.
Ophthalmic formulations, eye ointments, powders, solutions and the like, are also contemplated as being within the scope of this invention. Exemplary ophthalmic formulations are described in U.S. Publication Nos. 2005/0080056, 2005/0059744, 2005/0031697 and 2005/004074 and U.S. Patent No. 6,583,124, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference. If desired, liquid ophthalmic formulations have properties similar to that of lacrimal fluids, aqueous humor or vitreous humor or are compatible with such fluids. A preferred route of administration is local administration ( e.g ., topical administration, such as eye drops, or administration via an implant).
The phrases "parenteral administration" and "administered parenterally" as used herein means modes of administration other than enteral and topical administration, usually by injection, and includes, without limitation, intravenous, intramuscular, intraarterial, intrathecal, intracapsular, intraorbital, intracardiac, intradermal, intraperitoneal, transtracheal, subcutaneous, subcuticular, intraarticular, subcapsular, subarachnoid, intraspinal and intrasternal injection and infusion. Pharmaceutical compositions suitable for parenteral administration comprise one or more active compounds in combination with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable sterile isotonic aqueous or nonaqueous solutions, dispersions, suspensions or emulsions, or sterile powders which may be reconstituted into sterile injectable solutions or dispersions just prior to use, which may contain antioxidants, buffers, bacteriostats, solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient or suspending or thickening agents. Examples of suitable aqueous and nonaqueous carriers that may be employed in the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention include water, ethanol, polyols (such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof, vegetable oils, such as olive oil, and injectable organic esters, such as ethyl oleate. Proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of coating materials, such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersions, and by the use of surfactants.
These compositions may also contain adjuvants such as preservatives, wetting agents, emulsifying agents and dispersing agents. Prevention of the action of microorganisms may be ensured by the inclusion of various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, paraben, chlorobutanol, phenol sorbic acid, and the like. It may also be desirable to include isotonic agents, such as sugars, sodium chloride, and the like into the compositions. In addition, prolonged absorption of the injectable pharmaceutical form may be brought about by the inclusion of agents that delay absorption such as aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
In some cases, in order to prolong the effect of a drug, it is desirable to slow the absorption of the drug from subcutaneous or intramuscular injection. This may be accomplished by the use of a liquid suspension of crystalline or amorphous material having poor water solubility. The rate of absorption of the drug then depends upon its rate of dissolution, which, in turn, may depend upon crystal size and crystalline form. Alternatively, delayed absorption of a parenterally administered drug form is accomplished by dissolving or suspending the drug in an oil vehicle.
Injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsulated matrices of the subject compounds in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide. Depending on the ratio of drug to polymer, and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of drug release can be controlled. Examples of other biodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly(anhydrides). Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the drug in liposomes or microemulsions that are compatible with body tissue.
For use in the methods of this invention, active compounds can be given per se or as a pharmaceutical composition containing, for example, 0.1 to 99.5% (more preferably, 0.5 to 90%) of active ingredient in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
Methods of introduction may also be provided by rechargeable or biodegradable devices. Various slow release polymeric devices have been developed and tested in vivo in recent years for the controlled delivery of drugs, including proteinaceous biopharmaceuticals. A variety of biocompatible polymers (including hydrogels), including both biodegradable and non-degradable polymers, can be used to form an implant for the sustained release of a compound at a particular target site.
Actual dosage levels of the active ingredients in the pharmaceutical compositions may be varied so as to obtain an amount of the active ingredient that is effective to achieve the desired therapeutic response for a particular patient, composition, and mode of administration, without being toxic to the patient.
The selected dosage level will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity of the particular compound or combination of compounds employed, or the ester, salt or amide thereof, the route of administration, the time of administration, the rate of excretion of the particular compound(s) being employed, the duration of the treatment, other drugs, compounds and/or materials used in combination with the particular compound(s) employed, the age, sex, weight, condition, general health and prior medical history of the patient being treated, and like factors well known in the medical arts.
A physician or veterinarian having ordinary skill in the art can readily determine and prescribe the therapeutically effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition required. For example, the physician or veterinarian could start doses of the pharmaceutical composition or compound at levels lower than that required in order to achieve the desired therapeutic effect and gradually increase the dosage until the desired effect is achieved. By“therapeutically effective amount” is meant the concentration of a compound that is sufficient to elicit the desired therapeutic effect. It is generally understood that the effective amount of the compound will vary according to the weight, sex, age, and medical history of the subject. Other factors which influence the effective amount may include, but are not limited to, the severity of the patient's condition, the disorder being treated, the stability of the compound, and, if desired, another type of therapeutic agent being administered with the compound of the invention. A larger total dose can be delivered by multiple administrations of the agent. Methods to determine efficacy and dosage are known to those skilled in the art (Isselbacher et al. (1996) Harrison’s Principles of Internal Medicine 13 ed., 1814-1882, herein incorporated by reference).
In general, a suitable daily dose of an active compound used in the compositions and methods of the invention will be that amount of the compound that is the lowest dose effective to produce a therapeutic effect. Such an effective dose will generally depend upon the factors described above.
If desired, the effective daily dose of the active compound may be administered as one, two, three, four, five, six or more sub-doses administered separately at appropriate intervals throughout the day, optionally, in unit dosage forms. In certain embodiments of the present invention, the active compound may be administered two or three times daily. In preferred embodiments, the active compound will be administered once daily.
The patient receiving this treatment is any animal in need, including primates, in particular humans; and other mammals such as equines, cattle, swine, sheep, cats, and dogs; poultry; and pets in general.
In certain embodiments, compounds of the invention may be used alone or conjointly administered with another type of therapeutic agent.
The present disclosure includes the use of pharmaceutically acceptable salts of compounds of the invention in the compositions and methods of the present invention. In certain embodiments, contemplated salts of the invention include, but are not limited to, alkyl, dialkyl, trialkyl or tetra- alkyl ammonium salts. In certain embodiments, contemplated salts of the invention include, but are not limited to, L-arginine, benenthamine, benzathine, betaine, calcium hydroxide, choline, deanol, diethanolamine, diethylamine, 2-(diethylamino)ethanol, ethanolamine, ethylenediamine, N-methylglucamine, hydrabamine, lH-imidazole, lithium, L-lysine, magnesium, 4-(2- hydroxyethyljmorpholine, piperazine, potassium, 1 -(2-hydroxy ethyljpyrrolidine, sodium, triethanolamine, tromethamine, and zinc salts. In certain embodiments, contemplated salts of the invention include, but are not limited to, Na, Ca, K, Mg, Zn or other metal salts. In certain embodiments, contemplated salts of the invention include, but are not limited to, 1 -hydroxyl- naphthoic acid, 2,2-dichloroacetic acid, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic acid, 2-oxoglutaric acid, 4- acetamidobenzoic acid, 4-aminosalicylic acid, acetic acid, adipic acid, 1-ascorbic acid, 1-aspartic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, benzoic acid, (+)-camphoric acid, (+)-camphor-10-sulfonic acid, capric acid (decanoic acid), caproic acid (hexanoic acid), caprylic acid (octanoic acid), carbonic acid, cinnamic acid, citric acid, cyclamic acid, dodecylsulfuric acid, ethane- 1,2-disulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, formic acid, fumaric acid, galactaric acid, gentisic acid, d-glucoheptonic acid, d-gluconic acid, d-glucuronic acid, glutamic acid, glutaric acid, glycerophosphoric acid, glycolic acid, hippuric acid, hydrobromic acid, hydrochloric acid, isobutyric acid, lactic acid, lactobionic acid, lauric acid, maleic acid, 1-malic acid, malonic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid , naphthalene- 1, 5 -disulfonic acid, naphthalene-2-sulfonic acid, nicotinic acid, nitric acid, oleic acid, oxalic acid, palmitic acid, pamoic acid, phosphoric acid, proprionic acid, 1-pyroglutamic acid, salicylic acid, sebacic acid, stearic acid, succinic acid, sulfuric acid, 1-tartaric acid, thiocyanic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, trifluoroacetic acid, and undecylenic acid acid salts.
The pharmaceutically acceptable acid-addition salts can also exist as various solvates, such as with water, methanol, ethanol, dimethylformamide, and the like. Mixtures of such solvates can also be prepared. The source of such solvate can be from the solvent of crystallization, inherent in the solvent of preparation or crystallization, or adventitious to such solvent.
Wetting agents, emulsifiers and lubricants, such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate, as well as coloring agents, release agents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring and perfuming agents, preservatives and antioxidants can also be present in the compositions.
Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable antioxidants include: (1) water-soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like; (2) oil-soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), lecithin, propyl gallate, alpha- tocopherol, and the like; and (3) metal-chelating agents, such as citric acid, ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA), sorbitol, tartaric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like.
EXAMPLES
The invention now being generally described, it will be more readily understood by reference to the following examples which are included merely for purposes of illustration of certain aspects and embodiments of the present invention, and are not intended to limit the invention.
Example 1 : Preparation of Exemplary Dimethylaminoflavylium Dyes
7-Dimethylamino flavylium heptamethine dye (3, Flav7)
4-((E)-2-((E)-2-chloro-3-(2-((E)-7-(dimethylamino)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4- ylidene)ethylidene)cyclohex-l-en-l-yl)vinyl)-7-(dimethylamino)-2-phenylchromenylium perchlorate 7-N,N-dimethylamino-4-methyl-flavylium perchlorate (1) (3 E l mg, 0.0855 mmol, 2.1 equiv), N-[(3-(anilinomethylene)-2-chloro-l-cyclohexen-l-yl)methylene]aniline 6 (13.0 mg, 0.040 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and anhydrous sodium acetate (9 mg, 0.1 mmol, 2.5 equiv.) were dissolved in EtOH (0.78 mL, anhydrous) and heated to 90 °C for 6 hours. The solution was cooled to room temperature and evaporated onto silica gel. Dye 3 was purified via silica gel chromatography, eluting with a DCM/MeOH solvent gradient of 200: 1, 150: 1, 100: 1, 80: 1, 67: 1 and 50: 1. This procedure gave pure 3 (11.1 mg, .0145 mmol, 36%). 1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6): d 8.21 (d, J = 10 Hz, 2H), 8.14 - 8.10 (m, 6H), 7.70 - 7.53 (m, 8H), 7.06 (d, J = 15 Hz, 2H), 6.96 (dd, J = 10 Hz, 2.5 Hz, 2H), 6.81 (d, J = 2.5, 2H), 3.14 (s, 12H), 2.87 - 2.81 (m, 4H), 1.91 (t, J = 6.3 Hz, 2H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, DMSO-d6): d 156.9, 155.9, 154.6, 145.0, 144.5, 138.5, 132.0, 131.6, 131.3, 129.6, 126.7, 126.5, 113.9, 113.8, 112.4, 102.3, 97.9, 27.2, 21.3, {peak at 38.9-40.1 beneath DMSO-d6 solvent peak}. HRMS (ESI+): Calculated for C44H40C1N2O2+ [M]+: 663.2773; found: 663.2784. Absorbance (DCM): 522 nm (s = 1.5 ± 0.2 x 104 M 1cm 1), 916 nm (s = 6.3 ± 0.1 x 104 M 1cm 1), 1026 nm (s = 2.4 ± 0.2 x 105 M 1cm 1). Emission (DCM, Ex. 730 nm): 1045 nm, CPF = 0.53 ± 0.03 %.
7-Dimethylamino flavylium pentamethine dye (4, Flav5)
7-(dimethylamino)-4-(( l /i,3/i)-5-((/i)-7-(dimethylamino)-2-phenyl-4//-chromen-4- ylidene)penta- 1 ,3-dien- 1 -yl)-2-phenylchromenylium perchlorate 7-A',A'-dimethylamino-4- methyl-flavylium perchlorate2 (1) (29.8 mg, 0.0819 mmol, 2.1 equiv), malonaldehyde bis(phenylimine) (10.2 mg, 0.0394 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), and anhydrous sodium acetate (9 mg, 0.1 mmol, 2.7 equiv.) were combined in acetic anhydride (0.66 mL). The solution was freeze-pump- thawed three times and subsequently heated at 110 °C for 2.5h. The solution was let cool to room temperature and evaporated onto silica gel. Dye 4 was purified via silica gel chromatography, eluting with a DCM/MeOH solvent gradient of 200: 1, 167: 1, 143: 1, 125: 1, 111 : 1, 100: 1, 67: 1. The procedure yielded pure 4 (13.1 mg, 0.0198 mmol, 50%). XH NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-r 6): d 8.2 (t, J= 12.8 Hz, 2H), 8.11 - 8.03 (m, 4H), 7.98 (d, J= 9.4 Hz, 2H), 7.66 (s, 2H), 7.61 - 7.52 (m, 6H), 7.07 (d, J= 13.2 Hz, 2H), 6.94 - 6.86 (dd, J= 9.2, 1.5 Hz, 2H), 6.82 (t, J= 12.3 Hz, 1H), 6.77 (s, 2H), 3.13 (s, 12H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, DMSO-r/e): d 156.3, 155.4, 154.2, 149.1, 145.7, 131.6, 131.2, 129.1, 126.1, 125.9, 115.3, 113.2, 110.9, 101.6, 97.4, {peak at 38.9-40.1 beneath DMSO- d 6 solvent peak} . HRMS (ESI+): Calculated for C39H35N202 + [M]+: 563.2693; found: 563.2702. Absorbance (DCM): 546 nm (s = 1.4 ± 0.1 x 104 M 1cm 1), 776 nm (s = 4.8 ± 0.4 x 104 M 1cm 1), 862 nm (s = 2.4 ± 0.2 x 105 M^cm 1). Emission (DCM, Ex. 840 nm): 908 nm, CPF = 5 ± 2 %.
7-Dimethylamino flavylium trimethine dye (5, Flav3) 7-(Dimethylamino)-4-((/'/)-3-((//)-7-(dimethylamino)-2-phenyl-4//-chromen-4- ylidene)prop- 1 -en- 1 -yl)-2-phenylchromenylium perchlorate 7-A',A'-dimethylamino-4-methyl- flavylium perchlorate2 (1) (49.8 mg, 0.137 mmol, 1.5 equiv.), paraformaldehyde (2.7 mg, 0.090 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), and anhydrous sodium acetate (15 mg, .18 mmol, 2.0 equiv) were combined in acetic anhydride (1.0 mL). The solution was freeze-pump-thawed three times and heated at 70 °C for 30 m. The solution was cooled to room temperature and evaporated onto silica gel. Dye 5 was purified via silica gel chromatography, eluting with a DCM/EtOH solvent gradient of 200: 1, 167: 1, 143: 1, 125: 1, 111 : 1, 100: 1. The most pure fractions, as determined by UV-Vis/IR spectroscopy were loaded onto a second silica gel column and run as before. The impure fractions from both columns were combined and run on another silica gel column with the same solvent system and gradient. This procedure yielded pure 5 (15.5 mg, .0243 mmol, 27%). ¾ NMR (500 MHz, DMSO- de): 5 8.81 (t, J= 12.9 Hz, 1H), 8.18 - 8.10 (m, 4H), 7.99 (s, 2H), 7.89 (d, = 9.6 Hz, 2H), 7.67 - 7.57 (m, 6H), 7.16 (d, J = 13.0 Hz, 2H), 6.91 (dd, J = 9.3, 2.5 Hz, 2H), 6.72 (d, J = 2.5 Hz, 2H), 3.12 (s, 12H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, DMSO-r/e) d 156.7, 155.4, 154.2, 147.2, 145.5, 131.6, 131.1, 129.0, 126.4, 125.5, 115.9, 113.2, 110.6, 102.0, 97.1, {peak at 38.9-40.1 beneath DMSO-de solvent peak} . HRMS (ESI+): Calculated for C37H33N202 + [M]+: 537.2537; found: 537.2525. Absorbance (DCM): 530 nm (s = 2.0 ± 0.1 x lO^ 1), 682 nm (s = 3.9 ± 0.2 x lO^ 1), 746 (s = 2.2 ± 0.1 x 105 M 1cm 1). Emission (DCM, Ex. 675 nm): 766 nm, CPF = 2.9 ± 0.5 %.
7-Dimethylamino flavylium monomethine dye (6, Flavl)
(A)-7-(Dimethylamino)-4-((7-(dimethylamino)-2-phenyl-4//-chromen-4-ylidene)methyl)- 2-phenylchromenylium 2,2,2-trifluoroacetate (6) 7-A',A'-dimethylamino-4-methyl-flavylium perchlorate2 (1) (49.7 mg, .137 mmol, 1 equiv.) and anhydrous sodium acetate (25 mg, 0.31 mmol, 2.2 equiv) were dissolved in 10 mL EtOH and refluxed at 90 °C under air for 3.3 h. The mixture was cooled to rt and evaporated onto silica gel. Dye 6 was purified via silica gel chromatography and reverse-phase HPLC. Via silica gel chromatography, dye 6 was eluted with a DCM/MeOH solvent gradient of 400: 1, 200: 1, 167: 1, 143: 1, 125: 1, 111 : 1, 67: 1, and 33: 1. The most pure fractions were further purified in aliquots by HPLC in a water/MeCN with 0.1% TFA solvent mixture. The method used is as follows: 70:30 for 2 m, gradient to 30:70 over 60 m, gradient to 5:90 over 20 m, followed by a hold for 5 m and subsequent re-equilibration to 70:30 for 10 m. The procedure yielded pure 6 (9.5 mg, 0.016, 11%). ¾ NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-r 6): d 8.40 (d, J = 10.5 Hz, 2H), 8.17 (dd, J= 8.0, 1.7 Hz, 4H), 7.98 (s, 2H), 7.66 - 7.59 (m, 6H), 7.47 (s, 1H), 7.10 (dd, J= 9.4, 2.6 Hz, 2H), 6.99 (d, J= 2.6 Hz, 2H), 3.21 (s, 12H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, DMSO-r/e) d 158.96, 158.63, 158.39, 158.15, 157.90, 156.31, 155.19, 150.61, 132.60, 131.54, 129.76, 127.63, 126.97, 121.43, 119.03, 116.64, 115.01, 114.06, 112.09, 105.40, 103.64, 97.71 {peak at 38.9-40.1 beneath DMSO-de solvent peak} . 19F NMR (282 MHz, DMSO- e) d -73.16. HRMS (ESI+): Calculated for C3sH3iN202+ [M]+: 511.2380; found: 511.2366. Absorbance (DCM): 324 nm (s = 3. ± 1. x 103 M 1cm 1), 484 nm (s = 3. ± 1. x 103 M 1cm 1), 514 nm (s = 4. ± 1. x 103 M 1cm 1), 650 nm (s = 1.6 ± 0.5 x 104M 1cm 1). Emission (DCM, Ex. 610 nm): 684 nm, F = 0.7 ± 0.5 %.
Example 2: Spectra of Dimethylaminoflavylium Dyes
The absorbance spectra in Figure 2 and Figures 4A-4G were obtained in DCM on a JASCO V-770 UV-Visible/NIR spectrophotometer with a 2000 nm/min or 4000 nm/mm scan rate. Plotted are the baseline corrected and normalized data. The emission spectra in Figure 2 were taken in DCM on either a Horiba Instruments PIT QuantaMaster Series fluorometer (6), a Fluoromax-3 spectrofluorometer (1, 3 - 5), or home-built InGaAs array detector (Princeton Instruments). For 6 the following parameters were used: ex. 610 nm, emission collected from 620 - 900 nm, slits 5nm, step size 1 nm, integration time 1 s. Plotted is the DCM corrected, baseline corrected, normalized data. For 1, and 3 - 5, the following parameters were used: slits 5 nm, step size 1 nm, integration time, 0.25 s. Excitation values and emission collection were as follows: 1 (ex. 460, collection 470 - 800 nm), 5 (ex. 675 nm, collection 685 - 950 nm), 4 (ex. 840 nm, emission 850 - 1100 nm), 3 (ex. 730 nm, emission 950 -1400). Plotted are the baseline corrected, normalized data. The emission spectra in Figures 4 A-4G were taken in dichloromethane on a Horiba Instruments RΉ QuantaMaster Series fluorometer with excitation slits: 15 nm, emission slits: 30 nm, step size: 1 nm, integration time: 0.1 s and excitation wavelengths as indicated.
For Figures 3A and 3B, Flav 7 3, IR-26, and IR-1061 were diluted in DCM until matching absorbance was achieved at 808 nm. Spatially dispersed 808nm illumination was used to image lml samples in 2.5 mL cuvettes of the SWIR dyes alongside a DCM blank. Each dye was compared at the same position to ensure consistent camera illumination. SWIR images were collected on an InGaAs camera (Princeton Instruments, NIRvana 640) with a lOOOnm long-pass filter. The camera was cooled to -80 °C, the analog to digital (AD) conversion rate set to 2 MHz, the gain set to high, and different exposure times used to achieve sufficient signal and/or frame rates. All images were background- and blemish-corrected within the LightField imaging software. All analysis was performed using Image J and Matlab (Math works). Bar graph intensities were taken as the average camera intensity for 10 frames, background corrected to the DCM blank, with the error corresponding to standard deviation.
Symmetric polymethine dyes may be prepared from their respective heterocycles, for example, by the procedure of Schemes 4-5 (Angew. Chemie Int. Ed. 2017, 56, 13126-13129; Chem. Eur. J. 2017, 23, 9306-9312; ChemPhysChem. 2010, 11, 130-138).
Scheme 4
Figure imgf000066_0001
Example 3 : Additional Exemplary Preparations of Dimethylaminoflavylium Dyes
Figure imgf000066_0002
7-(Dimethylamino)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one (S2a): 3-(dimethylamino)phenol (500 mg, 3.64 mmol, 1 equiv.) and ethyl benzoylacetate (1.10 mL, 6.37 mmol, 1.75 equiv.) were combined in a 10 mL flask and heated at 180 °C for 24 h. The solution was cooled to room temperature, evaporated onto silica gel and purified via column chromatography with a 50: 1 to 1 :4, followed by a second column in 6: 1 to 1 : 1 hexanes/EtOAc gradient. The procedure gave a beige solid (493 mg, 1.86 mmol, 51%). Rf = 0.4 in 1 : 1 hexanes/EtOAc Ή NMR (500 MHz, Chloroform- ) d 8.01 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.91 - 7.84 (m, 2H), 7.54 - 7.44 (m, 3H), 6.73 (dd, J = 9.0, 2.4 Hz, 1H), 6.67 (s, 1H), 6.55 (d, J = 2.4 Hz, 1H), 3.07 (s, 6H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, Chloroform-d) d 177.9, 162.3, 158.4, 154.2, 132.3, 131.1, 129.0, 126.6, 126.1, 113.7, 110.9, 107.3, 97.2, 40.3. HRMS (ESI+) calcd for Ci7Hi6N02 + [M+H]+: 266.1176; found: 266.1178. Absorbance (CH2CI2): 229, 274, 358 nm.
Figure imgf000067_0001
7-(Dimethylamino)-4-methyl-2-phenylchromenylium tetrafluoroborate (12a):
7-(dimethylamino)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one (S2a) (769 mg, 2.90 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was dissolved in THF (25 mL) in a 100 mL flame dried 3-neck flask and cooled to 0 °C. Dropwise addition of methylmagnesium bromide (1.0 M in THF, 4.35 mL, 1.5 equiv.) was followed by stirring at room temperature overnight under a N2 atmosphere. The resulting solution was quenched with several drops of fluoroboric acid (50%, aqueous), extracted into DCM with the addition of 5% HBF4, dried with Na2S04, filtered, and evaporated. The crude product was purified by trituration in EtOAc to yield a dark red solid (740 mg, 2.11 mmol, 73%). 1H NMR (500 MHz, Acetone- d6) d 8.42 - 8.35 (m, 2H), 8.29 (d, J= 9.6 Hz, 1H), 8.18 (s, 1H), 7.82 - 7.76 (m, 1H), 7.75 - 7.66 (m, 2H), 7.60 (dd, J= 9.6, 2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.40 (d, J= 2.5 Hz, 1H), 3.48 (s, 6H), 3.04 - 2.94 (m, 3H) {peak at 3.04 - 2.94 appears as a multiplet and as < 3H due to proton-deuterium exchange with Acetone-d6}. 13C NMR (126 MHz, Acetone-d6) d 166.2, 165.2, 159.9, 159.1, 135.1, 130.7, 130.6, 129.7, 128.7, 119.2, 119.0, 113.0, 97.1, 41.3, 20.0. 19F NMR (376 MHz, DMSO-d6) d -148.0. HRMS (ESI+) calcd for C18H18NO+ [M]+: 264.1383; found: 264.1379. Absorbance (CH2C12): 238, 294, 338, 510 nm. Emission (CH2C12, ex. 500 nm): 589 nm.
Figure imgf000068_0001
( 4-((E)-2-((E)-2-chloro-3-(2-((E)-7-(dimethylamino)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4 - ylidene)ethylidene)cyclohex-l-en-l-yl)vinyl)-7-(dimethylamino)-2-phenylchromenylium tetrafluoroborate) (1, Flav7)
7-(dimethylamino)-4-methyl-2-phenylchromenylium tetrafluoroborate (12a) (131 mg, 0.374 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), N-[(3-(anilinomethylene)-2-chloro-l-cyclohexen-l-yl)methylene]aniline hydrochloride (64.5 mg, 0.180 mmol, 0.48 equiv.), and sodium acetate (90.0 mg, 1.10 mmol, 2.9 equiv.) were dissolved in n-butanol (2.1 mL) and toluene (0.9 mL) in a flame dried Schleck flask under N2 atmosphere. The solution was freeze-pumped-thawed x3 and heated to 100 °C for 15 min. The crude mixture was evaporated, loaded onto silica gel, and purified by column chromatography, with a gradient of dichloromethane plus 0.5 to 10% ethanol. The procedure yielded a dark purple solid (68.2 mg, 0.0909 mmol, 51%). Rf = 0.5 in 9: 1 DCM/EtOH. 1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) d 8.23 (d, J = 13.6 Hz, 2H), 8.22 - 8.11 (m, 6H), 7.69 (s, 2H), 7.63 - 7.54 (m, 6H), 7.11 (d, J = 13.8 Hz, 2H), 7.01 (dd, J = 9.3, 2.4 Hz, 2H), 6.87 (d, J = 2.6 Hz, 2H), 3.17 (s, 12H), 2.94 - 2.79 (m, 4H), 1.88 (p, J = 6.5 Hz, 2H). 19F NMR (376 MHz, DMSO-d6) d -148.0. HRMS (ESI+) calcd for C44H40C1N2O2+ [M]+: 663.2773; found: 663.2764.
Absorbance (CH2C12): 522, 916, 1027 nm. Emission (CH2C12, ex. 885 nm): 1053 nm.
Figure imgf000068_0002
7-(Azetidin-l-yl)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one (S2d)
7-(trifluoromethanesulfonate)-2-phenyl-7//-chromen-4-one (5) (58.5 mg, 0.158 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), RuPhos-Pd-G3 (12.8 mg, 0.0153 mmol, 0.1 equiv), RuPhos (7.2 mg, 0.015 mmol, 0.1 equiv.), and cesium carbonate (72.6 mg, 0.223 mmol, 1.4 equiv,) were added to a 15 mL flame- dried 2-neck flask, dissolved in THF (0.80 mL), and stirred at 50 °C under N2 atmosphere for 5.5 h. Azetidine (0.034 mL, 0.50 mmol, 2.8 equiv.) was added by two 0.017 mL portions, initially and after 2.5 h. The reaction mixture was extracted with dichloromethane/water, dried with MgSCL, filtered, and evaporated. The crude product was purified with a 10: 1 to 2: 1 hexanes/EtOAc solvent gradient to yield a yellow solid (26.7 mg, 0.100 mmol, 63%). Rf = 0.5 in 1 : 1 hexanes/EtOAc. ¾ NMR (500 MHz, Chloroform-d) d 8.03 (d, J = 8.7 Hz, 1H), 7.94 - 7.87 (m, 2H), 7.50 (m, 3H), 6.76 (s, 1H), 6.46 (dd, J= 8.7, 2.2 Hz, 1H), 6.32 (d, J= 2.2 Hz, 1H), 4.06 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 4H), 2.48 (p, = 7.3 Hz, 2H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, Chloroform-d) d 177.9, 162.4, 158.5, 155.3, 132.3, 131.3, 129.1, 126.9, 126.3, 114.3, 109.9, 107.3, 96.0, 51.8, 16.6. HRMS (ESI+) calcd for Ci8Hi6N02 + [M+H]+: 278.1176; found: 278.1175. Absorbance (CH2CI2): 227, 272, 307, 355 nm.
Figure imgf000069_0001
7-(Azetidin-l-yl)-4-methyl-2-phenylchromenylium tetrafluoroborate) ( 12d)
7-(azetidin- 1 -yl)-2-phenyl-4//-chromen-4-one (S2d) (25 mg, 0.089 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was dissolved in THF (1.4 mL) in a flame-dried 15 mL 2-neck flask and cooled to 0 °C. Methylmagnesium bromide (1.0 M in THF/toluene, 0.238 mL, 2.8 equiv.) was added dropwise and the resulting solution was let warm to rt and stirred overnight under an atmosphere of N2. The reaction was quenched with a few drops of fluoroboric acid (5%, aqueous), and with additional water, extracted with dichloromethane, dried with MgSCL, filtered, and evaporated. The crude product was purified by trituration in EtOAc and filtration to yield a red solid (13 mg, 0.036 mmol, 39%). ¾ NMR (400 MHz, Acetone-*) d 8.40 - 8.30 (m, 2H), 8.24 (d, J = 9.3 Hz, 1H), 8.08 (s, 1H), 7.81 - 7.64 (m, 3H), 7.14 (dd, J= 9.3, 2.2 Hz, 1H), 6.94 (d, J= 2.2 Hz, 1H), 4.65 - 4.42 (m, 4H), 2.95 (s, 3H), 2.64 (p, J= 7.7 Hz, 2H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, Acetonitrile-*) d 165.4, 164.1, 159.8, 158.0, 134.9, 130.71, 130.70, 129.8, 128.4, 119.2, 117.4, 112.5, 94.4, 53.1, 52.9, 20.1, 16.6. HRMS (ESI+) calcd for CurHisNCE [M]+: 276.1383; found: 276.1376. Absorbance (CH2CI2): 242, 293, 336, 511 nm. Emission (CH2CI2, ex. 500 nm): 590 nm.
Figure imgf000070_0001
7-Azetidine flavylium heptamethine tetrafluoroborate
7-(azetidin-l-yl)-4-((E)-2-((E)-3-(2-((E)-7-(azetidin-l-yl)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4- ylidene)ethylidene)-2-chlorocyclohex- 1 -en- 1 -yl)vinyl)-2-phenylchromenylium tetrafluoroborate (4): 7-(azetidin-l-yl)-4-methyl-2-phenylchromenylium tetrafluoroborate) (12d) (12 mg, 0.034 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), N-[(3-(anilinomethylene)-2-chloro-l-cyclohexen-l-yl)methylene]aniline hydrochloride (5.8 mg, 0.016 mmol, 0.47 equiv.), and sodium acetate (9.3 mg, 0.11 mmol, 3.3 equiv.) were added to a flame dried 1 mL vial and dissolved in n-butanol (0.2 mL) and toluene (0.09 mL) under an N2 atmosphere. The reaction mixture was freeze-pump-thawed x3, and heated to 100 °C for 10 min. The crude mixture was evaporated onto silica gel and purified via column chromatography with a gradient of dicholoromethane plus 0.5-6% ethanol, followed by chromatography with dichloromethane plus 1-2% ethanol. The procedure yielded an iridescent maroon solid (4.6 mg, 0.0059 mmol, 37%). Rf = 0.5 in 9: 1 DCM/EtOH. 1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) d 8.16 - 8.01 (m, 8H), 7.67 - 7.54 (m, 8H), 7.03 (d, J = 13.8 Hz, 2H), 6.59 (dd, J = 8.9, 2.3 Hz, 2H), 6.47 (d, J = 2.2 Hz, 2H), 4.10 (t, J = 7.5 Hz, 8H), 2.80 (t, J = 5.5 Hz, 4H), 2.43 (p, J = 7.2 Hz, 4H), 1.88 (p, J = 6.5 Hz, 2H). HRMS (ESI+) calcd for C46H40C1N2O2+ [M]+: 687.2773; found: 687.2757. Absorbance (CH2C12): 523 nm, 920 nm, 1029 nm. Emission (CH2C12, ex. 885 nm): 1056 nm.
Figure imgf000070_0002
11 -Phenyl-2, 3, 6, 7-tetrahydro-lH, 5H, 9H-pyrano[ 2, 3-J]pyrido[ 3, 2, l-ij]quinolin-9-one (S2c) :
8-hydroxyjulolidine (749 mg, 3.96 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and ethyl benzoyl acetate (1.20 mL, 6.93 mmol, 1.75 equiv.) were combined in a flame-dried 20 mL vial and heated at 180 °C for 48 h. The crude mixture was evaporated onto silica gel and purified by column chromatography with a 9: 1 to 4: 1 hexanes/EtOAc gradient, followed by chromatography with a 6: 1 to 1 :2 with 1% ethanol gradient. A beige solid (687 mg, 2.16 mmol, 55%) resulted. Rf = 0.5 in 1 : 1 hexanes/EtOAc. ¾ NMR (500 MHz, Chloroform-d) d 7.75 (dd, J= 6.7, 3.0 Hz, 2H), 7.52 (s, 1H), 7.46 - 7.25 (m, 3H), 6.57 (s, 1H), 3.17 (dt, J= 7.9, 5.5 Hz, 4H), 2.86 (t, J= 6.5 Hz, 2H), 2.69 (t, J= 6.3 Hz, 2H), 1.95 (p, J = 6.3 Hz, 2H), 1.86 (p, J = 6.2 Hz, 2H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, Chloroform-d) d 177.6, 161.0, 153.6, 147.0, 132.4, 130.7, 128.7, 125.6, 122.1, 120.1, 112.7, 106.5, 105.5, 49.8, 49.3, 27.5, 21.3, 20.50, 20.48. HRMS (ESH) calcd for C2iH2oN02 + [M+H]+: 318.1489; found: 318.1495. Absorbance (CH2CI2): 283, 381 nm.
Figure imgf000071_0001
9-Methyl- 11 -phenyl-2, 3, 6, 7-tetrahydro-lH, 5H-pyrano[ 2, 3-J]pyrido[ 3, 2, l-ij]quinolin-12-ium tetrafluorob orate (12c)
1 1 -phenyl-2,3,6,7-tetrahydro- 1 //,5//,9//-pyrano[2,3:/]pyrido[3,2, l -//]quinolin-9-one (S2c) (149 mg, 0.469 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was dissolved in THF (3.5 mL) in a 10 mL flame dried flask under N2 atmosphere. The solution was cooled to 0 °C and methylmagnesium bromide (1.1 M in THF, 1.12 mL, 2.5 equiv.) was added dropwise. The reaction was warmed to rt and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was quenched with several drops of fluoroboric acid (5%, aqueous), extracted with dichloromethane after adding more 5% HBF4, quickly washed with brine, dried with NaiSCh, filtered, and evaporated. The crude product was purified by trituration and filtration from cold EtOAc, yielding a dark purple solid (140 mg, 0.347 mmol, 74%). ¾ NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-r/e) d 8.26 - 8.21 (m, 2H), 8.04 (s, 1H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 7.74 - 7.66 (m, 3H), 3.59 (t, J= 5.9 Hz, 4H), 3.04 (t, J= 6.4 Hz, 2H), 2.93 (t, J= 6.2 Hz, 2H), 2.78 (s, 3H), 2.04 - 1.93 (m, 4H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, DMSO-de) d 161.9, 159.7, 152.9, 152.2, 133.4, 129.9, 129.7, 128.5, 127.1, 124.1, 1 17.7, 111.0, 104.3, 50.6, 50.0, 27.2, 19.8, 19.2, 19.1 , 18.8. HRMS (ESI+) calcd for C22H22NCE [M]+: 316.1696; found: 316.1694. Absorbance (CH2CI2): 250, 301 , 341 , 533 nm. Emission (CH2CI2, ex. 530 nm): 617 nm.
Figure imgf000072_0001
9-( (E)-2-( fl)-2-chloro-3-((E)-2-( 11 -phenyl-2, 3, 6, 7-tetrahydro-lH, 5H, 9H-pyrano[ 2, 3- j]pyrido[ 3, 2, 1-ij/quinolin- -ylidene)elhylidene)cyclohex- I-en-I-yl) vinyl)- 11 -phenyl-2, 3, 6, 7- tetrahydro-lH, 5H-pyra.no [2, 3-J]pyrido [3, 2, l-ij]quinolin-12-ium tetrafluoroborate (3, JuloFlav7) 9-methyl-l 1 -phenyl-2, 3,6, 7-tetrahydro-li7,5i7-pyrano[2,3-/]pyrido[3, 2,1 -zj]quinolin-12- ium tetrafluoroborate (12c) (40.1 mg, 0.0995 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), A'-[(3-(anilinomethylene)-2- chloro-l-cyclohexen-l-yl)methylene]aniline hydrochloride (17.5 mg, 0.0487 mmol, 0.49 equiv.) and sodium acetate (12.4 mg, 0.151 mmol, 1.5 equiv.) were added to an oven-dried 20 mL vial, dissolved in ethanol (1 mL), freeze-pump-thawed x3, and heated at 70 °C for 2 h. The crude product was dry loaded onto silica gel, and purified by column chromatography with a 9: 1 dicholoromethane/acetone solvent mixture. The product was collected as a dark purple solid (15.4 mg, 0.018 mmol, 37%). Rr= 0.5 in 9: 1 DCM/EtOH. ¾ NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-r/e) d 8.21 - 8.03 (m, 6H), 7.75 (s, 2H), 7.66 - 7.58 (m, 6H), 7.55 (s, 2H), 7.01 (d, J = 13.9 Hz, 2H), 3.43 - 3.36 (m, 8H), 2.89 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, 4H), 2.83 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 4H), 2.79 (t, J = 6.3 Hz, 4H), 2.01 - 1.94 (m, 4H), 1.91 (m, 6H). HRMS (ESI+) calculated for C52H48C1N202 + [M]+: 767.3399, found: 767.3386. Absorbance (CH2Ch): 527, 949, 1061 nm. Emission (CH2C12, ex. 885 nm): 1088 nm.
Figure imgf000072_0002
ij]quinolin-9-ylidene)penta-l, 3-dien-l-yl)-2, 3, 6, 7-tetrahydro-lH, 5H-pyra.no [ 2, 3-J]pyrido[ 3, 2, 1- ijjquinolin-l 2-ium tetrafluoroborate:
9-methyl-l 1 -phenyl-2, 3,6, 7-tetrahydro-li7,5i7-pyrano[2,3-/|pyrido[3, 2,1 -/j]quinolin-12- ium tetrafluoroborate (12c): (150 mg, 0.372 mmol, 1.00 equiv.), malonaldehyde bis(phenylimine) monohydrochloride (47.2 mg, 0.182 mmol, 0.490 equiv.) and sodium acetate (92.6 mg, 1.13 mmol, 3.03 equiv.) were added to a 25 mL Schlenk tube under a N2 atmosphere. Acetic anhydride (4.0 mL) was added and the solution was freeze-pump-thawed x3 before heating to 100 °C for 60 min. The reaction was cooled, ~10 mL of toluene was added, and the product was collected by vacuum filtration. The product was rinsed with toluene until filtrate runs clear, followed by a water rinse. The product was further purified by column chromatography, after dry-loading onto silica, in a three-way gradient of 1 : 1 toluene/dichloromethane plus 1% ethanol to 0: 1 toluene/dichloromethane plus 20% ethanol. An iridescent red solid resulted (97.9 mg, 0.130 mmol, 71%). ¾ NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-de) d 8.11 (d, J = 13.0 Hz, 2H), 8.07 - 7.96 (m, 4H), 7.63 - 7.53 (m, 10H), 7.00 (d, J= 13.4 Hz, 2H), 6.82 - 6.70 (m, 1H), 3.45 - 3.31 (m, 8H), 2.86 (t, J= 6.4 Hz, 4H), 2.72 (t, J = 6.3 Hz, 4H), 2.01 - 1.90 (m, 4H), 1.87 (d, J = 6.2 Hz, 4H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, DMSO-r/e) d 154.9, 150.4, 147.6, 144.2, 131.5, 131.2, 129.1, 125.6, 122.6, 121.6, 114.5, 110.4, 105.5, 100.9, 49.6, 49.0, 27.1, 20.5, 19.8, 19.6. MS (ESI+): calculated for C47H43N202 + [M]+:667.3, found: 667.3. Absorbance (CH2Q2): 588 nm (e = 1.6 ± 0.1 x 104M 1cm 1), 806 nm (e = 5.1 ± 0.3 x 104 M 1cm 1), 897 nm (e = 2.5 ± 0.1 x 105 M 1cm 1). Emission (CH2C12, ex. 755 nm): 925 nm.
Figure imgf000073_0001
7- V,V-diethylamino-flavone (7-(diethylamino)-2-phenyl-4//-chromen-4-one): 3-diethylamino phenol (150.6 mg, 0.911 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and ethyl benzoyl acetate (0.314 mL, 1.81 mmol, 2.0 equiv.) were added to a flame-dried 1 dram vial and heated to 100 °C for 5h, followed by 180 °C for 15 h. The crude mixture was evaporated onto silica gel and purified by column
chromatography in a 9: 1, 6: 1, and 3: 1 hexanes:ethyl acetate gradient. The product was collected as a beige solid (135.8 mg, 0.463 mmol, 51%). ¾ NMR (500 MHz, Chloroform-<i) d 7.96 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.87 - 7.80 (m, 2H), 7.46 - 7.39 (m, 3H), 6.66 (dd, J= 9.1, 2.5 Hz, 1H), 6.62 (s, 1H), 6.49 (d, J= 2.5 Hz, 1H), 3.38 (q, J= 7.1 Hz, 4H), 1.18 (t, J= 7.1 Hz, 6H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, Chloroform-d) d 177.53, 161.94, 158.68, 151.92, 132.21, 130.91, 128.79, 126.64, 125.92, 113.06, 110.43, 107.11, 96.33, 44.67, 12.46. MS (ESI+): calculated for Ci9H2oN02 + [M+H]+: 294.2; found: 293.8. Absorbance (CH2Ch): 233 nm, 275 nm, 365 nm. (See U.S. Patent No. 5,919,950, which is fully incorporated by reference herein.)
Figure imgf000074_0001
7-(Diethylamino)-4-methyl-2-phenylchromenylium tetrafluoroborate (12b)
7-(diethylamino)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one (S2b) (100 mg, 0.342 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was dissolved in THF (3.3 mL) in a flame-dried 20 mL vial in an N2 atmosphere. The solution was cooled to 0 °C and methylmagnesium bromide (1.0 M in THF, 0.821 mL, 2.4 equiv.) was added dropwise. The reaction was warmed to room temperature and stirred for 26 h. The reaction mixture was quenched with fluoroboric acid (5%, aqueous, -1.5 mL), extracted with dichloromethane/water, dried with Na2S04, filtered, and evaporated. The crude product was purified by trituration in EtOAc to yield a dark red solid (104 mg, 0.275 mmol, 81%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, Acetone-d6) d 8.40 - 8.34 (m, 2H), 8.28 (d, J = 9.6 Hz, 1H), 8.13 (s, 1H), 7.81 - 7.66 (m, 3H), 7.64 - 7.57 (m, 1H), 7.43 (d, J = 2.6 Hz, 1H), 3.86 (q, J = 7.1 Hz, 4H), 2.98 (s, 3H), 1.38 (t, J = 7.1 Hz, 6H).13C NMR (126 MHz, Acetone-d6) d 165.8, 164.6, 160.1, 157.4, 134.9, 130.6, 130.6, 130.03, 128.7, 119.2, 119.0, 112.7, 96.8, 46.8, 19.9, 12.8. HRMS (ESI+) calcd for C20H22NO+ [M]+: 292.1696; found: 292.1689. Absorbance (CH2C12): 239, 295, 338, 514 nm. Emission (CH2C12, ex. 500 nm): 592 nm. . (See U.S. Patent No. 5,231,190, which is fully incorporated by reference herein.)
Figure imgf000074_0002
(4-((E)-2-((E)-2-chloro-3-(2-((E)-7-(diethylamino)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4- ylidene)ethylidene)cyclohex-l-en-l-yl)vinyl)-7-(diethylamino)-2-phenylchromenylium
tetrafluoroborate) (2)
7-(Diethylamino)-4-methyl-2-phenylchromenylium tetrafluoroborate (12b) (10.6 mg, 0.0280 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), A'-[(3-(anilinomethylene)-2-chloro- l -cyclohexen- 1 - yl)methylene]aniline hydrochloride (4.5 mg, 0.013 mmol, 0.45 equiv.), and sodium acetate (6.9 mg, 0.084 mmol, 3.0 equiv.) were added to a flame-dried 1 mL vial and dissolved in «-butanol (0.17 mL) and toluene (0.08 mL). The mixture was freeze-pump-thawed x3 and heated to 100 °C for 10 min. The crude product was purified by column chromatography in a gradient of dichloromethane with 0.5 to 6% ethanol to yield a purple solid (4.0 mg, 0.0054 mmol, 40%). Rf = 0.5 in 9: 1 DCM/EtOH. ¾ NMR (500 MHz, Acetonitrile-*) d 8.04 (d, J= 13.8 Hz, 2H), 7.86 (d, J= 7.5 Hz, 4H), 7.62 (dd, J= 9.8, 3.7 Hz, 2H), 7.58 - 7.50 (m, 6H), 7.18 (d, J= 3.6 Hz, 2H), 6.70 (d, J= 13.8, 2H), 6.62 (dd, J= 9.2, 2.9 Hz, 2H), 6.40 (m, 2H), 3.38 (q, J= 6.6 Hz, 8H), 2.74 (t, J = 6.0 Hz, 4H), {peak at 2.0-1.9 ppm, beneath CD3CN solvent peak, (m, 2H)}, 1.18 (t, J= 6.9 Hz, 12H). HRMS (ESI+) calcd for C48H48C1N202+ [M]+: 719.3399, found: 719.3385. Absorbance (CH2CI2): 526, 922, 1033 nm. Emission (CH2CI2, ex. 885 nm): 1057 nm.
Figure imgf000075_0001
7-(d=Diphenylamino)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one (S2g)
7-(trifluoromethanesulfonate)-2-phenyl-7//-chromen-4-one (5) (151 mg, 0.407 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), RuPhos (18.8 mg, 0.0403 mmol, 0.1 equiv.), RuPhos-Pd-G3 (33.7 mg, 0.0403 mmol, 0.1 equiv.), cesium carbonate (200 mg, 0.164 mmol, 1.5 equiv.) and diphenylamine (103 mg, 0.609 mmol, 0.1 equiv.) were added to a flame-dried 2-dram vial under a N2 atmosphere and dissolved in THF (1.4 mL). The solution was heated at 50 °C for 21 h. The crude mixture was purified by column chromatography with a 20: 1, 15: 1, 10: 1, and 8: 1 hexanes/EtOAc gradient to yield a light- yellow solid (126 mg, 0.324 mmol, 80%). Rf = 0.7 in 1 : 1 hexanes/EtOAc. ¾ NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-* d 8.01 (d, J= 8.9 Hz, 1H), 7.85 (dd, J= 7.7, 1.9 Hz, 2H), 7.51 - 7.42 (m, 3H), 7.40 - 7.34 (m, 4H), 7.24 - 7.17 (m, 6H), 7.01 (dd, J= 8.8, 2.3 Hz, 1H), 6.97 (d, J= 2.2 Hz, 1H), 6.74 (s, 1H). 13C NMR (151 MHz, Chloroform-* d 177.7, 162.8, 157.8, 153.1, 146.2, 132.0, 131.4, 129.9, 129.0, 126.5, 126.4, 126.2, 125.3, 118.1, 117.5, 107.6, 106.5. HRMS (ESI+) calcd for C27H2ON02 + [M+H]+: 390.1489, found: 390.1490. Absorbance (CH2CI2): 228, 285, 371 nm.
Figure imgf000076_0001
7-(Diphenylamino)-4-methyl-2-phenylchromenylium tetrafluoroborate ( 12g)
7-(diphenylamino)-2-phenyl-4i7-chromen-4-one (S2g) (63.2 mg, 0.162 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was added to a flame-dried 15 mL under a N2 atmosphere, dissolved in THF (1.5 mL), and cooled to 0 °C. Methylmagnesium bromide (1.0 M in THF, 0.500 mL, 3.1 equiv.) was added dropwise, and the solution was warmed to rt and stirred for 14 h. The solution was quenched with fluoroboric acid (50%, aqueous, 5 drops), and with the addition of 50% fluoroboric acid, extracted with dichloromethane, dried with Na2SC>4, filtered, and evaporated. The crude product was purified by trituration in a mixture of diethyl ether and toluene, filtered, and dried to yield a dark purple solid (54.8 mg, 0.115 mmol, 71%). ' H NMR (600 MHz, Chlorofornw/) d 8.24 (dt, J= 7.3, 1.3 Hz, 2H), 8.19 (s, 1H), 8.06 (d, J= 9.5 Hz, 1H), 7.69 - 7.64 (m, 1H), 7.59 (td, J= 8.0, 7.4, 1.8 Hz, 2H), 7.52 (ddt, J= 8.2, 5.7, 1.8 Hz, 4H), 7.42 (td, J= 7.3, 1.2 Hz, 2H), 7.36 - 7.30 (m, 5H), 7.05 (d, J= 2.3 Hz, 1H), 3.02 (s, 3H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, Chloroform-^ d 168.0, 167.5, 158.6, 157.6, 143.4, 135.2, 130.8, 130.0, 129.0, 128.9, 128.8, 128.4, 127.2, 121.7, 1 19.8, 114.7, 101.5, 20.5. HRMS (ESH) calcd for C28H22NCC [M]+: 388.1696, found: 388.1690. IR (film): 2929, 1634, 1566, 1490, 1386, 1277, 1057 cm 1. Absorbance (CH2CI2): 234, 248, 288, 350, 529 nm.
Figure imgf000076_0002
4-((E)-2-((E)-2-chloro-3-(2-((E)-7-(diphenylamino)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4- ylidene)ethylidene)cyclohex-l-en-l-yl)vinyl)-7-(diphenylamino)-2-phenylchromenylium tetrafluoroborate (7):
7-(Diphenylamino)-4-methyl-2-phenylchromenylium tetrafluoroborate (12g) (23.9 mg, 0.0503 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), /V-[(3-(anilinomethylene)-2-chloro-l-cyclohexen-l- yl)methylene]aniline hydrochloride (8.0 mg, 0.22 mmol, 0.44 equiv.) and 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4- methyl pyridine (30.8 mg, 0.150 mmol, 3.0 equiv.) were dissolved in 1,4-dioxane (0.800 mL), freeze-pump-thawed x3, and heated to 100 °C for 15 min. The crude product was purified by column chromatography with a gradient of 60:40 DCM/toluene plus 0.2% EtOH to DCM plus 0.6% EtOH, producing a copper colored solid (5.6 mg 0.0056 mmol, 11%). Rf = 0.3 in 9: 1 DCM/EtOH. Ή NMR (500 MHz, Methylene Chloride-i 2) d 8.41 (d, J= 13.7 Hz, 2H), 8.02 - 7.94 (m, 4H), 7.90 (d, J= 9.2 Hz, 2H), 7.61 - 7.52 (m, 8H), 7.48 - 7.42 (m, 8H), 7.38 - 7.19 (m, 12H), 7.09 (dd, J= 9.2, 2.5 Hz, 2H), 7.03 (d, J= 13.8 Hz, 2H), 6.95 (d, J= 2.4 Hz, 2H), 2.82 (t, J= 6.3 Hz, 4H), 2.00 (p, J= 6.4 Hz, 2H). HRMS (ESI+) Calculated for C64H 8C1N02 + [M]+: 911.3399; found: 911.3379. Absorbance (CH2CI2): 526 nm, 936 nm, 1047 nm Emission (CH2CI2, ex. 885 nm): 1078 nm.
Figure imgf000077_0001
a-naptho-4-methyl flavylium tetrafluoroborate (4-methyl-2-phenylbenzo[/?]chromen- 1 -ium tetrafluoroborate): a-napthoflavone (2-phenyl-4//-benzo[/?]chromen-4-one) (201.4 mg, 0.740 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was added to a flame-dried 50 mL 2 neck flask and dissolved in THF (7 mL) under a N2 atmosphere and cooled to 0 °C. Methylmagesium bromide (1.15 M, 1.6 mL, 2.5 equiv.) was added dropwise, the solution was warmed to room temperature and it was stirred overnight. The reaction was quenched with 4 mL of 5% HBF4 and the resulting filtrate was filtered and rinsed with ethyl acetate to yield a lime green solid (242.9 mg, 0.678 mmol, 92%). ¾ NMR (600 MHz, Acetomtrile-i/3) d 9.10 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 1H), 8.72 (s, 1H), 8.63 - 8.55 (m, 2H), 8.34 (d, = 9.0 Hz, 1H), 8.28 (d, = 8.1 Hz, 1H), 8.23 (d, = 9.0 Hz, 1H), 8.14 - 8.09 (m, 1H), 8.05 (ddd, J = 8.3, 7.0, 1.2 Hz, 1H), 7.94 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 1H), 7.84 (t, J= 7.9 Hz, 2H), 3.20 (s, 3H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, Acetomtrile-i/3) d 172.62, 171.15, 156.75, 138.38, 137.47, 134.72, 132.14, 131.37, 130.78, 130.57, 130.19, 129.88, 125.31, 124.71, 123.65, 121.44, 120.41, 22.16. MS (ESI+): calculated for C20H15CL [M]+: 271.1, found: 270.6. Absorbance (CH3CN): 210 nm, 230 nm, 314 nm, 379 nm, 429 nm. Emission (CH3CN, ex. 425 nm): 530 nm.
Figure imgf000078_0001
a-naptho-flavylium heptamethine tetrafluorob orate
(4-((/'/)-2-((/'/)-2-chloro-3-((/'/)-2-(2-phenyl-4//-benzo[/?]chromen-4- ylidene)ethy lidene)cyclohex- 1 -en- 1 -yl)vinyl)-2-phenylbenzo [h\ chromen- 1 -ium
tetrafluoroborate): a-naptho-4-methyl flavylium tetrafluoroborate (40.1 mg, 0.112 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), A'-[(3-(anilinomethylene)-2-chloro- l - cyclohexen-l-yl)methylene]aniline hydrochloride (19.6 mg, 0.055 mmol, 0.49 equiv.), and 2,6-di-/er/-butyl-4-methylpyridine (60.9 mg, 0.297 mg, 2.7 equiv.) were added to a flame-dried 25 mL Schlenk flask under N2 atmosphere. «-Butanol (0.76 mL) and toluene (.30 mL) were added and the solution was freeze-pump-thawed x3. The reaction was heated to 105 °C for 15 min. The crude mixture was evaporated directly onto silica gel and purified by column chromatography with dichloromethane and 0.2 to 10% ethanol, followed by chromatography with dichloromethane and 1 to 5% ethanol. The product was isolated as a brown solid (4.1 mg, 0.005 mmol, 10%). NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-r/e) d 8.81 - 6.64 (m, 28H), 3.00 - 2.80 (m, 4H), 2.02 - 1.87 (m, 2H). MS (ESI+): calculated for C48H34CICL [M]+: 677.2, found: 676.8. Absorbance (CH2CI2): 436 nm, 519 nm, 891nm, 998 nm. Emission (CH2CI2, ex. 890 nm): 1024 nm.
Figure imgf000078_0002
f)-naptho-4-methyl-fJavylium tetrafluoroborate
(l-methyl-3-phenylbenzo[/]chromen-4-ium tetrafluoroborate): b-napthoflavone (3- phenyl-lif-benzo[/]chromen-l-one) (52.5 mg, 0.192 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was dissolved in THF (1.8 mL) in a 15 mL 2 neck flask under N2 atmosphere and cooled to 0 °C. Methylmagnesium bromide (1.15 M, 0.40 mL, 2.4 equiv.) was added dropwise and the solution was warmed to rt and stirred overnight. The reaction was quenched with 2 mL 5% aqueous HBL4 and the resulting filtrate was filtered rinsed with ethyl acetate to yield a bright yellow solid (23.2 mg, 0,065 mmol, 34%). ¾ NMR (600 MHz, Acetonitrile-*) d 9.03 (d, = 8.6 Hz, 1H), 8.79 (d, = 9.1 Hz, 1H), 8.70 (s, 1H), 8.58 - 8.49 (m, 2H), 8.35 (dd, J = 7.9, 1.4 Hz, 1H), 8.27 (d, J = 9.1 Hz, 1H), 8.09 (ddd, J = 8.6, 7.0, 1.5 Hz, 1H), 8.01 (td, J= 7.5, 7.0, 1.0 Hz, 1H), 7.93 - 7.86 (m, 1H), 7.80 (t, J= 7.9 Hz, 2H), 3.54 (s, 3H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, Acetonitrile-*) d 172.38, 169.17, 160.59, 144.47, 137.23, 133.49, 132.13, 132.00, 131.23, 130.73, 130.23, 129.35, 129.26, 129.01, 124.58, 121.92, 118.81, 29.03. MS (ESI+): calculated for C2oHi50+ [M]+: 271.1, found: 270.8. Absorbance (CftCN): 211 nm, 240 nm, 298 nm, 433 nm. Emission (CH3CN, ex. 400 nm): 507 nm.
Figure imgf000079_0001
b-naptho-flavylium heptamethine tetrafluoroborate
(l-((E)-2-((E)-2-chloro-3-((E)-2-(3-phenyl-li7-benzo[/]chromen-l- ylidene)ethy lidene)cyclohex- 1 -en- 1 -yl)vinyl)-3 -phenylbenzo [/] chromen-4-ium
tetrafluoroborate): P-naptho-4-methyl-flavylium tetrafluoroborate (11.99 mg, 0.033 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), /V-[(3-(anilinomethylene)-2-chloro- 1 - cyclohexen-l-yl)methylene]aniline hydrochloride (5.71 mg, 0.016 mmol, 0.47 equiv.), and 2,6-di-/er/-butyl-4-methylpyridine (15.07 mg, 0.073 mmol, 2.19 equiv.) were added to a flame-dried 25 ml Schlenk flask under a N2 atmosphere. The solution was freeze-pump-thawed x3 and heated to 100 °C for 30 min. The crude mixture was purified by column chromatography in dichloromethane with a 0.5 to 0.7% ethanol gradient to yield a brown solid (1.8 mg, 0.003 mmol, 17%). MS (ESI+): calculated for C48H34CICE [M]+: 677.2, found: 676.8. Absorption (CH2CI2): 1014 nm. Emission (CH2CI2, ex. 880 nm): 1055 nm.
Example 4: Evaluation of Dyes
Polymethine dyes disclosed herein are characterized with respect to their photophysics including absorption, emission, extinction coefficient, quantum yields, and fluorescence lifetime. All quantum yields values obtained are absolute quantum yields values measured using an integrating sphere. Photostabilities are evaluated by sample irradiation with high powered LEDs. Additionally, solvatochromism, solvent compatibility, and stability are assessed. Example 5: Further Exemplary Preparation of Dimethylaminoflavylium Dyes
Figure imgf000080_0001
4-Oxo-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-5-yl trifluoromethanesulfonate (la)
Triflic anhydride (0.14 mL, 0.8 mmol, 4 eq) was added slowly dropwise to a solution of 5- hydroxyflavone (50 mg, 0.2 mmol, 1 eq) in anhydrous pyridine (1.0 mL, 12 mmol, 60 eq) at 0 °C. The reaction was warmed to room temperature and left to stir for 1 hr. The solution was quenched with saturated NaHCC (5 mL), extracted with ethyl acetate (3 x 10 mL), dried over NaSCL, filtered and evaporated to give a yellow crystalline solid. The crude product was purified via silica gel chromatography with hexane: ethyl acetate (9: 1 - 8:2) to afford pure 4~oxo-2-plienyl~4H- chromen-5-yl trifluoromethanesulfonate (60 mg, 0.2 mmol, 79%) as a beige solid. ' H-NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) d 7.93 - 7.87 (m, 2H), 7.76 - 7.70 (m, 1H), 7.65 (dd, J = 8.6, 1.2 Hz, 1H), 7.58 - 7.51 (m, 3H), 7.23 (s, 1H), 6.81 (s, 1H).
5-(Dimethylamino)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one (2a)
A vial containing la (30 mg, 0.1 mmol, 1 eq), RuPhos-Pd-G3 (7 mg, 0.01 mmol, 0.1 eq), RuPhos (4 rng, 0.01 mmol, 0.1 eq) and cesium carbonate (40 rng, 0.1 mmol, 1.5 eq) was put on a high vac and subsequently purged with nitrogen for three cycles. Anhydrous toluene (0.75 mL) was added to solubilize all solids and then dimethylamine (0.06 mL, 0.1 mmol, 1.5 eq) was added. Solution was heated to 1 10 °C, turning the solution from a cloudy brown to clear orange-yellow. After 15 hours of stirring, the solution was concentrated down to give an orange red solid. The crude product was purified via silica gel chromatography with hexanes: ethyl acetate (98:2 -> 95:5 -> 90: 10 -> 85: 15) to afford pure 5-(dimethylamino)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one (9 mg, 0.03 mmol, 34%) as a yeilow/green solid. 1H-NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform -J) d 7.90 (dd, J = 6.8, 3.1 Hz, 2H), 7.53 - 7.43 (m, 4H), 7.03 - 6.97 (m, 1H), 6.82 (d, J= 8.3 Hz, 1H), 6.69 (s, 1H), 2.96 (s, 6H).
5-(Dimethylamino)-4-methyl-2-phenylchromenylium (3a)
5-(dimethylamino)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one 5 (50 mg, 0.2 mmol, 1 eq) was dissolved in anhydrous THF (2.21 mL) and cooled to 0° C. MeMgBr (1.0 M in THF, 0.33 mL, 0.4 mmol, 2 eq) was added dropwise over 30 min turning the solution from yellow to orange brown. Reaction was warmed to room temperature and left to stir overnight. Reaction was quenched with 5% fluoroboric acid solution, turning the solution purple, then extracted with dichloromethane (3 x 5 mL), dried over NaSCL, filtered and evaporated to afford pure 3a as a purple solid (70 mg, 0.2 mmol, 98% ) 1H-NMR (300 MHz, Chloroform-d) d 8.45 - 8.36 (m, 3H), 8.02 (t, J = 8.3 Hz, 1H), 7.81 - 7.65 (m, 3H), 7.59 - 7.37 (m, 2H), 3.32 (s, 3H), 3.07 (s, 6H).
5-Flav7
To a Schlenk flask was added 3a (25 mg, 0.1 mmol, 1 eq), 2,6-diterbutyl-4-methylpyridine (40 mg, 0.20 mmol, 3 eq), linker 4 (10 mg, 0.03 mmol, 0.4 eq) and n-butanol:toluene (0.2 mL: 0.8 mL). The dark magenta solution was freeze pump thawed 3x and then heated to 100 °C for 10 min. Upon completion of the reaction by UV-Vis, the solution was cooled to r.t. Excess toluene (10 mL) was added on ice and solid precipitate was removed via vacuum filtration. The crude filtrate was purified via silica gel chromatography with dichloromethane: ethanol (99.5: 0.5 -> 99.25: 0.75 -> 99: 1 ->99.75: 1.25) to afford pure 5-Flav7 as a dark green-brown soild.
4-Oxo-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-6-yl trifluoromethanesulfonate (lb)
Triflic anhydride (0.25 mL, 4.4 mmol, 4 eq) was added slowly dropwise to a solution of 6- hydroxyflavone (150 mg, 1.0 mmol, 1 eq) in anhydrous pyridine (3.0 mL, 36 mmol, 60 eq) at 0 °C. The reaction was warmed to room temperature and left to stir for 1 hr. The solution was quenched with saturated NaHCC (5 mL), extracted with ethyl acetate (3 x 10 mL), dried over NaSCL, filtered and evaporated to give an orange solid. The crude product was purified via silica gel chromatography with hexane: ethyl acetate (9: 1 -> 8:2) to afford pure 4-oxo-2-phenyl-4H- chromen-6-yl tnfluoromethanesuifonate as a wiiite fluffy solid (130 mg, 0.4 mmol, 33%). 'H-NMR (300 MHz, Chloroform-if) d 8.15 (d, J = 2.9 Hz, 1H), 7.95 (dd, J = 7.6, 2.0 Hz, 2H), 7.78 - 7.49 (m, 5H), 6.89 (s, 1H).
6-(Dimethylamino)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one (2b)
A vial containing lb (100 mg, 0.3 mmol, 1 eq), RuPhos-Pd-G3 (23 mg, 0.03 mmol, 0.1 eq), RuPhos (13 mg, 0.03 mmol, 0.1 eq) and cesium carbonate (88 mg, 0.4 mmol, 1.5 eq) was put on a high vac and subsequently purged with nitrogen for three cycles. Anhydrous toluene (2.5 mL) was added to solubilize all solids and then dimethylamine (0.2 mL, 0.4 mmol, 1.5 eq) was added. Solution was heated to 110 °C, turning the solution a deeper orange color After 15 hours of stirring, the solution was concentrated down to give an orange yellow solid. The crude product was purified via silica gel chromatography with hexanes: ethyl acetate (95:5 -> 90: 10) to afford pure 6- (dimethylamino)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one as a yellow/green solid (230 mg, 0.4 mmol, 33%). ‘H-NMR (300 MHz, Chloroform-d) d 7.96 (ddd, J = 7.0, 3.2, 1.3 Hz, 2H), 7.59 - 7.48 (m, 4H), 7.41 (d, J= 3.2 Hz, 1H), 7.26 - 7.19 (m, 1H), 6.84 (d, J= 1.3 Hz, 1H), 3.09 (d, J= 1.2 Hz, 6H).
6-(Dimethylamino)-4-methyl-2-phenylchromenylium (3b)
6-(dimethylamino)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one 2a (50 mg, 0.35 mmol, 1 eq) was dissolved in anhydrous THF (4.1 mL)and cooled to 0 °C. MeMgBr (1.0 M in THF, 0.7 mL, 0.7 mmol, 2 eq) was added dropwise over 30 min turning the solution from yellow to orange brown. Reaction was warmed to room temperature and left to stir overnight. Reaction was quenched with 5% fluoroboric acid solution, turning the solution blue-purple, then extracted with dichloromethane (3 x 5 mL), dried over NaSCL, filtered and evaporated to afford pure 3b as a blue- purple solid (70 mg, 0.2 mmol, 60%).‘H-NMR (300 MHz, Chloroform-r/) d 8.67 (s, 1H), 8.45 (d, J = 7.5 Hz, 2H), 8.11 (d, J = 9.7 Hz, 1H), 7.82 - 7.66 (m, 4H), 6.99 (s, 1H), 3.28 (d, J = 1.2 Hz, 6H), 3.18 (s, 3H).
6-Flav7
To a Schlenk flask was added 3a (26 mg, 0.07 mmol, 1 eq), 2,6-diterbutyl-4- methylpyridine (43 mg, 0.2 mmol, 3 eq), 4 (11 mg, 0.03 mmol, 0.4 eq) and n-butanol: toluene (0.2 mL: 0.8 mL). The dark purple solution was freeze pump thawed 3x and then heated to 100 °C for 10 min. Upon completion of the reaction by UV-Vis, the solution was cooled to r.t. Excess toluene (10 mL) was added on ice and solid precipitate was collected via vacuum filtration and washed with toluene. The crude product was purified via silica gel chromatography with dichloromethane: ethanol (99.25: 0.75 -> 99: 1 -> 98.75: 1.25 ->98.5: 1.5) to afford pure 6-Flav7 as a dark purple- black solid.
8-Bromo-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one (lc)
3’-bromo-2’-hydroxylacetophenone (150 mg, 0.7 mmol, 1 eq) was dissolved in anhydrous THF (1.4 mL) to give a pale yellow solution. LiHMDS (1M in THF, 2.8 mL, 2.8 mmol, 4 eq) was added slowly at -78 °C, turning the solution brown. The reaction was left to warm up slowly for two hours then cooled back down to -78 °C. Benzoyl chloride (0.08 mL, 0.7 mmol, 1 eq) was added and reaction was left stirring at -78 °C for Ihr. Reaction was quenched with 2M HC1 (2 mL), then extracted into dichloromethane (3 x 10 mL), dried over NaSCL, filtered and evaporated to give a yellow solid. The solid was dissolved in a solution of cone. H2SO4 and AcOH (1.4 mL: 1.4 mL) and heated to reflux. After ten minutes, reaction was cooled to r.t and water was added. Beige solid 8-bromo-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one (180 mg, 0.3 mmol, 40%) was collected via vacuum filtration. 1H-NMR (300 MHz, Acetonitrile-d3) d 8.12 (ddd, J = 8.0, 5.6, 1.7 Hz, 4H), 8.04 (td, J = 7.8, 1.6 Hz, 2H), 7.63 (dd, J = 5.6, 1.9 Hz, 3H), 7.39 (t, J = 7.9 Hz, 1H), 6.92 (s, 1H).
8-(Dimethylamino)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one (2c)
A vial containing 8-bromo-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one lc (100 mg, 0.3 mmol, 1 eq), SPhos-Pd-G3 (23 mg, 0.03 mmol, 0.1 eq), SPhos (13 mg, 0.03 mmol, 0.1 eq) and cesium carbonate (160 mg, 0.5 mmol, 1.5 eq) was put on a high vac and subsequently purged with nitrogen for three cycles. Anhydrous toluene (3.0 mL) was added to solubilize ail solids and then dimethyiamine (0.25 mL, 0 5 mmol, 1.5 eq) was added. Solution was heated to 1 10 °C, turning the solution a cloudy brown/orange color. After 24 hours of stirring, the solution was concentrated down to give an orange yellow solid. The crude product was purified via silica gel chromatography with hexanes: ethyl acetate (90: 10) to afford pure 8-(dimethylamino)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one as a yellow solid (27 mg, 0.4 mmol, 33%). 'H-NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) d 8.02 - 7.96 (m, 1H), 7.82 (dd, J = 7.9, 1.6 Hz, 1H), 7.60 - 7.48 (m, 3H), 7.32 (t, J = 7.9 Hz, 1H), 7.25 - 7.22 (m, 1H), 7.20 - 7.14 (m, 1H), 6.85 (s, 1H), 3.01 (s, 6H).
8-(Dimethylamino)-4-methyl-2-phenylchromenylium (3c) 8-(dimethylamino)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one 2c (50 mg, 0.2 mmol, 1 eq) was dissolved in THF (2.20 mL, anhydrous) and cooled to 0° C. MeMgBr (1.0 M in THF, 0.3 mL, 0.4 mmol, 2 eq) was added dropwise over 30 min turning the solution from yellow to orange brown. Reaction was warmed to room temperature and left to stir overnight. Reaction was quenched with 5% fluoroboric acid solution, turning the solution purple, then extracted with dichloromethane (3 x 5 mL), dried over NaSC>4, filtered and evaporated to afford 3c as a brown solid that was pushed forward crude due to instability in air.
Figure imgf000084_0001
2a
7-(dimethylamino)-2-(4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)-4H-chromen-4-one (2a)
Ethyl 3-oxo-3-(4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)propanoate la (160 mg, 0.63 mmol, 1.8 equiv.), and 3-(dimethylamino)phenol (49 mg, 0.36 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) were placed in a 10 mL microwave tube and heated in a microwave at 800 W, at 240 °C for 3 minutes. The solution was cooled to rt and evaporated onto silica gel. The crude product was purified via column chromatography, eluting with a 20: 1 hexanes/EtOAc gradient to yield a yellow solid (55 mg, 0.17 mmol, 46 %). XH NMR (500 MHz, Chloroform-d) d 8.11 - 8.01 (m, 3H), 7.77 (d, J = 8.3 Hz, 2H), 6.99 (s, 1H), 6.86 (dd, J = 9.0, 2.4 Hz, 1H), 6.67 (d, J = 2.4 Hz, 1H), 3.16 (s, 6H).
Figure imgf000085_0001
2b
2-(4-bromophenyl)-7-(dimethylamino)-4H-chromen-4-one (2b)
Ethyl 3-(4-bromophenyl)-3-oxopropanoate lb (180 mg, 0.66 mmol, 1.8 equiv.), and 3- (dimethylamino)phenol (52 mg, 0.36 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) were placed in a 10 mL microwave tube and heated in a microwave at 800 W, at 240 °C for 3 minutes. The solution was cooled to rt and evaporated onto silica gel. The crude product was purified via column chromatography, eluting with a 20: 1 hexanes/EtOAc gradient to yield a yellow solid (59 mg, 0.17 mmol, 47 %). XH NMR (500 MHz, Chloroform-d) d 7.97 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.70 (d, J = 8.7 Hz, 2H), 7.58 (d, J = 8.7 Hz, 2H), 6.71 (dd, J = 9.0, 2.4 Hz, 1H), 6.63 (s, 1H), 6.50 (d, J = 2.4 Hz, 1H), 3.07 (s, 6H).
Figure imgf000085_0002
2c
2-(4-Chlorophenyl)-7-(dimethylamino)-4H-chromen-4-one (2c)
Ethyl 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-3-oxopropanoate lc (290 mg, 1.3 mmol, 1.8 equiv.), and 3- (dimethylamino)phenol (99 mg, 0.73 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) were placed in a 10 mL microwave tube and heated in a microwave at 800 W, at 240 °C for 3 minutes. The solution was cooled to rt and evaporated onto silica gel. The crude product was purified via column chromatography, eluting with a 20: 1 hexanes/EtOAc gradient to yield a yellow solid (89 mg, 0.29 mmol, 40 %). MS (ESI+) calcd for C17H14CINO2 [M+H]+: 300.07 ; found: 300.1.
Figure imgf000085_0003
2d 7-(Dimethylamino)-2-(4-fluorophenyl)-4H-chromen-4-one (2d)
Ethyl 3-(4-fluorophenyl)-3-oxopropanoate Id (140 mg, 0.66 mmol, 1.8 equiv.), and 3- (dimethylamino)phenol (50 mg, 0.36 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) were placed in a 10 mL microwave tube and heated in a microwave at 800 W, at 240 °C for 3 minutes. The solution was cooled to rt and evaporated onto silica gel. The crude product was purified via column chromatography, eluting with a 20: 1 hexanes/EtOAc gradient to yield a yellow solid (56 mg, 0.196 mmol, 54 %). ¾ NMR (500 MHz, Chloroform- d) d 8.04 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.91 (dd, J = 8.9, 5.2 Hz, 2H), 7.19 (t, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H), 6.79 (dd, J = 9.0, 2.4 Hz, 1H), 6.72 (s, 1H), 6.59 (d, J = 2.4 Hz, 1H), 3.12 (s, 6H).
Figure imgf000086_0001
2e
7-(Dimethylamino)-2-(p-tolyl)-4H-chromen-4-one (2e)
Ethyl 3-oxo-3-(p-tolyl)propanoate le (150 mg, 0.73 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), and 3- (dimethylamino)phenol (98 mg, 0.73 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) were placed in a 10 mL microwave tube and heated in a microwave at 800 W, at 240 °C for 3 minutes. The solution was cooled to rt and evaporated onto silica gel. The crude product was purified via column chromatography, eluting with a 20: 1 hexanes/EtOAc gradient to yield a yellow solid (87 mg, 0.31 mmol, 43 %). MS (ESI+) calcd for CisHivNC [M+H]+: 280.1 ; found: 280.0.
Figure imgf000086_0002
2f
7-(Dimethylamino)-2-(4-methoxyphenyl)-4H-chromen-4-one (2b
Ethyl 3-(4-methoxyphenyl)-3-oxopropanoate If (160 mg, 0.72 mmol, 2 equiv.), and 3- (dimethylamino)phenol (49 mg, 0.36 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) were placed in a 10 mL microwave tube and heated in a microwave at 800 W, at 240 °C for 3 minutes. The solution was cooled to rt and evaporated onto silica gel. The crude product was purified via column chromatography, eluting with a 20: 1 hexanes/EtOAc gradient to yield a yellow solid (25 mg, 0.084 mmol, 24 %). ¾ NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) d 8.02 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.85 (d, J = 8.9 Hz, 2H), 6.99 (d, J = 8.9 Hz, 2H), 6.76 (dd, J = 9.0, 2.4 Hz, 1H), 6.64 (s, 1H), 6.57 (d, J = 2.4 Hz, 1H), 3.87 (s, 3H), 3.10 (s, 6H).
Figure imgf000087_0001
7-(Dimethylamino)-2-(4-(dimethylamino)phenyl)-4H-chromen-4-one (2g)
Ethyl 3-(4-(dimethylamino)phenyl)-3-oxopropanoate lg (89 mg, 0.38 mmol, 1.5 equiv.), and 3-(dimethylamino)phenol (35 mg, 0.25 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) were placed in a 10 mL microwave tube and heated in a microwave at 800 W, at 240 °C for 3 minutes. The solution was cooled to rt and evaporated onto silica gel. The crude product was purified via column chromatography, eluting with a 20: 1 hexanes/EtOAc gradient to yield a yellow solid (27 mg, 0.087 mmol, 35 %). ¾ NMR (500 MHz, Chloroform-d) d 8.02 (d, J = 8.9 Hz, 1H), 7.80 (d, J = 8.9 Hz, 2H), 6.75 (d, J = 8.9 Hz, 3H), 6.64 (s, 1H), 6.59 (s, 1H), 3.10 (s, 6H), 3.06 (s, 6H).
Figure imgf000087_0002
3a
7-(Dimethylamino)-4-methyl-2-(4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)chromenylium tetrafluoroborate (3a) Flavone 2a (203 mg, 0.61 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was dissolved in THF (5.9 mL) in a 25 mL double-neck round bottom flask and cooled to 0 °C. Methylmagnesium bromide was added dropwise (1.5 mL, 1.0 M in THF, 2.5 equiv.) and the solution was warmed to rt and stirred for 24 h. The reaction was quenched by dropwise addition of 5% HBF4 on ice, extracted with dichloromethane, dried with Na2SC>4, filtered, and evaporated. The crude product was triturated with ice cold ethyl acetate and vacuum filtered to produce a purple solid (180 mg, 0.43 mmol, 70 %).¾ NMR (500 MHz, Acetomtrile-d3) d 8.37 (d, J = 8.3 Hz, 2H), 8.10 (d, J = 9.7 Hz, 1H), 7.98 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 7.43 (d, J = 7.1 Hz, 2H), 7.14 (d, J = 2.4 Hz, 1H), 3.34 (s, 6H), 2.85 (s, 3H). Absorbance (CH2CI2): 511 nm.
Figure imgf000088_0001
3b
2-(4-bromophenyl)-7-(dimethylamino)-4-methylchromenylium tetrafluoroborate (3b)
Flavone 2b (117 mg, 0.340 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was dissolved in THF (3.3 mL) in a 15 mL double-neck round bottom flask and cooled to 0 °C. Methylmagnesium bromide was added dropwise (0.85 mL, 1.0 M in THF, 2.5 equiv.) and the solution was warmed to rt and stirred for 24 h. The reaction was quenched by dropwise addition of 5% HBF4 on ice, extracted with dichloromethane, dried with Na2SC>4, filtered, and evaporated. The crude product was triturated with ice cold ethyl acetate and vacuum filtered to produce a purple solid (110 mg, 0.255 mmol, 75 %). MS (ESL) calcd for CisHivBrNCF [M+2]+: 344.0 ; found: 344.4.
Figure imgf000088_0002
3c
2-(4-Chlorophenyl)-7-(dimethylamino)-4-methylchromenylium tetrafluoroborate (3c)
Flavone 2c (95 mg, 0.32 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was dissolved in THF (3.1 mL) in a 15 mL double-neck round bottom flask and cooled to 0 °C. Methylmagnesium bromide was added dropwise (0.79 mL, 1.0 M in THF, 2.5 equiv.) and the solution was warmed to rt and stirred for 24 h. The reaction was quenched by dropwise addition of 5% HBF4 on ice, extracted with dichloromethane, dried with Na2SC>4, filtered, and evaporated. The crude product was triturated with ice cold ethyl acetate and vacuum filtered to produce a purple solid (94 mg, 0.24 mmol, 78 %). ¾ NMR (500 MHz, Acetomtrile-d3) d 8.20 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H), 8.08 (d, J = 9.6 Hz, 1H), 7.77 (s, 1H), 7.70 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 2H), 7.40 (dd, J = 9.7, 2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.11 (d, J = 2.6 Hz, 1H), 3.32 (s, 6H), 2.83 (s, 3H). Absorbance (CH2CI2): 516 nm.
Figure imgf000089_0001
3d
7-(Dimethylamino)-2-(4-fluorophenyl)-4-methylchromenylium tetrafluorob orate (3d)
Flavone 2d (80 mg, 0.28 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was dissolved in THF (2.8 mL) in a 15 mL double-neck round bottom flask and cooled to 0 °C. Methylmagnesium bromide was added dropwise (0.71 mL, 1.0 M in THF, 2.5 equiv.) and the solution was warmed to rt and stirred for 24 h. The reaction was quenched by dropwise addition of 5% HBF4 on ice, extracted with dichloromethane, dried with Na2SC>4, filtered, and evaporated. The crude product was triturated with ice cold ethyl acetate and vacuum filtered to produce a purple solid (82 mg, 0.22 mmol, 77 %) Ή NMR (500 MHz. Acctonitrilc-A) 0 8.28 (del../ - 9.0. 5.2 Hz, 2H), 8.08 (cl../ - 9.6 Hz. 1H), 7.75 (s, 1H), 7.50 - 7.34 (m, 3H), 7.12 (s, 1H), 3.32 (s, 6H), 2.83 (s, 3H).
Figure imgf000089_0002
7-(Dimethylamino)-4-methyl-2-(p-tolyl)chromenylium tetrafluorob orate ( 3e)
Flavone 2e (87 mg, 0.33 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was dissolved in THF (3.1 mL) in a 15 mL double-neck round bottom flask and cooled to 0 °C. Methylmagnesium bromide was added dropwise (0.78 mL, 1.0 M in THF, 2.5 equiv.) and the solution was warmed to rt and stirred for 24 h. The reaction was quenched by dropwise addition of 5% HBF4 on ice, extracted with dichloromethane, dried with Na2SC>4, filtered, and evaporated. The crude product was triturated with ice cold ethyl acetate and vacuum filtered to produce a purple solid (77 mg, 0.21 mmol, 67 %). Absorbance (CH2CI2): 513 nm.
Figure imgf000090_0001
7-(Dimethylamino)-2-(4-methoxyphenyl)-4-methylchromenylium tetrafluoroborate (3j)
Flavone 2f (25 mg, 0.084 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was dissolved in THF (0.82 mL) in a 15 mL double-neck round bottom flask and cooled to 0 °C. Methylmagnesium bromide was added dropwise (0.21 mL, 1.0 M in THF, 2.5 equiv.) and the solution was warmed to rt and stirred for 24 h. The reaction was quenched by dropwise addition of 5% HBF4 on ice, extracted with dichloromethane, dried with Na2SC>4, filtered, and evaporated. The crude product was triturated with ice cold ethyl acetate and vacuum filtered to produce a purple solid (21 mg, 0.055 mmol, 65 %) ¾ NMR (500 MHz, Acetomtrile-d3) d 8.23 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 2H), 8.04 (d, J = 9.5 Hz, 1H), 7.72 (s, 1H), 7.33 (dd, J = 9.6, 2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.21 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 2H), 7.10 (d, J = 2.6 Hz, 1H), 3.95 (s, 3H), 3.29 (s, 6H), 2.81 (s, 3H). Absorbance (CH2CI2): 525 nm.
Figure imgf000090_0002
7-(Dimethylamino)-2-(4-(dimethylamino)phenyl)-4-methylchromenylium tetrafluoroborate (3g) Flavone 2g (21 mg, 0.068 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was dissolved in THF (0.63 mL) in a 15 mL double-neck round bottom flask and cooled to 0 °C. Methylmagnesium bromide was added dropwise (0.17 mL, 1.0 M in THF, 2.5 equiv.) and the solution was warmed to rt and stirred for 24 h. The reaction was quenched by dropwise addition of 5% HBF4 on ice, extracted with dichloromethane, dried with Na2SC>4, filtered, and evaporated. The crude product was triturated with ice cold ethyl acetate and vacuum filtered to produce a purple solid (16 mg, 0.041 mmol, 60 %). ¾ NMR (500 MHz, Acetonitrile-d3) d 8.13 (d, J = 9.3 Hz, 2H), 7.91 (d, J = 9.4 Hz, 1H), 7.58 (s, 1H), 7.28 - 7.11 (m, 1H), 7.02 (d, J = 2.5 Hz, 1H), 6.91 (d, J = 9.4 Hz, 2H), 3.23 (s, 6H), 3.17 (s, 6H), 2.72 (s, 3H). Absorbance (CH2CI2): 504 nm.
Figure imgf000091_0001
4-ylideneJelhylideneJcyclohex- J-en- 1-yl) vinyl)- 7-(dimelhylamino)-2-( 4- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl)chromenylium tetrafluoroborate (4a).
Flavylium 3a (31 mg, 0.074 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), A'-[(3-(anilinomethylene)-2-chloro- l - cyclohexen-l-yl)methylene]aniline hydrochloride (12.7 mg, 0.035 mmol, 0.48 equiv.), and sodium acetate (18 mg, 0.22 mmol, 3 equiv.) were dissolved in a mixture of «-butanol (0.47 mL) and toluene (0.2 mL) in a 25 mL Schlenk flask and heated to 105 °C for 30 minutes. The solution was cooled to rt and evaporated onto silica gel. The crude product was purified via silica gel chromatography, eluting with a DCM/Toluene/EtOH solvent gradient of 7:3 +0.2% EtOH, increasing up to 10% EtOH gradually, followed by a trituration with ice cold THE The procedure gave a dark purple solid (18 mg, 0.02 mmol, 27%). MS (ESI+) Calculated for C-^lLxClFxN Ch- [M]+: 799.2521 ; found: 799.2. Absorbance (CH2CI2): 1044 nm. Emission (CH2CI2): 1075 nm.
Figure imgf000091_0002
4-((E)-2-((E)-2-chloro-3-(2-((E)-7-(dimethylamino)-2-(4-methoxyphenyl)-4H-chromen-4- ylidene)ethylidene)cyclohex-l-en-l-yl)vinyl)-7-(dimethylamino)-2-(4- melhoxyphenyljchromenylium tetrafluoroborate (4j).
Flavylium 3f (18 mg, 0.047 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), /V-[(3-(anilinomethylene)-2-chloro-l- cyclohexen-l-yl)methylene]aniline hydrochloride (8 mg, 0.002 mmol, 0.48 equiv.), and sodium acetate (12 mg, 0.14 mmol, 3.0 equiv.) were dissolved in a mixture of «-butanol (0.3 mL) and toluene (0.1 mL) in a 25 mL Schlenk flask and heated to 105 °C for 20 minutes. The solution was cooled to rt and evaporated onto silica gel. The crude product was purified via silica gel chromatography, eluting with a DCM/Toluene/EtOH solvent gradient of 7:3 +0.2% EtOH, increasing up to 10% EtOH gradually, followed by a trituration with ice cold THE The procedure gave a dark purple solid (8 mg, 0.01 mmol, 21 %). MS (ESI+) Calculated for C46H44CIN2OE [M]+: 723.2984; found: 724. Absorbance (CH2CI2): 1027 nm. Emission (CH2CI2): 1051 nm.
Figure imgf000092_0001
4-((E)-2-((E)-2-chloro-3-(2-((E)-7-(dimethylamino)-2-(4-(dimethylamino)phenyl)-4H-chromen- 4-ylideneJelhylideneJcyclohex- J-en- 1-yl) vinyl)- 7-(dimethylamin<))-2-( 4
(dimethylamino)phenyl)chromenylium tetrafluoroborate (4g).
Flavylium 3g (10 mg, 0.03 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), /V-[(3-(anilinomethylene)-2-chloro-l- cyclohexen-l-yl)methylene]aniline hydrochloride (4 mg, 0.01 mmol, 0.48 equiv.), and sodium acetate (6 mg, 0.08 mmol, 3 equiv.) were dissolved in a mixture of «-butanol (205 pL) and toluene (86 pL) in a 25 mL Schlenk flask and heated to 100 °C for 35 minutes. The solution was cooled to rt and evaporated onto silica gel. The crude product was purified via silica gel chromatography, eluting with a DCM/Toluene/EtOH solvent gradient of 7:3 + 0.3% EtOH, increasing up to 5% EtOH gradually, followed by a trituration with ice cold THF. The procedure gave a dark purple solid (5 mg, 0.006 mmol, 20 %). MS (ESI+) Calculated for C48HSOC1N402+ [M]+: 749.3617; found: 749. Absorbance (CH2CI2): 1051 nm.
Figure imgf000093_0001
1 l-(Tert-butyl)-9-((E)-2-((E)-3-((E)-2-(l l-(tert-butyl)-2, 3, 6, 7 -tetrahydro- lH,5H,9H-pyrano[2, 3- J]pyrido[ 3, 2, 1-i/]quinolin- -ylideneJelhylideneJ-2-chlorocyclohex- I-en- I-yljvinylj-2, 3, 6, 7- tetrahydro-lH, 5H-pyra.no [ 2, 3-J]pyrido[ 3, 2, l-ij]quinolin-12-ium tetrafluoroborate
l l-(Tert-butyl)-9-methyl-2,3,6,7-tetrahydro-lH,5H-pyrano[2,3-f]pyrido[3,2,l- ij]quinolin-12-ium (#) (52 mg, 0.13 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), N-[(3-(anilinomethylene)-2-chloro-l- cyclohexen-l-yl)methylene]aniline hydrochloride (22 mg, 0.062 mmol, 0.48 equiv.), and 2,6-di- tert-butyl-4-methyl pyridine (80 mg, 0.4 mmol, 3 equiv.) were dissolved in a mixture of n-butanol (820 pL) and toluene (350 pL) in a 25 mL Schlenk flask and heated to 105 °C for 7 hours. The solution was cooled to rt and evaporated onto silica gel. The crude product was purified via silica gel chromatography, eluting with a DCM/Toluene/EtOH solvent gradient of 7:3 + 0.2% EtOH, increasing up to 10% EtOH gradually, followed by a trituration with ice cold THF. The procedure gave a dark purple solid (30 mg, 0.036 mmol, 28 %). ¾ NMR (500 MHz, Methylene Chloride- d2) d 8.15 (d, J = 13.8 Hz, 2H), 7.48 (s, 2H), 6.79 (s, 4H), 3.39 (s, 8H), 2.89 (s, 8H), 2.77 (s, 4H), 2.02 (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 8H), 1.41 (s, 18H), 0.08 (s, 2H). Absorbance (CH2CI2): 1007 nm. Emission (CH2CI2): 1032..
Figure imgf000093_0002
7-(trifluoromethanesulfonate)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one (5)
The preparation of 7-(trifluoromethanesulfonate)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one was adapted from Kover and Antus In a 150 mL flask, 7-hydroxyflavone (902 mg, 3.79 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and pyridine (15.0 mL, 186 mmol, 49 equiv.) were combined and placed in an ice bath. Trifluormethanesulfonic anhydride (1.30 mL, 7.73 mmol, 2.0 equiv.) was added dropwise. After 2 h, the reaction was quenched with sodium bicarbonate, extracted into EtOAc, washed with brine, and evaporated. The crude product was purified via column chromatography in an 8: 1 hexanes/EtOAc mixture to yield a white solid (934 mg, 2.52 mmol, 67%. 'H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) d 8.34 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 1H), 7.96 - 7.86 (m, 2H), 7.63 - 7.50 (m, 4H), 7.34 (dd, J = 8.8, 2.3 Hz, 1H), 6.85 (s, 1H). ¾ NMR agrees with the literature.
Figure imgf000094_0001
7-(pyrrolidin-l-yl)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one (S2e)
7-(trifluoromethanesulfonate)-2-phenyl-7//-chromen-4-one (103 mg, 0.278 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), pyrrolidine (0.042 mL, 0.50 mmol, 1.5 equiv.), RuPhos-Pd-G3 (24.2 mg, 0.0289 mmol, 0.1 equiv.) RuPhos (12.9 mg, 0.0276 mmol, 0.1 equiv.), and cesium carbonate (136 mg, 0.418 mmol, 1.5 equiv.) were dissolved in toluene (2.6 mL) in a 20 mL scintillation vial and heated to 100 °C for 24 h under an N2 atmosphere. The solution was cooled to rt and evaporated onto silica gel. The crude product was purified via column chromatography, eluting with a 9: 1, 7: 1 and 5: 1 hexanes/EtOAc solvent gradient. This procedure gave an amber solid (59.8 mg, 0.205 mmol, 74%). R/= 0.5 m 1 : 1 hexanes/EtOAc. Ή NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform-d) d 8.05 (d, J = 8.9 Hz, 1H), 7.95 - 7.90 (m, 2H), 7.55 - 7.48 (m, 3H), 6.87 (s, 1H), 6.68 (dd, J = 9.0, 2.3 Hz, 1H), 6.49 (d, J = 2.3 Hz, 1H), 3.48 - 3.38 (m, 4H), 2.15 - 2.05 (m, 4H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, Chloroform- d) d 178.0, 162.6, 158.8, 152.1, 132.6, 131.4, 129.2, 127.0, 126.4, 113.4, 111.7, 107.3, 97.1, 48.1, 25.8. HRMS (ESL) calcd for C19H18NO2 [M+H]+: 292.1332; found: 292.1326. Absorbance (CH2CI2): 233, 275, 307, 364 nm.
Figure imgf000094_0002
7-(Piperidin-l-yl)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one (S2f)
7-(trifluoromethanesulfonate)-2-phenyl-7//-chromen-4-one (183 mg, 0.495 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), piperidine (0.072 mL, 0.73 mmol, 1.5 equiv.), RuPhos (21.2 mg, 0.0455 mmol, 0.1 equiv.), RuPhos-Pd-G3 (42.5 mg, 0.0508 mmol, 0.1 equiv.) and cesium carbonate (243 mg, 0.747 mmol, 1.5 equiv.) were dissolved in toluene (4.5 mL) in a 20 mL scintillation vial and heated to 100 °C for 24 h under an N2 atmosphere. The solution was cooled to rt and evaporated onto silica gel. The crude product was purified via column chromatography, eluting with a 9: 1, 7: 1 and 5: 1 gradient of hexanes/EtOAc to yield an amber solid (106 mg, 348 mmol, 71%). R/ = 0.6 in 1 : 1 hexanes/EtOAc. 'H NMR (400 MHz, Chloroform- ) d 8.03 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.89 (s, 2H), 7.50 (s, 3H), 7.04 - 6.88 (m, 1H), 6.80 (d, J= 2.4 Hz, 1H), 6.70 (s, 1H), 3.41 (s, 4H), 1.69 (s, 6H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, Chloroform-^) d 177.9, 162.6, 158.6, 155.1, 132.4, 131.2, 129.1, 126.7, 126.2, 115.1, 113.5, 107.5, 100.3, 49.1, 25.4, 24.4. HRMS (ESI+) calcd for C2oH2oN02 [M+H]+: 306.1489; found: 306.1486. Absorbance (CH2Ch): 275, 308, 356 nm.
Figure imgf000095_0001
7-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one (S2h)
7-(Trifluoromethanesulfonate)-2-phenyl-7//-chromen-4-one (60.1 mg, 0.162 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), RuPhos (7.6 mg, 0.016 mmol, 0.1 equiv.), RuPhos-Pd-G3 (14.1 mg, 0.0169 mmol, 0.1 equiv.), cesium carbonate (81.6 mg, 0.250 mmol, 1.5 equiv.), and carbazole (40.1 mg, 0.240 mmol, 1.5 equiv.) were added to a flame-dried 2-dram vial under a N2 atmosphere and dissolved in toluene (1 mL). The solution was heated at 100 °C for 22 h. The crude mixture was purified by column chromatography with a 20: 1, 15: 1, 10: 1, and 8: 1, 5: 1, 4: 1 hexanes/EtOAc gradient to isolate a beige solid (51.6 mg, 0.133 mmol, 82%). Rf = 0.8 in 1 : 1 hexanes/EtOAc. ¾ NMR (600 MHz, Chlorofornw/) d 8.47 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 1H), 8.16 (dd, J= 7.7, 1.1 Hz, 2H), 7.99 - 7.94 (m, 2H), 7.84 (d, J= 1.9 Hz, 1H), 7.70 (dd, J= 8.4, 1.9 Hz, 1H), 7.60 - 7.53 (m, 5H), 7.47 (ddd, = 8.2, 7.2, 1.2 Hz, 2H), 7.35 (t, = 7.4 Hz, 2H), 6.91 (s, 1H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, Chloroform-^) d 177.7, 163.8, 157.2, 143.0, 140.1, 131.9, 131.6, 129.2, 127.7, 126.5, 126.4, 124.1, 123.7, 122.6, 121.1, 120.7, 115.5, 109.9, 108.0. HRMS (ESI+) calcd for C27Hi8N02 + [M+H]+: 388.1332, found: 388.1336. Absorbance (CH2Ch): 239, 289, 311, 339 nm.
Figure imgf000095_0002
7-(Di-(tert-butoxycarbonyl))-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one (S2i)
7-Aminoflavone (180 mg, 0.760 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (529 mg, 2.42 mmol, 3.2 equiv.), triethylamine (0.26 mL, 1.9 mmol, 2.5 equiv.), dimethylamino pyridine (27.0 mg, 0.220 mmol, 0.3 equiv.), and THF (4.5 mL) were added to an oven-dried 20 mL vial and refluxed for 48 h. The resulting mixture was evaporated onto silica gel and purified by column chromatography with a 10: 1, 8: 1, 5: 1 hexanes/EtOAc gradient to yield a white solid (218 mg, 0.498 mmol, 66%). Rf = 0.9 in 1 : 1 hexanes/EtOAc. 1H NMR (600 MHz, Chloroform-d) d 8.19 (d, J= 8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.90 - 7.86 (m, 2H), 7.49 (dt, J= 5.8, 2.9 Hz, 3H), 7.40 (d, J= 1.9 Hz, 1H), 7.19 (dd, J= 8.4, 1.9 Hz, 1H), 6.80 (d, J= 1.3 Hz, 1H), 1.42 (s, 18H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, Chloroform- d) d 177.8, 163.7, 156.2, 151.2, 144.1, 131.8, 131.5, 129.1, 126.3, 126.1, 125.3, 122.9, 117.4, 107.7, 83.7, 27.9. HRMS (ESI+) calcd for C25H28N06+ [M+H]+: 438.1911, found: 438.1915. Absorbance (CH2C12): 252, 296 nm.
Figure imgf000096_0001
2-(Tert-butyl)-7-(dimethylamino)-4H-chromen-4-one
3-(dimethylamino)phenol (299 mg, 2.18 mmol, 1.00 equiv.) and ethyl pivaloylacetate (700 pL, 3.93 mmol, 1.00 equiv.) were combined in an oven-dried 1 dram vial and heated at 180 °C for 40 h. The solution was cooled to room temperature, evaporated onto silica, and purified via column chromatography with a 10: 1 to 4: 1 hexanes/EtOAc gradient. The procedure gave a light pink solid (238 mg, 0.970 mmol, 45%).1H NMR (300 MHz, Chloroform-d) d 7.96 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 1H), 6.70 (dd, J = 9.0, 2.4 Hz, 1H), 6.45 (d, J = 2.4 Hz, 1H), 6.10 (s, 1H), 3.05 (s, 6H), 1.30 (s, 9H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, Chloroform-d) d 178.4, 174.7, 158.6, 154.1, 126.4, 113.1, 110.5, 106.1, 97.0, 40.2, 36.3, 28.0.
Figure imgf000096_0002
1 l-(Tert-butyl)-2 , 3, 6, 7-tetrahydro-lH, 5H, 9H-pyrano[ 2, 3-J]pyrido[ 3, 2, l-ij]quinolin-9-one
8- hydroxyjulolidine (315 mg, 1.66 mmol, 1.00 equiv) and ethyl pivaloylacetate (500 pL, 2.81 mmol, 1.69 equiv.) were added to a 20 mL vial, and heated at 180 °C for 48 h. The solution was cooled to room temperature, evaporated onto silica, and purified via column chromatography with a 8: 1 to 3: 1 hexanes/EtOAc gradient to yield an off-white solid (295 mg, 0.992 mmol, 60%). ¾ NMR (600 MHz, Chloroform-d) d 7.53 (s, 1H), 6.05 (s, 1H), 5.25 (s, 1H), 3.27 - 3.15 (m, 4H), 2.83 (t, J= 6.5 Hz, 2H), 2.74 (t, J= 6.2 Hz, 2H), 1.96 (p, J= 6.3 Hz, 2H), 1.90 (p, J= 6.2 Hz, 2H), 1.27 (s, 9H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, Chloroform-d) d 178.4, 173.9, 153.9, 146.9, 122.1, 119.9, 112.2, 105.58, 105.55, 49.9, 49.4, 36.4, 28.1, 27.6, 21.5, 20.7, 20.5.
Figure imgf000097_0001
2-((3R,5R, 7R)-adamantan-l-yl)-7-(dimethylamino)-4H-chromen-4-one)
3-(dimethylamino)phenol (150 mg, 1.09 mmol, 1.00 equiv.) and ethyl 3-(l-adamantyl)-3- oxopropionate (316 pL, 1.31 mmol, 1.20 equiv.) were added to a glass microwave vial and heated to 240 °C for 3 min. The crude product was cooled and evaporated onto silica for purification via column chromatography with a 10: 1 to 3: 1 hexanes/EtOAc gradient. Impure fractions were further purified with a 250: 1 to 14: 1 toluene/acetone gradient to obtain a grey solid (99.6 mg, 0.308 mmol, 28%). 1H NMR (500 MHz, Chloroform-d) d 7.96 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 1H), 6.71 (dd, J = 9.1, 2.5 Hz, 1H), 6.46 (d, J = 2.4 Hz, 1H), 6.03 (s, 1H), 3.06 (s, 6H), 2.17 - 2.03 (m, 3H), 1.93 (d, J = 3.0 Hz, 6H), 1.84 - 1.65 (m, 6H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, Chloroform-d) d 178.6, 174.6, 158.7, 154.1, 126.5, 113.4, 110.5, 106.0, 97.1, 40.3, 39.6, 38.0, 36.6, 28.1.
Figure imgf000097_0002
7-(Pyrrolidin-l-yl)-4-methyl-2-phenylchromenylium tetrafluorob orate (12e)
7-(pyrrolidin- 1 -yl)-2-phenyl-7//-chromen-4-one (S2e) (62.0 mg, 0.213 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was dissolved in THF (2.2 mL) in a 15 mL 2-neck round bottom flask and cooled to 0 °C. Methylmagnesium bromide was added dropwise (1.0 M in THF, 0.508 mL, 2.5 equiv.) and the solution was warmed to rt and stirred for 24 h. The reaction was quenched by dropwise addition of fluoroboric acid (5%, aqueous, ~30 mL) on ice, extracted with dichloromethane after the addition of more 5% HBF4, dried with Na2SC>4, filtered, and evaporated. The crude product was triturated with ice cold EtOAc and vacuum filtered to produce a red solid (52.1 mg, 0.138 mmol, 65%). ¾ NMR (400 MHz, Acetonitrile-*) d 8.25 - 8.18 (m, 2H), 8.06 (d, J= 9.5 Hz, 1H), 7.76 (d, J= 0.5 Hz, 1H), 7.75 - 7.71 (m, 1H), 7.70 - 7.64 (m, 2H), 7.26 (dd, J= 9.5, 2.3 Hz, 1H), 6.98 (d, J= 2.4 Hz, 1H), 3.69 (t, J= 6.2 Hz, 2H), 3.60 (t, J= 6.1 Hz, 2H), 2.83 (s, 3H), 2.12 - 2.08 (m, 4H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, Acetonitrile-*) d 165.7, 164.3, 159.8, 156.4, 135.0, 130.8, 130.7, 129.7, 128.5, 120.2 119.2, 112.6, 97.2, 50.4, 50.1, 26.0, 25.7, 20.1. HRMS (ESI+) calcd for C20H20NCE [M]+: 290.1539; found: 290.1542. Absorbance (CH2CI2): 238, 296, 339, 516 nm. Emission (CH2CI2, ex. 500 nm): 595 nm.
Figure imgf000098_0001
7-(Piperidin-l-yl)-4-methyl-2-phenylchromenylium (I2f)
7-(piperidin-l-yl)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one (S2f): (90.4 mg, 0.296 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was dissolved in THF (2.3 mL) in a 15 mL double-neck round bottom flask and cooled to 0 °C. Methylmagnesium bromide was added dropwise on ice (1.0 M in THF, 0.702 pL, 2.5 equiv.). The solution was warmed to rt and left stir under a N2 atmosphere for 24 h. The reaction was quenched by dropwise addition of fluoroboric acid (5%, aqueous, ~30 mL) on ice, extracted with dichloromethane the addition of more 5% HBF4, dried with Na2S04, filtered, and evaporated. The crude product was triturated with ice cold EtOAc and vacuum filtered to yield a dark red solid (99.8 mg, 0.255 mmol, 86%). 1H NMR (600 MHz, Acetomtrile-d3) d 8.19 - 8.12 (m, 2H), 7.99 (d, J= 9.7 Hz, 1H), 7.73 - 7.66 (m, 2H), 7.66 - 7.59 (m, 2H), 7.44 (dd, J= 9.7, 2.6 Hz, 1H), 7.17 (d, J= 2.6 Hz, 1H), 3.82 - 3.67 (m, 4H), 2.77 (s, 3H), 1.80 - 1.75 (m, 2H), 1.77 - 1.71 (m, 4H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, Acetomtrile-d3) d 164.9, 163.2, 159.4, 157.0, 134.1, 129.8, 129.6, 128.9, 127.5, 118.4, 118.0, 111.9, 96.4, 48.9, 25.8, 23.8, 19.1. HRMS (ESI+) calcd for C21H22NO+ [M]+: 304.1696; found: 304.1696. Absorbance (CH2C12): 243, 297, 338, 520 nm. Emission (CH2C12, ex. 500 nm): 608 nm.
Figure imgf000099_0001
7-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)-4-methyl-2-phenylchromenylium tetrafluoroborate (12h)
7-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one (S2h) (128 mg, 0.331 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was placed in a 50 mL flame-dried flask, dissolved in THF (3.2 mL), and cooled to 0 °C. Methylmagnesium bromide (1.0 M in THF, 0.800 mL, 2.4 equiv.) was added dropwise. The reaction was warmed to rt and stirred for 17 h before quenching with a few drops of fluoroboric acid (50%, aqueous, ~0.1 mL). After the addition of 50% fluoroboric acid, the product was extracted into dichloromethane, dried with Na2S04, filtered, and evaporated. The crude product was purified by trituration in cold EtOAc, filtered and dried to yield a maroon solid (96.5 mg, 0.204 mmol, 62%). 1H NMR (600 MHz, Acetomtrile-d3) d 8.64 (d, J= 8.9 Hz, 1H), 8.62 - 8.55 (m, 2H), 8.55 - 8.49 (m, 2H), 8.38 (dd, J= 8.9, 2.1 Hz, 1H), 8.25 (dd, J= 7.8, 1.1 Hz, 2H), 7.93 (d, J= 7.4 Hz, 1H), 7.85 - 7.78 (m, 4H), 7.56 (ddd, J= 8.3, 7.2, 1.3 Hz, 2H), 7.47 - 7.42 (m, 2H), 3.18 (s, 3H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, Acetomtrile-d3) d 173.3, 172.7, 157.9, 148.4, 140.1, 138.1, 131.3, 130.9, 130.0, 129.6, 128.6, 128.0, 125.7, 124.0, 123.6, 121.8, 119.0, 115.4, 111.4, 21.7. HRMS (ESI+) calcd for C28H22NO+ [M]+: 386.1539, found: 388.1545. IR (film): 2923, 1576, 1521, 1445, 1378, 1335, 1191, 1057, 752, 689 cm-1. Absorbance (CH2C12): 236, 284, 382, 564 nm.
Figure imgf000099_0002
7-(di-(tert-butoxycarbonyl))-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-one (S2i) (20.5 mg, 0.0469 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was dissolved in THF (0.300 mL) in a flame-dried 1.5 mL vial and cooled to 0 °C. Methylmagnesium bromide (1 M in THF, 0.100 mL, 3.2 equiv.) was added dropwise and the resulting solution was let warm to rt and stirred for 19 h under an atmosphere of N2. Fluoroboric acid (50%, 0.016 mL) was added dropwise over ice and the crude reaction mixture was transferred directly to the following reaction. Note: Intermediate 12i was isolated in low yield by subjecting the reaction mixture to several drops of 50% fluoroboric acid, extracting with dichloromethane/water, drying with Na2S04, and filtering. After evaporating and triturating in EtOAc, a light green product resulted. 1H NMR (600 MHz, Acetone-d6) d 9.90 (s, 1H), 8.81 (d, J= 2.1 Hz, 1H), 8.78 (s, 1H), 8.67 - 8.62 (m, 2H), 8.57 (d, J= 9.1 Hz, 1H), 7.98 (dd, J= 9.1, 2.1 Hz, 1H), 7.95 - 7.89 (m, 1H), 7.84 - 7.77 (m, 2H), 3.22 - 320 (m, 3H) {peak at 3.22 - 3.20 appears as a multiplet and as < 3H due to proton-deuterium exchange with Acetone-d6}, 1.58 (s, 9H). HRMS (ESI+) calcd for C21H22N03+ [M]+: 336.1594, found: 336.1598. Absorbance (CH2C12): 236, 272, 312, 356, 445 nm. Emission (CH2C12, ex. 390 nm): 497 nm.
Figure imgf000100_0001
7-Methoxy-4-methyl-2-phenylchromenylium chloride (12j)
3-methoxy flavone (1.00 g, 8.06 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), benzoyl acetone (1.31 g, 8.06 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), were dissolved in EtOAc (40 mL) and placed in a 100 mL 3 -neck flask. After bubbling HCl(g) for 3 h, the reaction was stirred at rt for an additional 24 h under a N2 atmosphere. The reaction mixture was filtered and rinsed with additional EtOAc to yield a bright yellow solid (814 mg, 2.84 mmol, 35%). 1H NMR (500 MHz, Acetomtrile-d3) d 8.45 - 8.39 (m, 3H), 8.35 (d, J= 9.3 Hz, 1H), 7.90 - 7.84 (m, 1H), 7.79 - 7.75 (m, 3H), 7.57 (dd, J= 9.3, 2.4 Hz, 1H), 4.14 (s, 3H), 3.07 (s, 3H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, Acetomtrile-d3) d 172.1, 171.5, 170.5, 160.1, 137.1, 131.2, 130.1, 130.0, 129.8, 122.9, 121.2, 117.1, 101.7, 58.5, 21.4. HRMS (ESI+) calcd for Cl 7H1502+ [M]+: 251.1067, found: 251.1061. Absorbance (CH2C12): 228, 265, 303, 428 nm. Emission (CH2C12, ex. 390 nm): 460 nm.
Figure imgf000100_0002
2-(Tert-butyl)-7-(dimethylamino)-4-methylchromenylium tetrafluoroborate (#)
2-(tert-butyl)-7-(dimethylamino)-4H-chromen-4-one (#) (500 mg, 2.04 mmol, 1.00 equiv.) was dissolved in THF (20 mL) in a flame-dried 100 mL 3 -neck flask in an N2 atmosphere. The solution was cooled to 0 °C, and methylmagnesium bromide (1.0 M in THF, 5.1 mL, 2.5 equiv.) was added dropwise. The reaction mixture was warmed to room temperature and stirred for 21 h. The reaction was quenched with fluoroboric acid (50% aqueous, 300 pL), and with the addition of 5% fluoroboric acid, extracted into dichloromethane. The extract was dried with Na2S04, filtered, and evaporated. The crude product was purified by precipitation upon addition of EtOAc, filtration, and rinsing with additional EtOAc to yield a bright orange solid (604 mg, 1.82 mmol, 89%). lH NMR (500 MHz, Acetone-d6) d 8.27 (d, J = 9.6 Hz, 1H), 7.59 (dd, J = 9.6, 2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.50 (s, 1H), 7.25 (d, J = 2.6 Hz, 1H), 3.45 (s, 6H), 2.93 (s, 3H), 1.52 (s, 9H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, Acetone-d6) 5 181.0, 166.1, 160.5, 159.1, 129.7, 119.2, 118.3, 112.5, 96.7, 41.2, 38.7, 28.3, 20 0
Figure imgf000101_0001
1 l-(Tert-butyl)-9-methyl-2, 3, 6, 7-tetrahydro-lH, 5H-pyrano[ 2, 3-J]pyrido[ 3, 2, l-ij]quinolin-12- ium tetrafluoroborate
l l-(tert-butyl)-2,3,6,7-tetrahydro-lH,5H,9H-pyrano[2,3-f]pyrido[3,2,l-ij]quinolin-9-one (256 mg, 0.861 mmol, 1.00 equiv) was added to a flame dried 50 mL 2-neck flask in a N2 atmosphere and dissolved in THF (8.8 mL). Methylmagnesium bromide (1.0 M in THF, 2.6 mL, 3.0 equiv.) was added dropwise and the solution was stirred at room temperature for 12 h. The reaction was quenched with fluoroboric acid (50% aqueous, 200 pL). The product was extracted into dicholormethane with the addition of 5% fluoroboric acid, dried with Na2S04, filtered, and evaporated. The product was purified by precipitation upon addition of cold EtOAc, filtration and rinsing with cold EtOAc to obtain a magenta solid (268 mg, 0.669 mmol, 81%). 1H NMR (500 MHz, Acetomtrile-d3) d 7.76 (s, 1H), 7.13 (s, 1H), 3.64 (q, J = 5.4 Hz, 4H), 3.06 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, 2H), 3.04 - 2.98 (m, 2H), 2.78 (s, 3H), 2.16 - 2.07 (m, 4H), 1.55 (s, 9H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, Acetomtrile-d3) d 178.3, 161.6, 155.2, 153.7, 129.7, 124.7, 111.1, 105.6, 51.8, 51.3, 38.5, 28.4, 28.4, 21.0, 20.2, 19.9, 19.7.
Figure imgf000101_0002
2-((3R,5R, 7R)-Adamantan-l-yl)-7-(dimethylamino)-4-methylchromenylium tetrafluoroborate
2-((3r,5r,7r)-adamantan-l-yl)-7-(dimethylamino)-4H-chromen-4-one (79 mg, 0.24 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) was added to a flame dried 25 mL 2-neck flask in a N2 atmosphere and dissolved in THF (3.2 mL). The solution was cooled to 0 °C and methylmagnesium bromide (1.0 M in THF, 0.75 mL, 3.1 equiv.) was added dropwise. The reaction was warmed to room temperature and stirred for 14 h before quenching with fluoroboric acid (50%, aqueous, 150 pL). After further addition of 5% fluoroboric acid, the product was extracted into dicholoromethane, dried with Na2S04, filtered, and evaporated. The crude product was purified by precipitation upon addition of toluene, collected by vacuum filtration, and rinsed briefly with cold EtOAc to yield a bright orange solid (68 mg, 0.17 mmol, 68%). 1H NMR (500 MHz, Acetone-d6) d 8.26 (d, J = 9.7 Hz, 1H), 7.58 (dd, J = 9.6, 2.5 Hz, 1H), 7.42 (s, 1H), 7.25 (d, J = 2.6 Hz, 1H), 3.45 (s, 6H), 2.94 (s, 3H), 2.17 (d, J = 1.4 Hz, 9H), 1.95 - 1.79 (m, 6H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, Acetone-d6) d 180.5,
166.1, 160.5, 159.0, 129.6, 119.1, 118.3, 112.5, 96.7, 41.2, 40.6, 40.3, 36.7, 28.8, 20.0.
Figure imgf000102_0001
4-( (E)-2-( fE)-2-chloro-3-(2-((E)-2-phenyl- 7-(pyrrolidin-l-yl)-4H-chromen-4- ylidene)ethylidene)cyclohex-l-en-l-yl)vinyl)-2-phenyl-7-(pyrrolidin-l-yl)chromenylium tetrafluoroborate (5)
7-(pyrrolidin-l-yl)-4-methyl-2-phenylchromenylium tetrafluoroborate (12e): (75.3 mg, 0.199 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) N-[(3-(anilinomethylene)-2-chloro-l-cyclohexen-l-yl)methylene]aniline hydrochloride (29.6 mg, 0.0825 mmol, 0.45 equiv.) and 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methyl pyridine (137 mg, 0.667 mmol, 3.0 equiv.) were dissolved in n-pentanol (1.9 mL) in a 25 mL Schlenk flask, freeze-pump-thawed x3, and heated to 140 °C for 1.5 h. The solution was cooled to rt and evaporated onto silica gel. The crude product was purified via silica gel chromatography, eluting with a 7:3 DCM/toluene solvent mixture plus 0.2 to 10% EtOH, followed by a trituration with ice cold THF. The procedure gave a dark purple solid. (10.3 mg, 0.0128 mmol, 8%). Rf = 0.5 in 9: 1 DCM/EtOH. lH NMR (500 MHz, Methylene Chlonde-d2) d 8.35 (d, J = 13.8 Hz, 2H), 8.09 - 8.00 (m, 4H), 7.94 (d, J = 9.3 Hz, 2H), 7.64 - 7.55 (m, 6H), 7.48 (s, 2H), 6.99 (d, J = 13.9 Hz, 2H), 6.83 (dd, J = 9.2, 2.5 Hz, 2H), 6.59 (d, J = 2.3 Hz, 2H), 3.56 - 3.46 (m, 8H), 2.84 (t, J = 6.2 Hz, 4H), 2.15 - 2.09 (m, 8H), 2.01 (p, J = 5.6 Hz, 2H). HRMS (ESI+) calcd for C48H44C1N202+ [M]+: 715.3086; found: 715.3070. Absorbance (CH2C12): 525 nm, 924 nm, 1034 nm. Emission (CH2C12, ex. 885 nm): 1061 nm.
Figure imgf000103_0001
4-((E)-2-((E)-2-chloro-3-(2-((E)-2-phenyl-7-(piperidin-l-yl)-4H-chromen-4- ylidene)ethylidene)cyclohex-l-en-l-yl)vinyl)-2-phenyl-7-(piperidin-l-yl)chromenylium tetrafluoroborate (6)
7-(piperidin-l-yl)-4-methyl-2-phenylchromenylium (12f) (30.3 mg, 0.0775 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), N-[(3-(anilinomethylene)-2-chloro- 1 -cyclohexen- 1 -yl)methylene] aniline hydrochloride (47.5 mg, 0.132 mmol, 0.45 equiv.), and 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methyl pyridine (15.2 mg, 0.740 mmol, 3.0 equiv.) were dissolved in a mixture of n-butanol (0.46 mL) and toluene (0.20 mL) in a 25 mL Schlenk flask, freeze-pump-thawed x3, and heated to 100 °C for 2 h. The solution was cooled to rt and evaporated onto silica gel. The crude product was purified via silica gel chromatography, eluting with a 7:3 DCM/Toluene solvent mixture plus 0.2-10% EtOH, followed by a trituration with ice cold THF. The procedure gave a dark purple solid (17.1 mg, 0.0205 mmol, 26%). Rf = 0.5 in 9: 1 DCM/EtOH. 1H NMR (500 MHz, Methylene Chlonde-d2) d 8.25 (d, J= 13.8 Hz, 2H), 7.97 - 7.95 (m, 4H), 7.87 (d, J= 9.3 Hz, 2H), 7.61 - 7.53 (m, 6H), 7.38 (s, 2H), 7.04 (dd, J= 9.4, 2.6 Hz, 2H), 6.91 (d, J= 13.8 Hz, 2H), 6.76 (d, J= 2.5 Hz, 2H), 3.50 (m, 8H), 2.82 - 2.78 (m, 4H), 2.00 (p, J= 6.2 Hz, 2H), 1.73 (m, 12H). HRMS (ESI+) Calculated for C50H48C1N2O2+ [M]+: 743.3399; found: 743.3386. Absorbance (CH2C12): 523 nm, 922 nm, 1034 nm. Emission (CH2C12, ex. 885 nm): 1060 nm.
Figure imgf000103_0002
4-((E)-2-((E)-3-(2-((E)-7-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4-ylidene)ethylidene)-2- chlorocyclohex-l-en-l-yl)vinyl)-7-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)-2-phenylchromenylium tetrafluoroborate (8)
7-(9H-carbazol-9-yl)-4-methyl-2-phenylchromenylium tetrafluoroborate (12h): (29.9 mg, 0.0632 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), N-[(3-(anilinomethylene)-2-chloro-l-cyclohexen-l- yl)methylene]aniline hydrochloride (10.3 mg, 0.287 mmol, 0.45 equiv.), .and 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4- methyl pyridine (42.5 mg, 0.207 mmol, 3.3 equiv.) were added to a 25 mL flame-dried Schlenk flask and dissolved in n-butanol (0.70 mL) and toluene (0.50 mL), freeze-pump-thawed x3, and heated to 90 °C for 17 min. The crude product was purified by column chromatography with a gradient of DCM plus 1 - 7% MeCN and subsequently washed with cold toluene to produce a dark purple solid (3.6 mg, 0.0036 mmol, 13%). Rf = 0.5 in 9: 1 DCM/EtOH. 1H NMR (500 MHz, Methylene Chlonde-d2) d 8.69 (d, J= 13.0 Hz, 2H), 8.42 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 2H), 8.21 - 8.14 (m, 8H), 7.98 (s, 2H), 7.92 (d, J= 7.7 Hz, 2H), 7.83 (s, 2H), 7.72 -7.64 (m, 10H), 7.52 (t, J= 7.3 Hz, 4H), 7.41 (t, J= 7.3 Hz, 4H), 7.35 (d, J= 13.7 Hz, 2H), 3.02 - 2.95 (m, 4H), 2.16 - 2.08 (m, 2H). HRMS (ESI+) Calculated for C64H44C1N02+ [M]+: 907.3086; found: 911.3107. Absorbance (CH2C12): 452 nm, 910 nm, 1021 nm. Emission (CH2C12, ex. 885 nm): 1048 nm.
Figure imgf000104_0001
7-( f Tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino)-4-(E)-2-((E)-3-(2-( (E)- 7-(( tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino)-2- phenyl-4H-chromen-4-ylidene)ethylidene)-2-chlorocyclohex-l-en-l-yl)vinyl)-2- phenylchromenylium tetrafluoroborate (9)
The crude reaction mixture containing 7-methoxy-4-methyl-2-phenylchromenylium chloride (12i) was transferred to a flame-dried 1.5 mL vial charged with N-[(3-(anilinomethylene)- 2-chloro-l-cyclohexen-l-yl)methylene]aniline hydrochloride (6.7 mg, 0.019 mmol, 0.40 equiv.), and 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methyl pyridine (53.5 mg, 0.261 mmol, 5.6 equiv.) and sodium sulfate (44 mg). Dioxane (0.250 mL) was added, the mixture was freeze-pump-thawed x3, and it was heated to 95 °C for 14 min. The crude mixture was evaporated directly onto silica gel and purified via column chromatography in a DCM/acetone solvent mixture with a gradient of 20: 1 to 1 : 1 , yielding a brick red solid (13.9 mg, 0.0155 mmol, 33%, over 2 steps). Rf = 0.4 in 9: 1 DCM/EtOH. 1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) d 10.28 (s, 2H), 8.50 - 8.36 (m, 4H), 8.32 - 8.24 (m, 4H), 8.06 - 7.97 (m, 4H), 7.71 - 7.59 (m, 6H), 7.52 (dd, J= 9.1, 2.2 Hz, 2H), 7.29 (d, J= 13.7 Hz, 2H), 2.90 (t, J= 5.0 Hz, 4H), 1.92 (p, J= 7.7, 7.3 Hz, 2H), 1.54 (s, 18H). HRMS (ESI+) Calculated for C50H48C1NO6+ [M]+: 807.3195; found: 807.3187. Absorbance (CH2C12): 445 nm, 891 nm, 998 nm. Emission (CH2C12, ex. 885 nm): 1022 nm.
Figure imgf000105_0001
4-((E)-2-((E)-2-chloro-3-(2-((E)-7-methoxy-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4- ylidene)ethylidene)cyclohex-l-en-l-yl)vinyl)-7-methoxy-2-phenylchromenylium chloride (10)
7-methoxy-4-methyl-2-phenylchromenylium chloride (12j) (150 mg, 0.523 mmol, 1.0 equiv.), N-[(3-(anilinomethylene)-2-chloro- 1 -cyclohexen- 1 -yl)methylene] aniline hydrochloride (75 mg, 0.21 mmol, 0.40 equiv.) and 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-methylpyridine (327 mg, 1.59 mmol, 3.0 equiv.) were dissolved in toluene (4.05 mL) and n-butanol (1.25 mL) and heated to 100 °C for 15 min. The solution was cooled to rt then cooled with ice. Toluene (10 mL) was added and a reddish brown solid precipitated and was collected through filtration and washed with an additional 25 mL of toluene. The crude product was purified through Soxhlet extraction with toluene for 4 hours at 130 °C to give a brick red solid. (47 mg, 0.070 mmol, 33%). Rf = 0.4 m 9: 1 DCM/EtOH. lH NMR (400 MHz, Methylene Chlonde-d2) d 8.55 (d, J = 13.6 Hz, 2H), 8.14 - 8.02 (m, 4H), 7.69 (s, 2H), 7.65 (t, J = 6.8 Hz, 4H), 7.40 - 7.23 (m, 6H), 7.25 - 7.09 (m, 4H), 4.01 (s, 3H), 2.93 - 2.84 (m, 4H), 2.08 - 1.96 (m, 2H). HRMS (ESI+) Calculated for C42H34C1N04+ [M]+: 637.2140; found: 637.2124. Absorbance (CH2C12): 441 nm, 880 nm, 984 nm. Emission (CH2C12, ex. 885 nm): 1008 nm.
Figure imgf000106_0001
7-(Dimethylamino)-4-( (IE, 3E)-5-( (E)- 7-(dimethylamino)-2-phenyl-4H-chromen-4- ylidene)penta-l,3-dien-l-yl)-2-phenylchromenylium tetrafluoroborate
7-(diethylamino)-4-methyl-2-phenylchromenylium tetrafluoroborate (12a) (164 mg, 0.467 mmol, 1.00 equiv.), malonaldehyde bis(phenylimine) monohydrochloride (59.0 mg, 0.228 mmol, 0.490 equiv.) and sodium acetate (128 mg, 1.25 mmol, 2.68 equiv.) were added to a 25 mL Schlenk tube under a N2 atmosphere. Acetic anhydride (4.0 mL) was added and the solution was freeze- pump-thawed x3 before heating to 100 °C for 65 min. The reaction was cooled, ~16 mL of toluene was added, and the product was collected by vacuum filtration. The product was rinsed with toluene and water before drying in vacuo. A bronze solid resulted (127 mg, 0.194 mmol, 86%). lH NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) d 8.20 (t, J = 12.9 Hz, 2H), 8.13 - 8.03 (m, 4H), 7.99 (d, J = 9.4 Hz, 2H), 7.66 (s, 2H), 7.62 - 7.53 (m, 6H), 7.08 (d, J = 13.3 Hz, 2H), 6.91 (dd, J = 9.3, 2.6 Hz, 2H), 6.83 (t, J = 12.4 Hz, 1H), 6.77 (d, J = 2.6 Hz, 2H), 3.13 (s, 12H). 13C NMR (126 MHz,
DMSO-d6) d 156.1, 155.3, 154.1, 148.9, 145.5, 131.5, 131.1, 129.1, 126.0, 125.8, 115.3, 113.1,
110.8, 101.5, 97.3 {peak at 38.9-40.1 beneath DMSO- d6 solvent peak.} Absorbance (CH2C12): 862 nm. Emission (CH2C12, ex. 755 nm): 883 nm.
Figure imgf000106_0002
2-(Tert-butyl)-4-((lE,3E)-5-((E)-2-(tert-butyl)-7-(dimethylamino)-4H-chromen-4-ylidene)penta- 1 ,3-dien- l-yl)-7-(dimethylamino)chromenylium tetrafluoroborate
l l-(tert-butyl)-9-methyl-2,3,6,7-tetrahydro-lH,5H-pyrano[2,3-f]pyrido[3,2,l-ij]quinolin- 12-ium tetrafluoroborate (150 mg, 0.453 mmol, 1.00 equiv.), malonaldehyde bis(phenylimine) monohydrochloride (57.3 mg, 0.221 mmol, 0.490 equiv.), and sodium acetate (117 mg, 1.43 mmol, 3.16 equiv.) were added to a 25 mL Schlenk tube under a N2 atmosphere. Acetic anhydride (3.5 mL) was added and the solution was freeze-pump-thawed x3 before heating to 120 °C for 60 min. The reaction was cooled, ~14 mL of toluene was added, and the product was collected by vacuum filtration. The product was rinsed with toluene until filtrate runs clear, followed by a water rinse. The product was further purified by column chromatography, after dry-loading onto silica, in a three-way gradient of 1 : 1 toluene/dichloromethane plus 1% ethanol to 0: 1 toluene/dichloromethane plus 12% ethanol. An iridescent dark purple solid resulted (76.6 mg, 0.125 mmol, 57%). 1H NMR (500 MHz, Acetomtrile-d3) d 7.93 (t, J = 13.0 Hz, 2H), 7.87 (d, J = 9.4 Hz, 2H), 6.91 (dd, J = 9.3, 2.6 Hz, 2H), 6.86 (s, 2H), 6.83 (d, J = 13.5 Hz, 2H), 6.68 (t, J = 12.5 Hz, 1H), 6.61 (d, J = 2.6 Hz, 2H), 3.10 (s, 12H), 1.40 (s, 18H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, Acetomtrile- d3) d 171.3, 157.5, 155.6, 150.1, 148.2, 128.3, 126.5, 114.5, 114.0, 112.0, 100.3, 98.1, 40.6, 37.5, 28.2. Absorbance (CH2C12): 819 nm. Emission (CH2C12, ex. 755 nm): 836 nm.
Figure imgf000107_0001
1 l-(Tert-butyl)-9-((lE, 3E,5E)-5-(l l-(tert-butyl)-2, 3, 6, 7 -tetrahydro- lH,5H,9H-pyrano [2,3- J]pyrido[ 3, 2, l-ij]quinolin-9-ylidene)penta-l, 3-dien-l-yl)-2, 3, 6, 7-tetrahydro-lH, 5H-pyrano[ 2, 3- j]pyrido[ 3, 2, l-ij]quinolin-12-ium tetrafluoroborate
l l-(tert-butyl)-9-methyl-2,3,6,7-tetrahydro-lH,5H-pyrano[2,3-f]pyrido[3,2,l-ij]quinolin- 12-ium tetrafluoroborate (150 mg, 0.391 mmol, 1.00 equiv.), malonaldehyde bis(phenylimine) monohydrochloride (49.7 mg, 0.192 mmol, 0.490 equiv.), and sodium acetate (99.1 mg, 1.21 mmol, 3.09 equiv.) were added to a 25 mL Schlenk tube under a N2 atmosphere. Acetic anhydride (3.5 mL) was added and the solution was freeze-pump-thawed x3 before heating to 100 °C for 60 min. The reaction was cooled, ~10 mL of toluene was added, and the product was collected by vacuum filtration. A bronze solid resulted (111 mg, 0.155 mmol, 81%). 1H NMR (500 MHz, Acetomtrile-d3) d 7.85 (t, J = 13.0 Hz, 2H), 7.51 (s, 2H), 6.81 (s, 2H), 6.78 (d, J = 13.6 Hz, 2H), 6.61 (t, J = 12.5 Hz, 1H), 3.36 (q, J = 6.5 Hz, 8H), 2.85 (t, J = 6.4 Hz, 4H), 2.81 (t, J = 6.1 Hz, 4H), 1.99 - 1.96 (m, 8H), 1.39 (s, 18H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, Acetomtrile-d3) d 170.0, 152.6, 149.1, 148.4, 146.9, 127.3, 124.1, 122.3, 113.7, 111.6, 107.0, 99.7, 50.9, 50.4, 37.6, 28.5, 28.4, 21.8, 20.91, 20.87. Absorbance (CH2C12): 852 nm. Emission (CH2C12, ex. 755 nm): 872 nm.
Figure imgf000108_0001
(dimethylamino)-4H-chromen-4-ylidene)penta-l, 3-dien-l-yl)-7-(dimethylamino)chromenylium tetrafluoroborate
2-((3r,5r,7r)-adamantan-l-yl)-7-(dimethylamino)-4-methylchromenylium
tetrafluoroborate (15.1 mg, 0.017 mmol, 1.00 equiv.), malonaldehyde bis(pheny limine) monohydrochloride (4.5 mg, 0.020 mmol, 0.470 equiv.), and sodium acetate (10.2 mg, 0.124 mmol, 3.37 equiv.) were added to a 25 mL Schlenk tube under a N2 atmosphere. Acetic anhydride (0.41 mL) was added and the solution was freeze-pump-thawed x3 before heating to 100 °C for 70 min. The reaction was cooled, ~5 mL of toluene was added, and the product was collected by vacuum filtration. An iridescent dark purple solid resulted (10.5 mg, 0.0137 mmol, 79%). 1HNMR (500 MHz, Methylene Chlonde-d2) d 7.87 (d, J = 9.4 Hz, 2H), 7.80 (t, J = 12.9 Hz, 2H), 6.91 (dd, J = 9.3, 2.6 Hz, 2H), 6.82 (d, J = 13.4 Hz, 2H), 6.76-6.71 (m, 4H), 6.57 (d, J = 2.6 Hz, 2H), 3.16 (s, 12H), 2.16 (t, J = 3.1 Hz, 6H), 2.05 (d, J = 2.8 Hz, 12H), 1.89 - 1.75 (m, 12H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, Methylene Chlonde-d2) d 170.9, 157.1, 154.8, 148.9, 147.9, 127.3, 125.8, 113.5, 113.3, 111.7, 99.9, 97.6, 40.6, 40.2, 39.0, 36.8, 28.6. Absorbance (CH2C12): 818 nm. Emission (CH2C12, ex. 755 nm): 837 nm.
Figure imgf000108_0002
2-(Tert-butyl)-4-((E)-2-((E)-3-(2-((E)-2-(tert-butyl)-7-(dimethylamino)-4H-chromen-4- ylidene)ethylidene)-2-chlorocyclohex-l-en-l-yl)vinyl)-7-(dimethylamino)chromenylium tetrafluoroborate l l-(tert-butyl)-9-methyl-2,3,6,7-tetrahydro-lH,5H-pyrano[2,3-f]pyrido[3,2,l-ij]quinolin- 12-ium tetrafluoroborate (300 mg, 0.900 mmol, 1.00 equiv.), N-[(3-(anilinomethylene)-2-chloro- 1 -cyclohexen- 1 -yl)methylene] aniline hydrochloride (153 mg, 0.426 mmol, 0.47 equiv.) and 2,6- di-tert-butyl-4-methyl pyridine (555 mg, 2.70 mmol, 2.98 equiv.) were added to a flame-dried 50 mL Schlenk tube under a N2 atmosphere. Toluene (2.1 mL) and n-butanol (4.8 mL) were added and the solution was freeze-pump-thawed x3 before heating to 100 °C for 3 h. The reaction was cooled and evaporated. The product was precipitated in toluene and collected by vacuum filtration, washing with -200 mL toluene, -50 mL trifluorotoluene, -50 mL cold THF. The product was further purified by column chromatography after dry-loading onto silica in dichloromethane plus a gradient of 0.5-5% ethanol. After a second column in a three-way gradient of 3:7 toluene/dichloromethane plus 0.5 % ethanol to 0: 1 toluene/di chloromethane plus 5% ethanol, the procedure resulted in a red iridescent product (9.2 mg, 0.02 mmol, 39%). 1H NMR (500 MHz, Acetomtrile-d3) d 8.00 (d, J = 13.8 Hz, 2H), 7.82 (d, J = 9.3 Hz, 2H), 6.86 (dd, J = 9.4, 2.6 Hz, 2H), 6.79 (s, 2H), 6.73 (d, J = 13.8 Hz, 2H), 6.50 (d, J = 2.5 Hz, 2H), 3.04 (s, 12H), 2.71 (t, J = 6.3 Hz, 4H), 1.89 (p, J = 6.2 Hz, 2H), 1.42 (s, 18H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, Acetomtrile-d3) d 170.8, 157.2, 155.3, 146.8, 146.1, 139.1, 130.5, 126.3, 113.9, 112.9, 112.3, 100.4, 98.0, 40.5, 37.4, 28.2, 27.6, 21.8. Absorbance (CH2C12): 975 nm. Emission (CH2CI2, ex. 885 nm): 996 nm.
Figure imgf000109_0001
2-((3r, 5r, 7r)-adamantan-l-yl)-4-(E)-2-((E)-3-(2-((E)-2-((3r,5r, 7r)-adamantan-l-yl)-7- (dimethylamino)-4H-chromen-4-ylidene)ethylidene)-2-chlorocyclohex-l-en-l-yl)vinyl)-7- (dimethylamino)chromenylium tetrafluoroborate
2-(Tert-butyl)-7-(dimethylamino)-4-methylchromenylium tetrafluoroborate (30.5 mg, 0.075 mmol, 1.00 equiv.), N-[(3-(anilinomethylene)- 2-chloro-l-cyclohexen-l- yl)methylene]aniline hydrochloride (11.9 mg, 0.033 mmol, 0.440 equiv.) and 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4- methyl pyridine (46.1 mg, 0.225 mmol, 3.01 equiv.) were added to a flame-dried 25 mL Schlenk tube under a N2 atmosphere. Toluene (0.20 mL) and n-butanol (0.50 mL) were added and the solution was freeze-pump-thawed x3 before heating to 100 °C for 6.5 h. The reaction was cooled and evaporated. The crude product was purified by column chromatography after dry-loading onto silica in dichloromethane plus a gradient of 0.5-4% ethanol. After a second column in a three-way gradient of 3:7 toluene/dichloromethane plus 0.4 % ethanol to 0: 1 toluene/dichloromethane plus 7% ethanol, the procedure resulted in a dark blue product (9.2 mg, 0.02 mmol, 32%). 1H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) d 8.11 (d, J = 9.5 Hz, 2H), 7.82 (d, J = 13.5 Hz, 2H), 6.93 (dd, J = 9.3, 2.5 Hz, 2H), 6.87 (d, J = 13.7 Hz, 2H), 6.68 - 6.57 (m, 4H), 2.99 (s, 12H), 2.72 (m, 4H), 2.15 - 2.08 (m, 6H), 2.04 - 2.02 (m, 12H), 1.84 - 1.76 (m, 14H). 13C NMR (126 MHz, DMSO-d6) d 169.0, 155.8, 154.2, 145.0, 144.4, 137.7, 129.4, 126.2, 113.3, 111.84, 111.81, 99.2, 97.0, {two peaks at 40.4-38.8, beneath DMSO-d6 solvent peak} 37.9, 35.9, 27.6, 26.5, 20.8. Absorbance (CH2C12): 977 nm. Emission (CH2C12, ex. 885 nm): 997 nm.
Figure imgf000110_0001
10-(Dimethylamino)-5, 6-dihydro- 7H-benzo[ c ]xanthen-7-one
3-(dimethylamino)phenol (9.4 mg, 0.069 mmol, 1.0 equiv.) and ethyl 1-oxo-l, 2,3,4- tetrahydronaphthalene-2-carboxylate (22.4 mg, 0.10 mmol, 1.5 equiv) were added to a glass microwave vial and heated to 240 °C for 3 min. The crude product was loaded directly onto a silica column and purified via a hexanes: ethyl acetate gradient of 10/1 to 3/1 to yield pure product (6.8 mg, 0.023 mmol, 34%). ¾ NMR (300 MHz, Chloroform-d) d 8.07 (dd, J= 9.1, 3.2 Hz, 1H), 8.00 - 7.75 (m, 1H), 7.38-7.33 (m, 2H), 7.28-7.25 (s, 1H), 6.78 (d, J= 8.9 Hz, 1H), 6.60 (d, J= 3.2 Hz, 1H), 3.12 (s, 6H), 2.94-2.91 (m, 6H). MS (ESI+) Calculated for C42H34CINOC [M]+: 292.4; found: 292.0. INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE
All publications and patents mentioned herein are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety as if each individual publication or patent was specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference. In case of conflict, the present application, including any definitions herein, will control.
EQUIVALENTS
While specific embodiments of the subject invention have been discussed, the above specification is illustrative and not restrictive. Many variations of the invention will become apparent to those skilled in the art upon review of this specification and the claims below. The full scope of the invention should be determined by reference to the claims, along with their full scope of equivalents, and the specification, along with such variations.

Claims

1. A compound of formula I or formula II:
Figure imgf000112_0001
wherein:
A and B are each independently selected from a bicyclic, tricyclic, or tetracyclic heteroaryl; wherein A and B are each independently substituted with one or more R7a and/or R7b; each instance of p is independently 0, 1, or 2;
X is H, halo, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkynyl, N(R3)2, P(R3)2, PO(R3)2, SR4, S(0)R4, S(0)2R4, OR4, SeR4, Se(0)R4, Se(0)2R4, azido, cyano, haloalkyl (such as perfluoroalkyl), hydroxyl;
R1 and R2 are each independently selected from F, D, or T; or R1 and R2 together complete a cycloalkenyl ring, a heterocyclyl ring, or a polycyclyl ring system;
R3 is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; and
R4 is H, alkyl, or aryl;
wherein each R7a and/or R7b is independently selected from H, alkoxy, acyl, heteroaryl,
sulfonate, carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, halo, aryl, amino, alkylamino, Ci-6 alkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, haloalkyl, aralkenyl (preferably arylethenyl), aralkynyl (preferably arylethynyl), hetaralkenyl (preferably heteroarylethenyl), hetaralkynyl (preferably heteroarylethynyl), and heterocyclyl;
or two adjacent R7a and/or R7b groups combine to form a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring
including the atoms to which they are attached.
2. The compound of claim 1, wherein R1 and R2 are the same.
3. The compound of claim 1 or 2, wherein R1 is F.
4. The compound of claim 1 or 2, wherein R1 is D.
5. The compound of claim 1 or 2, wherein R1 is T.
6. The compound of any one of claims 1-5, wherein R2 is F.
7. The compound of any one of claims 1-5, wherein R2 is D.
8. The compound of any one of claims 1-5, wherein R2 is T.
9. The compound of claim 1, wherein the compound is of Formula la or Ila:
Figure imgf000113_0001
wherein:
A and B are each independently selected from a bicyclic, tricyclic, or tetracyclic heteroaryl; wherein A and B are each independently substituted with one or more R7a and/or R7b; each instance of p is independently 0, 1, or 2;
X is H, halo, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkynyl, N(R3)2, P(R3)2, PO(R3)2, SR4, OR4, SeR4, azido, cyano, haloalkyl (such as perfluoroalkyl), hydroxyl;
R1 and R2 together complete a cycloalkenyl ring, a heterocyclyl ring, or a polycyclyl ring system;
R3 is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; and
R4 is H, alkyl, or aryl;
wherein each R7a and/or R7b is independently selected from H, alkoxy, acyl, heteroaryl,
sulfonate, carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, halo, aryl, amino, alkylamino, Ci-6 alkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, haloalkyl, aralkenyl (preferably arylethenyl), aralkynyl (preferably arylethynyl), hetaralkenyl (preferably heteroarylethenyl), hetaralkynyl (preferably heteroarylethynyl), and heterocyclyl; or two adjacent R7a and/or R7b groups combine to form a carbocyclic or heterocyclic ring including the atoms to which they are attached.
10. The compound of any one of claims 1-9 , wherein at least one of A and B is not:
Figure imgf000114_0001
11. The compound of any one of claims 1-10, wherein the compound of formula I is not:
Figure imgf000114_0002
Figure imgf000115_0001
12. The compound of any one of claims 1-9, wherein the compound of formula I is not:
Figure imgf000116_0001
13. The compound of any one of claims 9-12, wherein R1 and R2 together complete a cycloalkenyl ring.
14. The compound of any one of claims 1-13, wherein A and B are different.
15. The compound of any one of claims 1-14, wherein:
A is substituted by one or more substituents independently selected from R7a and R71’;
B is substituted by one or more substituents independently selected from R7a and R71’;
each instance of R7a and R71’ is independently selected from alkyl (such as haloalkyl, fluoroalkyl or sulfonatoalkyl), alkoxy (such as haloalkyloxy, fluoroalkyloxy or sulfonatoalkyloxy), acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, N(R6)R6, sulfonate, carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, or halo; and each instance of R6 is independently selected from H, alkyl, such as fluoroalkyl or sulfonatoalkyl, hydroxyl, alkyloxy, aryloxy, acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; or two instances of R6 connected to the same N may complete a heterocyclyl.
16. The compound of any one of claims 1-15, wherein:
A is substituted by one or more substituents independently selected from R7a and R71’;
B is substituted by one or more substituents independently selected from R7a and R71’;
each instance of R7a and R71’ is independently selected from alkyl (such as haloalkyl, fluoroalkyl or sulfonatoalkyl), alkoxy (such as haloalkyloxy, fluoroalkyloxy or sulfonatoalkyloxy), acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, N(R6)R6, sulfonate, carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, or halo; and
each instance of R6 is independently selected from H, alkyl, such as fluoroalkyl or
sulfonatoalkyl, acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; or two instances of R6 connected to the same N may complete a heterocyclyl.
17. The compound of any one of claims 1-16, wherein:
A is substituted by one or more substituents independently selected from R7a and R71’;
B is substituted by one or more substituents independently selected from R7a and R71’;
each instance of R7a and R71’ is independently selected from alkyl, such as fluoroalkyl or
sulfonatoalkyl, acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, N(R6)R6, sulfonate, or carbonate; and
each instance of R6 is independently selected from H, alkyl, such as fluoroalkyl or
sulfonatoalkyl, acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; or two instances of R6 connected to the same N may complete a heterocyclyl.
18. The compound of any one of claims 1-17, wherein at least one R7a or R71’ is a water- solubilizing group.
19. The compound of claim 18, wherein the water-solubilizing group is selected from carboxylate group, a sulfonate, an anionic-substituted alkyl, or an anionic-substituted alkyl ether.
20. The compound of claim 18, wherein the water-solubilizing group is a poly(ethylene glycol), a poly(oxazoline), or a poly(zwitterion).
21. The compound of claim 18, wherein the water-solubilizing group is a poly(ethylene glycol), or a poly(oxazoline).
22. The compound of claim 20 or 21, wherein the molecular weight of the poly(ethylene glycol), a poly(oxazoline), or a poly(zwitterion) is about 100 daltons to about 5,000 daltons.
23. The compound of claim 20 or 21, wherein the molecular weight of the poly(ethylene glycol) or a poly(oxazoline) is about 1,000 daltons to about 5,000 daltons.
24. The compound of any one of claims 1-23, wherein at least one R7a or R76 is an electron- withdrawing group.
25. The compound of claim 24, wherein the electron- withdrawing group is selected from haloalkyl, cyano, sulfonate, sulfonatoalkyl, sulfonatoalkyloxy, carboxyl, ester, amide, halo, nitro, alkylammonium, amine oxide, or haloalkyl, such as trifluoromethyl.
26. The compound of any one of claims 1-17, wherein at least one R7a or R7b is selected from fluoroalkyl.
27. The compound of any one of claims 1-26, wherein at least one R7a or R76 is N(R6)R6.
28. The compound of any one of claims 1-27, wherein:
A and B are independently selected from
Figure imgf000118_0001
W is selected from O, SO, SO2, PR6, PO2H, POR6, SeO, Se02, TeO, Te02, SIR6 2, GeR6 2, BH, BOH, or BR6;
Y is selected from 0+, S+, Se+, Te+, SiR, GeR6, N, NR6+, or NO; and A and B are independently optionally substituted with one or more R7a and/or R76, up to the limits of valence.
29. The compound of any one of claims 1-28, wherein:
A and B are independently selected from
Figure imgf000119_0001
wherein Q is N(R6)R6 OR6, SR6, SO(R6)2, SeR6, SeOR6, SeO(R6)2, P(R6)R6, PO(R6)R6, B(R6)2, or halo; and
n is 0, 1 , 2, 3, 4, or 5 subject to the limits of valence, preferably 0 or 1.
30. The compound of any one of claims 1-28, wherein:
A and B are independently selected from
Figure imgf000119_0002
wherein Q is N(R6)R6 or OR6; and
n is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 subject to the limits of valence, preferably 0 or 1.
31. The compound of any one of claims 1-28, wherein:
A and B are independently selected from
Figure imgf000120_0001
wherein Q is N(R6)R6 or OR6;
R7ib is C(R31)(R32), arylene, heteroarylene, cycloalkylene, or heterocyclylene;
R31 and R32 are each independently selected from H or alkyl (e.g., methyl);
n is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 subject to the limits of valence, preferably 0 or 1 ; and
o is 0, 1, 2, or 3.
32. The compound of claim 31, wherein R7ib is C(R31)(R32); and R31 and R32 are each alkyl (e.g., methyl).
33. The compound of claim 31 or 32, wherein Rzib is arylene (e.g., phenylene).
34. The compound of claim 31, wherein A and B are independently selected from
Figure imgf000120_0002
Figure imgf000121_0001
35. The compound of any one of claims 31-34, wherein o is 2.
36. The compound of any one of claims 29-35, wherein at least one R7a or R71’ is aryl, trifluoromethyl, tert-butyl, H, aralkenyl, aralkynyl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclyl.
37. The compound of any one of claims 29-35, wherein at least one R7a or R71’ is alkyloxy (e.g., methoxy), or cycloalkyl (e.g., adamantyl).
38. The compound of any one of claims 29-35, wherein at least one R7a or R71’ is phenyl, heterocyclyl, polycylic aromatic, aralkenyl, or aralkynyl.
39. The compound of any one of claims 29-38, wherein at least one R7a or R71’ is substituted with one or more R7 , wherein R7 is selected from alkyl (such as haloalkyl, fluoroalkyl or sulfonatoalkyl), alkoxy (such as haloalkyloxy, fluoroalkyloxy or sulfonatoalkyloxy), acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, N(R6)R6, sulfonate, carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, or halo.
40. The compound of any one of claims 29-39, wherein the R7 on the at least one R7a or R7b is at the para position.
41. The compound of any one of claims 29-39, wherein the R7 on the at least one R7a or R7b is at the ortho position.
42. The compound of any one of claims 29-39, wherein the R7 on the at least one R7a or R7b is at the meta position.
43. The compound of any one of claims 1-42, wherein the compound is selected from
Figure imgf000122_0001
Figure imgf000123_0001
wherein Ar is aryl; and
m is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5, preferably 0 or 1.
44. The compound of any one of claims 1-43, wherein the compound is
Figure imgf000123_0002
45. The compound of claim 44, wherein R7a and R71’ are each aryl (e.g., phenyl).
46. The compound of claims 44 or 45, wherein at least one R7a or R7b is substituted with one or more R7 , wherein R7 is selected from alkyl (such as alkyl (e.g., methyl), haloalkyl, fluoroalkyl (e.g., trifluoromethyl) or sulfonatoalkyl), alkoxy (such as methoxy, haloalkyloxy, fluoroalkyloxy or sulfonatoalkyloxy), acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, sulfonate, carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, amino (e.g., dimethyl amino) or halo (e.g., fluoro, chloro, or bromo).
47. The compound of any one of claims 1 -46, wherein A and B are independently selected
Figure imgf000124_0001
48. The compound of any one of claims 1-47, wherein each R6 is alkyl (e.g., methyl or ethyl).
49. The compound of any one of claims 1-48, wherein two instances of R6 connected to the same N complete a heterocyclyl (e.g., azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl) or a heteroaryl (e.g., carbazolyl),
50. The compound of any one of claims 1-49, wherein X is Cl.
51. The compound of any one of claims 1-43 and 46-50, wherein at least one of A and B is a tricyclic moiety.
52. The compound of claim 30, wherein at least one of A and B is carbazolyl.
53. The compound of any one of claims 1-52, wherein at least one of A and B is substituted with N(Rn)R12, wherein R11 is cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl, and R12 is selected from H, alkyl, acyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; or wherein R11 and R12 together complete a heterocyclyl.
54. The compound of any one of claims 1-53, wherein at least one of A and B is substituted with a 4-8 member N-linked heterocyclyl.
55. The compound of claim 53 or 54, wherein at least one of A and B is
Figure imgf000124_0002
56. The compound of any one of claims 1-55, wherein at least one of A and B is substituted with sulfate, sulfonate, such as sulfonatoalkyl, or carboxylate.
57. The compound of any one of claims 1-55, wherein at least one of A and B is substituted with a fluoroalkyl.
58. The compound of claim 57, wherein the compound is a compound of formula I.
59. The compound of claim 57, wherein the compound is a compound of formula II.
60. The compound of any one of claims 1-59, wherein at least one of A and B is:
Figure imgf000125_0001
wherein each instance of q is independently selected from 0, 1, 2, or 3.
61. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of any one of claims 1-60.
62. A method of delivering a compound or composition of any one of claims 1-61 to a living animal, comprising administering the compound or composition to the living animal.
63. A method of obtaining an image comprising:
illuminating a compound of any one of claims 1-61 with excitation light, thereby causing the compound to emit fluorescence; and
detecting the fluorescence.
64. The method of claim 63, wherein the image is obtained in vivo.
65. The method of claim 63, comprising administering the compound to a living animal.
66. A method of administering a therapy comprising administering a compound or composition of any one of claims 1-61.
67. The method of claim 66, further comprising illuminating the compound with excitation light.
68. The method of claim 67, comprising generating singlet oxygen by illuminating the compound with excitation light.
69. A method of preparing a compound of any one of claims 1-60, comprising:
providing a starting material compound of formula I or formula II wherein A and B are different:
Figure imgf000126_0001
contacting the starting material compound with a basic amine, thereby producing a half-dye intermediate;
providing a compound of formula (IV):
R8-D (IV); and
contacting the half-dye intermediate with the compound of formula (IV), thereby producing the compound;
wherein:
A and B are each independently selected from a bicyclic, tricyclic, or tetracyclic heteroaryl; wherein A and B are each independently substituted with one or more R7a and/or R7b; each instance of p is independently 0, 1, or 2;
X is H, halo, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkynyl, N(R3)2, P(R3)2, PO(R3)2, SR4, S(0)R4, S(0)2R4, OR4, SeR4, Se(0)R4, Se(0)2R4, azido, cyano, haloalkyl (such as perfluoroalkyl), hydroxyl;
R1 and R2 are each independently selected from F, D, or T; or R1 and R2 together complete a cycloalkenyl ring, a heterocyclyl ring, or a polycyclyl ring system; R3 is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; and
R4 is H, alkyl, or aryl;
wherein each R7a and/or R7b is independently selected from H, alkoxy, acyl, heteroaryl,
sulfonate, carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, halo, aryl, amino, alkylamino, Ci-6 alkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, haloalkyl, aralkenyl (preferably arylethenyl), aralkynyl (preferably arylethynyl), hetaralkenyl (preferably heteroarylethenyl), hetaralkynyl (preferably heteroarylethynyl), and heterocyclyl;
or two adjacent R7a and/or R7b groups combine to form a carbocycbc or heterocyclic ring
including the atoms to which they are attached.
70. A method of preparing a compound of any one of claims 1-60, comprising:
providing a starting material compound of formula I or formula II wherein A and B are different:
Figure imgf000127_0001
contacting the starting material compound with a basic amine, thereby producing a half-dye intermediate;
providing a compound of formula (IV):
R8-D (IV); and
contacting the half-dye intermediate with the compound of formula (IV), thereby producing the compound;
wherein:
A and B are each independently selected from a bicyclic, tricyclic, or tetracyclic heteroaryl; wherein A and B are each independently substituted with one or more R7a and/or R7b;
each instance of p is independently 0, 1, or 2;
A and B are different;
X is H, halo, aryl, heteroaryl, alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, alkynyl, N(R3)2, P(R3)2, PO(R3)2, SR4, OR4, SeR4, azido, cyano, haloalkyl (such as perfluoroalkyl), hydroxyl;
R1 and R2 together complete a cycloalkenyl ring, a heterocyclyl ring, or a polycyclyl ring system; R3 is alkyl, aryl, or heteroaryl; and
R4 is H, alkyl, or aryl;
wherein each R7a and/or R7b is independently selected from H, alkoxy, acyl, heteroaryl,
sulfonate, carbonate, cyano, ester, amide, halo, aryl, amino, alkylamino, Ci-6 alkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, haloalkyl, aralkenyl (preferably arylethenyl), aralkynyl (preferably arylethynyl), hetaralkenyl (preferably heteroarylethenyl), hetaralkynyl (preferably heteroarylethynyl), and heterocyclyl;
or two adjacent R7a and/or R7b groups combine to form a carbocycbc or heterocyclic ring
including the atoms to which they are attached;
and
R8 is alkyl, such as methyl.
PCT/US2019/064790 2018-12-05 2019-12-05 Heterocyclyl polymethine ir chromophores WO2020118116A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP19892945.7A EP3891224A4 (en) 2018-12-05 2019-12-05 Heterocyclyl polymethine ir chromophores
US17/311,180 US20210363124A1 (en) 2018-12-05 2019-12-05 Heterocyclyl polymethine ir chromophores

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201862775788P 2018-12-05 2018-12-05
US62/775,788 2018-12-05

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020118116A1 true WO2020118116A1 (en) 2020-06-11

Family

ID=70974004

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2019/064790 WO2020118116A1 (en) 2018-12-05 2019-12-05 Heterocyclyl polymethine ir chromophores

Country Status (2)

Country Link
EP (1) EP3891224A4 (en)
WO (1) WO2020118116A1 (en)

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN112225721A (en) * 2020-10-21 2021-01-15 复旦大学 Acid-responsive near-infrared lysosome organic small-molecule fluorescent probe and preparation method and application thereof
CN112409590A (en) * 2020-10-21 2021-02-26 复旦大学 Organic nano assembly for biological imaging of second window in near infrared region and preparation method and application thereof
WO2022024942A1 (en) * 2020-07-29 2022-02-03 Agc株式会社 Optical filter
US11292778B2 (en) 2017-06-05 2022-04-05 The Regents Of The University Of California Heterocyclyl polymethine IR chromophores
CN114478587A (en) * 2021-12-29 2022-05-13 南京邮电大学 Near-infrared two-region dye, nano-particle, preparation method and application thereof

Citations (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0438123A2 (en) * 1990-01-16 1991-07-24 Showa Denko Kabushiki Kaisha Near infrared polymerization initiator
US5262549A (en) * 1991-05-30 1993-11-16 Polaroid Corporation Benzpyrylium dyes, and processes for their preparation and use
US6221574B1 (en) * 1998-10-05 2001-04-24 Agfa-Gevaert N.V. Cyanine dyes
JP3341141B2 (en) * 1995-11-21 2002-11-05 コニカ株式会社 Silver halide photographic material
JP2003176270A (en) * 2001-12-12 2003-06-24 Sharp Corp Enamine compound, electrophotographic receptor using the same and device for image formation
US20090200167A1 (en) * 2006-02-10 2009-08-13 Martin Kratzmeier Protein Analysis Using A Polymethine Marker Dye
WO2014081419A2 (en) * 2012-11-20 2014-05-30 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University High resolution imaging using near-infrared-ii fluorescence
WO2016081813A1 (en) * 2014-11-20 2016-05-26 The Research Foundation For The State University Of New York University At Buffalo Chalcogenopyrylium dyes, compositions comprising same, composite nanoparticles comprising same, and methods of making and using the same
JP2016113503A (en) * 2014-12-12 2016-06-23 日本化薬株式会社 Trifluoromethylated cyanine compound and near-infrared cut filter comprising the compound
WO2017025968A1 (en) * 2015-08-11 2017-02-16 Yissum Research Development Company Of The Hebrew University Of Jerusalem Ltd Radiation emitting peptide nucleic acid conjugates and uses thereof for diagnosis, imaging, and treatment of diseases, conditions and disorders
US9862682B2 (en) * 2016-01-08 2018-01-09 BroadPharm Functionalized pegylated cyanine compounds, pharmaceutical compositions, and methods of use thereof
WO2018187295A1 (en) * 2017-04-03 2018-10-11 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Near and shortwave infrared polymethine dyes
WO2018226720A1 (en) * 2017-06-05 2018-12-13 The Regents Of The University Of California Heterocyclyl polymethine ir chromophores

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP3980756A1 (en) * 2019-06-07 2022-04-13 Helmholtz Zentrum München - Deutsches Forschungszentrum für Gesundheit und Umwelt (GmbH) Method and device for imaging fluorescent proteins in near- and short-wave infrared
WO2020245446A1 (en) * 2019-06-07 2020-12-10 Helmholtz Zentrum München - Deutsches Forschungszentrum für Gesundheit und Umwelt (GmbH) System and method for real-time multicolor shortwave infrared fluorescence imaging

Patent Citations (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0438123A2 (en) * 1990-01-16 1991-07-24 Showa Denko Kabushiki Kaisha Near infrared polymerization initiator
US5262549A (en) * 1991-05-30 1993-11-16 Polaroid Corporation Benzpyrylium dyes, and processes for their preparation and use
JP3341141B2 (en) * 1995-11-21 2002-11-05 コニカ株式会社 Silver halide photographic material
US6221574B1 (en) * 1998-10-05 2001-04-24 Agfa-Gevaert N.V. Cyanine dyes
JP2003176270A (en) * 2001-12-12 2003-06-24 Sharp Corp Enamine compound, electrophotographic receptor using the same and device for image formation
US20090200167A1 (en) * 2006-02-10 2009-08-13 Martin Kratzmeier Protein Analysis Using A Polymethine Marker Dye
WO2014081419A2 (en) * 2012-11-20 2014-05-30 The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University High resolution imaging using near-infrared-ii fluorescence
WO2016081813A1 (en) * 2014-11-20 2016-05-26 The Research Foundation For The State University Of New York University At Buffalo Chalcogenopyrylium dyes, compositions comprising same, composite nanoparticles comprising same, and methods of making and using the same
JP2016113503A (en) * 2014-12-12 2016-06-23 日本化薬株式会社 Trifluoromethylated cyanine compound and near-infrared cut filter comprising the compound
WO2017025968A1 (en) * 2015-08-11 2017-02-16 Yissum Research Development Company Of The Hebrew University Of Jerusalem Ltd Radiation emitting peptide nucleic acid conjugates and uses thereof for diagnosis, imaging, and treatment of diseases, conditions and disorders
US9862682B2 (en) * 2016-01-08 2018-01-09 BroadPharm Functionalized pegylated cyanine compounds, pharmaceutical compositions, and methods of use thereof
WO2018187295A1 (en) * 2017-04-03 2018-10-11 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Near and shortwave infrared polymethine dyes
WO2018226720A1 (en) * 2017-06-05 2018-12-13 The Regents Of The University Of California Heterocyclyl polymethine ir chromophores

Non-Patent Citations (30)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"Fluorescent Methods to Study Biological Membranes", vol. 113, 31 December 2011, SPRINGER BERLIN HEIDELBERG, Berlin , Heidelberg, ISBN: 978-3-642-33128-2, ISSN: 1617-1306, article SERGIY M. YARMOLUK, VLADYSLAVA B. KOVALSKA, KATERYNA D. VOLKOVA: "Optimized dyes for protein and nucleic acid detection", pages: 161 - 199, XP055720047, DOI: 10.1007/978-3-642-18035-4_5 *
ALBERT GANDIOSO, MARTA PALAU, ROGER BRESOLí-OBACH, ALEX GALINDO, ANNA ROVIRA, MANEL BOSCH, SANTI NONELL, VICENTE MARCHáN: "High Photostability in Nonconventional Coumarins with Far-Red/NIR Emission through Azetidinyl Substitution", THE JOURNAL OF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY, vol. 83, no. 19, 5 October 2018 (2018-10-05), pages 11519 - 11531, XP055720034, ISSN: 0022-3263, DOI: 10.1021/acs.joc.8b01422 *
AMARESH MISHRA , RAJANI K BEHERA , PRADIPTA K BEHERA , BIJAYA K MISHRA , COPA B BEHERA : "Cyanines during the 1990s: a review", CHEMICAL REVIEWS, vol. 100, no. 6, 1 January 2000 (2000-01-01), pages 1973 - 2012, XP002466001, ISSN: 0009-2665, DOI: 10.1021/cr990402t *
BOULTON, A. J.; MCKILLOP, A.: "Chapter 2.02. Reactivity of Six-membered Rings", COMPREHENSIVE HETEROCYCLIC CHEMISTRY, vol. 2, 31 December 1984 (1984-12-31), pages 29 - 67, XP009527978, ISBN: 0-08-030702-7 *
DATABASE CAS 25 February 1999 (1999-02-25), "CA Index Name: 1H-Benzimidazolium, 5-(aminocarbonyl)-2-[5-[5-chloro-1,3-dihydro-6-(methoxycarbonyl)-3- methyl-1-(3-sulfopropyl)-2H-benzimidazol-2-ylidene]-1-fluoro-1,3-pentadien-1-yl]-1,3- diethyl", retrieved from STN Database accession no. 219991-09-0 *
DATABASE CAS 27 October 1995 (1995-10-27), "CA Index Name: Benzothiazolium, 3- ethyl-2-[5-(3-ethyl-2(3H)-benzothiazolylidene)-3-fluoro-1,3-pentadien-1-yl]-, salt with 1,3- pentadiene-1,1,5,5-tetracarbonitrile (1:1", retrieved from STN Database accession no. 169336-73-6 *
E. V. MIKUBAYEVA, N.S. KOBOTAYEVA, E.E. SIROTKINA: "Combined Sensitisation of Benzaldehyde Diphenylhydrazones: Effect of Hydrazone Structure on Sensitization Efficiency", EURASIAN CHEMICO-TECHNOLOGICAL JOURNAL, vol. 6, no. 2, 28 June 2004 (2004-06-28), pages 133 - 8, XP055720063, DOI: 10.18321/ectj602 *
ELIJAH THIMSEN, BRYCE SADTLER, MIKHAIL Y. BEREZIN: "Shortwave-infrared (SWIR) emitters for biological imaging: a review of challenges and opportunities", NANOPHOTONICS, vol. 6, no. 5, 1 September 2017 (2017-09-01), pages 1043 - 1054, XP055720048, DOI: 10.1515/nanoph-2017-0039 *
EMILY D. COSCO, JUSTIN R. CARAM, OLIVER T. BRUNS, DANIEL FRANKE, RACHAEL A. DAY, ERIK P. FARR, MOUNGI G. BAWENDI, ELLEN M. SLETTEN: "Flavylium Polymethine Fluorophores for Near- and Shortwave Infrared Imaging", ANGEWANDTE CHEMIE INTERNATIONAL EDITION, vol. 56, no. 42, 9 October 2017 (2017-10-09), pages 13126 - 9, XP055526747, ISSN: 1433-7851, DOI: 10.1002/anie.201706974 *
GADJEV N I , DELIGEORGIEV T G , DREXHAGE K H : "Near-infrared absorbing asymmetric trimethinecyanine dyes containing benz [c,d]indolium and pyrylium end groups", DYES AND PIGMENTS, vol. 17., no. 02., 1 January 1991 (1991-01-01), pages 62 - 153, XP000233082, ISSN: 0143-7208, DOI: 10.1016/0143-7208(91)87028-L *
HUA CHEN, WEIYING LIN, HAIJUN CUI, WENQING JIANG: "Development of Unique Xanthene-Cyanine Fused Near-Infrared Fluorescent Fluorophores with Superior Chemical Stability for Biological Fluorescence Imaging", CHEMISTRY-A EUROPEAN JOURNAL, vol. 21, no. 2, 7 January 2015 (2015-01-07), pages 733 - 45, XP055720039, ISSN: 0947-6539, DOI: 10.1002/chem.201404718 *
I M GAVRILYUK, A A ISHCHENKO, M A KUDINOVA, A I TOLMACHEV: "Pyrylocyanines. 18. Unsymmetrical flavylocyanines on the basis of methoxysubstituted 4-methylflavylium salts", CHEMISTRY OF HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS, vol. 19, 1 September 1983 (1983-09-01), pages 948 - 950, XP055720058, DOI: 10.1007/BF00506876 *
I. M. GAVRILYUK, A. A. ISHCHENKO, M. A. KUDINOVA , A. I. TOLMACHEV : "Pyrylocyanines. 17. Symmetrical flavylocyanines based on methoxy-substituted 4-methylflavylium salts", CHEMISTRY OF HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS, vol. 19, 1 March 1983 (1983-03-01), pages 243 - 247, XP055720057, DOI: 10.1007/BF00513252 *
JORDAN ATCHISON, SUKANTA KAMILA, HEATHER NESBITT, KIERAN A. LOGAN, DEAN M NICHOLAS, COLIN FOWLEY, JAMES DAVIS, BRIDGEEN CALLAN, AN: "Iodinated cyanine dyes: a new class of sensitisers for use in NIR activated photodynamic therapy (PDT", CHEMICAL COMMUNICATIONS, vol. 53, no. 12, 1 January 2017 (2017-01-01), pages 2009 - 2012, XP055720044, ISSN: 1359-7345, DOI: 10.1039/C6CC09624G *
JUCHEN ZHANG, ZENGYING QIAO, PEIPEI YANG, JIE PAN, LEI WANG, HAO WANG: "Recent advances in near-infrared absorption nanomaterials as photoacoustic contrast agents for biomedical imaging", CHINESE JOURNAL OF CHEMISTRY, vol. 33, no. 1, 1 January 2015 (2015-01-01), CN, pages 35 - 52, XP055720042, ISSN: 1001-604X, DOI: 10.1002/cjoc.201400493 *
KOVALSKA, V.B. ; VOLKOVA, K.D. ; LOSYTSKYY, M.YU. ; TOLMACHEV, O.I. ; BALANDA, A.O. ; YARMOLUK, S.M.: "6,6'-Disubstituted benzothiazole trimethine cyanines - new fluorescent dyes for DNA detection", SPECTROCHIMICA ACTA PART A: MOLECULAR AND BIOMOLECULAR SPECTROSCOPY, vol. 65, no. 2, 1 October 2006 (2006-10-01), pages 271 - 277, XP028036415, ISSN: 1386-1425, DOI: 10.1016/j.saa.2005.10.042 *
LI BENHAO, LU LINGFEI, ZHAO M ENGYAO, UHAI LEI Z, FANZHANG: "An efficient 1064 nm NIR-II excitation fluorescent molecular dye for deep tissue high resolution dynamic bioimaging", ANGEWANDTE CHEMIE INTERNATIONAL EDITION, vol. 57, no. 25, 1 March 2018 (2018-03-01), pages 7483 - 7487, XP055810419, DOI: 10.1002/anie.201801226 *
M BLACKBURN , G B SANKEY, ALEXANDER ROBERTSON , W B WHALLY : "Reactions of flavylium salts with dimethylaniline and malonic acid", JOURNAL OF THE CHEMICAL SOCIETY , 1 January 1952 (1952-01-01), pages 1573 - 1576, XP055720060 *
M. KAMEL, H. SHOEB: "Dibenzoxanthylium salts-III: Studies on 9-methylene-3,4, 5,6- dibenzoxanthene and 3,4,5,6-dibenzoxanthylomethines", TETRAHEDRON, vol. 20, no. 3, 1 January 1964 (1964-01-01), pages 483 - 9, XP055720056, DOI: 10.1016/S0040-4020(01)98609-0 *
MAGED HENARY; SHIRISH PARANJPE; ERIC A OWENS: "Synthesis and applications of benzothiazole containing cyanine dyes", HETEROCYCLIC COMMUNICATIONS, vol. 19, no. 1, 1 March 2013 (2013-03-01), pages 1 - 11, XP055720033, DOI: 10.1515/hc-2013-0012 *
MICHAEL R. DETTY: "Heavy Atom Effects in Tellurapyrylium Dyes Useful in Photodynamic Therapy and Catalytic Generation of H2O2", PHOSPHORUS, SULFUR, AND SILICON AND THE RELATED ELEMENTS, vol. 67, no. 1-4, 1 April 1992 (1992-04-01), pages 383 - 404, XP009527864, DOI: 10.1080/10426509208045862 *
QINYUAN GUO, SHENGLIN LUO, QINGRONG QI, CHUNMENG SHI: "Preliminary structure-activity relationship study of heptamethine indocyanine dyes for tumor-targeted imaging", JOURNAL OF INNOVATIVE OPTICAL HEALTH SCIENCES, vol. 6, no. 1, 1 January 2013 (2013-01-01), pages 1 - 7, XP055720036, ISSN: 1793-5458, DOI: 10.1142/S179354581350003X *
S.V. VASYLUK; O.O. VINIYCHUK; YE.M. PORONIK; YU.P. KOVTUN; M.P. SHANDURA; V.M. YASHCHUK; O.D. KACHKOVSKY;: "Breaking of symmetrical charge distribution in xanthylocyanine chromophores detecting by their absorption spectra", JOURNAL OF MOLECULAR STRUCTURE, vol. 990, no. 1-3, 30 December 2010 (2010-12-30), pages 6 - 13, XP028170268, ISSN: 0022-2860, DOI: 10.1016/j.molstruc.2010.12.047 *
SHANDURA, M.P. ; PORONIK, YE.M. ; KOVTUN, YU.P.: "Substituted xanthylocyanines. II. Pyroninocyanines", DYES AND PIGMENTS, vol. 66, no. 3, 1 September 2005 (2005-09-01), pages 171 - 171, XP025281091, ISSN: 0143-7208, DOI: 10.1016/j.dyepig.2004.09.011 *
SHI CHANGHONG; WU JASON BOYANG; PAN DONGFENG: "Review on near-infrared heptamethine cyanine dyes as theranostic agents for tumor imaging, targeting, and photodynamic therapy", JOURNAL OF BIOMEDICAL OPTICS, vol. 21, no. 5, 1 May 2016 (2016-05-01), pages 1 - 11, XP060071978, ISSN: 1083-3668, DOI: 10.1117/1.JBO.21.5.050901 *
SHINDY H.A.: "Fundamentals in the chemistry of cyanine dyes: A review", DYES AND PIGMENTS, vol. 145, 15 June 2017 (2017-06-15), pages 505 - 13, XP085123184, ISSN: 0143-7208, DOI: 10.1016/j.dyepig.2017.06.029 *
SYED MUHAMMAD USAMA, SOPIDA THAVORNPRADIT, KEVIN BURGESS: "Optimized Heptamethine Cyanines for Photodynamic Therapy", ACS APPLIED BIO MATERIALS, vol. 1, no. 4, 15 October 2018 (2018-10-15), pages 1195 - 205, XP055670429, ISSN: 2576-6422, DOI: 10.1021/acsabm.8b00414 *
TIAN-YI LI, TONI MEYER, ZAIFEI MA, JOHANNES BENDUHN, CHRISTIAN KöRNER, OLAF ZEIKA, KOEN VANDEWAL, KARL LEO: "Small molecule near-infrared boron dipyrromethene donors for organic tandem solar cells", JOURNAL OF THE AMERICAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY, vol. 139, no. 39, 15 September 2017 (2017-09-15), pages 13636 - 13639, XP002798119, DOI: 10.1021/jacs.7b07887 *
VINIYCHUK O.O.; LEVCHENKO S.M.; PRZHONSKA O.V.; KACHKOVSKY O.D.; BRICKS YU.L.; KUDINOVA M.O.; KOVTUN YU.P.; PORONIK YE.M.; SHANDUR: "Electronic transitions in polymethine dyes involving local and delocalized levels", JOURNAL OF MOLECULAR STRUCTURE, vol. 1060, 24 February 2014 (2014-02-24), pages 30 - 37, XP028826696, ISSN: 0022-2860, DOI: 10.1016/j.molstruc.2013.12.038 *
YANFEN WEI, DAN CHENG, TIANBING REN, YINHUI LI, ZEBING ZENG, LIN YUAN: "Design of NIR chromenylium-cyanine fluorophore library for ''switch-ON'' and ratiometric detection of bio-active species in vivo", ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY, vol. 88, no. 3, 2 February 2016 (2016-02-02), pages 1842 - 9, XP055720037, ISSN: 0003-2700, DOI: 10.1021/acs.analchem.5b04169 *

Cited By (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11292778B2 (en) 2017-06-05 2022-04-05 The Regents Of The University Of California Heterocyclyl polymethine IR chromophores
WO2022024942A1 (en) * 2020-07-29 2022-02-03 Agc株式会社 Optical filter
CN112225721A (en) * 2020-10-21 2021-01-15 复旦大学 Acid-responsive near-infrared lysosome organic small-molecule fluorescent probe and preparation method and application thereof
CN112409590A (en) * 2020-10-21 2021-02-26 复旦大学 Organic nano assembly for biological imaging of second window in near infrared region and preparation method and application thereof
CN112225721B (en) * 2020-10-21 2021-09-17 复旦大学 Acid-responsive near-infrared lysosome organic small-molecule fluorescent probe and preparation method and application thereof
CN114478587A (en) * 2021-12-29 2022-05-13 南京邮电大学 Near-infrared two-region dye, nano-particle, preparation method and application thereof
CN114478587B (en) * 2021-12-29 2023-07-28 南京邮电大学 Near infrared two-region dye, nanoparticle, and preparation method and application thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP3891224A4 (en) 2023-01-18
EP3891224A1 (en) 2021-10-13

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20210363124A1 (en) Heterocyclyl polymethine ir chromophores
WO2020118116A1 (en) Heterocyclyl polymethine ir chromophores
US11292778B2 (en) Heterocyclyl polymethine IR chromophores
Ciubini et al. Design and synthesis of symmetrical pentamethine cyanine dyes as NIR photosensitizers for PDT
JP6910551B2 (en) Photosensitizers, their derivatives and applications
JPS625924A (en) Pharmaceutical composition containing novel tetrapyrrolepolyaminomonocarboxylic acid
KR102068609B1 (en) Photosensitizer, composition having the same, and method for photodynamic treatment
Yang et al. Thieno [3, 2-b] thiophene-DPP based near-infrared nanotheranostic agent for dual imaging-guided photothermal/photodynamic synergistic therapy
Deng et al. Synthesis and bio-evaluation of novel hypocrellin derivatives: Potential photosensitizers for photodynamic therapy of age-related macular degeneration
CN104311566A (en) Preparation method and application of water soluble cationic zinc phthalocyanine photosensitizer
CN112279862B (en) Near-infrared porphyrin compound and preparation method and application thereof
BR112017020052B1 (en) HALOGENATED TETRAPHENYLBACTERIOCHLORINES AND CHLORINE ATROPISOMERS AND THEIR USE IN PHOTODYNAMIC THERAPY
EP1250339B1 (en) Porphyrins and related compounds
WO2010132547A2 (en) Oxaza heterocyclic compounds for phototherapy
KR20210116155A (en) Compound, photosensitizer and composition for mitochondria-targeted diagnosis or therapy of tumors including the same, and photodynamic therapy using the composition
CN111569069A (en) Tumor double-targeting diagnosis and treatment photosensitizer and preparation method and application thereof
RU2372099C1 (en) Ytterbium tetrapyrazolyl porphyrin complexes as fluorescent tags to diagnose malignant growths
US20220409727A1 (en) Metal Complexes Bearing Bisstyryl-Bipyridine Ligand and Their Use as Photosensitizer Agent in One and Two-Photon Photodynamic Therapy
AU2024200852A1 (en) Near-infrared emitting porphyrin compound and preparation method and use thereof
CN113845471B (en) BSA (bovine serum albumin) -based pyridinium photosensitizer compound as well as preparation method and application thereof
US20230338538A1 (en) Compound for photothermal cancer therapy, composition including the same, and method for photothermal cancer therapy
US20220194952A1 (en) Tetrapyrrolic conjugates and uses thereof for imaging
KR20180019823A (en) Monosaccharide substituted tetrapyrazinoporphyrazine derivatives for photodynamic therapy and composition for photosensitizer comprising the same
CN116444542A (en) Thiophene-phenothiazine compound, synthesis method thereof and application thereof in preparation of phototherapy drugs
CN106632307B (en) Benzo [ c, d ] indolodane composite cyanine and synthetic method and application thereof

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19892945

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2019892945

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20210705